1. business and industrial
2. construction

PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS
RFP NUMBER: P35-140
VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS & ATTACHMENTS
KEMP MILL URBAN PARK RENOVATION
1200 ARCOLA AVENUE
WHEATON, MD 20902
SOLICITATION RELEASE DATE: THURSDAY, MAY 07, 2015
COMMISSION PROJECT TEAM:
AARON FELDMAN, PROJECT MANAGER
DAVID LINTON, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER
NATALIE FRANCIA HIDA, CONTRACTS AND PROCUREMENT SUPERVISOR
RFP P35-140 Volume 2 Kemp Mill UP r008
Revision: 2015.05.07-10:22
Volume 2
Page Vol2-i
RFP NUMBER: P35-140
KEMP MILL URBAN PARK RENOVATION
VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS & ATTACHMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Name
Specifications
Page
101 - Clearing and Grubbing
102 - Removal of Existing Facilities
105 - Project Identification Sign
107 - Construction Stakeout
111 - As Built Drawings and Support Documentation
200 - Excavation, Filling & Grading
212 - Stone Base
308 - Sediment and Erosion Control
322 - Storm Drainage and Stormwater Management
421 - Reinforcing Steel
504 - Hot Mix Asphalt- MNCPPC Amendment
607 - Chain Link Fence
705 - Seed and Sodding For Turf Areas
721 - Tree Preservation
722 - Plant Installation
723 - Landscape Soil
740- Playgrounds-Kemp Mill Urban Park-100%
741- Playgrounds - Special Conditions-100%
741a- Playgrounds - Special Conditions-100%
742- Notes to Bidders -100%
033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
034500 - Precast Architectural Concrete
055000 - Metal Fabrications
055213 - Metal Handrails and Guardrails
061500 - Wood Decking
066000 - Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Products and Fabrications
099653 - High Performance Paint Coatings
131213 - Exterior Fountains
26 0000 - Electrical General
26 0519 - Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
26 0533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
26 2416 - Panelboards
26 2726 - Wiring Devices
26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices
26 5100 - Interior Lighting
265600 - Exterior Lighting
32 31 20 - Ornamental Steel Fences and Gates
321600 - Resin Bonded Aggregate Paving
RFP P35-140 Volume 2 Kemp Mill UP r008
Revision: 2015.05.07-10:22
Volume 2
Vol2-1
Vol2-4
Vol2-6
Vol2-7
Vol2-9
Vol2-11
Vol2-20
Vol2-22
Vol2-25
Vol2-37
Vol2-40
Vol2-44
Vol2-46
Vol2-52
Vol2-57
Vol2-69
Vol2-74
Vol2-85
Vol2-91
Vol2-95
Vol2-96
Vol2-109
Vol2-115
Vol2-117
Vol2-126
Vol2-132
Vol2-139
Vol2-146
Vol2-155
Vol2-163
Vol2-173
Vol2-182
Vol2-187
Vol2-196
Vol2-202
Vol2-211
Vol2-216
Vol2-221
Vol2-225
Vol2-251
Vol2-255
Page Vol2-ii
RFP NUMBER: P35-140
KEMP MILL URBAN PARK RENOVATION
VOLUME 2 SPECIFICATIONS & ATTACHMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Document Name
Specifications
Page
33 7119 - Electrical Underground Ducts
334713 - Pond and Reservoir Liners
Vol2-259
Vol2-263
Attachments
Contingency 1801 Upgrade of Site Water Service if Directed by WSSC
Final Forest Conservation Plan Number PP2011001 Approval
Geotechnical Engineering Report dated 15 November 2010
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350347 - Yeshiva HS
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
RFP P35-140 Volume 2 Kemp Mill UP r008
Revision: 2015.05.07-10:22
Volume 2
Vol2-270
Vol2-271
Vol2-272
Vol2-297
Vol2-301
Page Vol2-iii
P35-140 Vol2-1
SECTION 101 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING
101.01.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of clearing and grubbing within the limits specified in the
Contract Documents. Site clearing work includes protection of existing trees
outside the disturbance limits, and trees within the disturbance limits that are
identified on the site plan to be saved.
101.01.01 DEFINITIONS
A.
Clearing. Clearing within the construction area includes removing and
disposing of trees, brush, shrubs, vegetation, rotten wood, rubbish,
fences and structures not specified in the Contract Documents for
removal and disposal. Clearing outside the construction area is
prohibited.
B.
Grubbing. Grubbing is removing from the ground and disposing of all
stumps, roots and stubs, brush and debris.
C.
Limits. Limits of clearing and grubbing include the construction area and
all ditch areas and stream or channel change areas and are identified as
the limit of disturbance shown on the sediment control plans.
D.
Disturbed Area. Any erodible material exposed by construction activities.
E.
Stabilization. Providing vegetation or structural measures (seed,
temporary or permanent mulch, soil stabilization matting, riprap, stone
aggregate, and paving by asphalt or concrete) that will prevent erosion.
The placement of one or more of these temporary or permanent
stabilization measures as directed by the Engineer shall satisfy the
requirements to proceed with the next grading unit or operation.
F.
Stabilized. An area covered with erosion resistant material such as grass
cover, seed and mulch, soil stabilization matting, riprap, stone aggregate,
or paving by asphalt or concrete.
G.
Site clearing work includes protection of existing trees outside the
disturbance limits, and trees within the disturbance limits that are
identified on the site plan to be saved. Please refer to section 721 Tree
Preservation.
101.01.2 MATERIALS
Provide barricades, coverings, and protective fence as necessary to prevent
damage to existing trees or improvements indicated to remain in place.
101.03 CONSTRUCTION
A.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to walk the limits of
disturbance/clearance with the M-NCPPC Project Manager before
clearance operations have begun.
B.
Protection of existing trees:
P35-140 Vol2-2
1. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain
in place, against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots,
skinning and bruising of bark, smothering (by stockpiling construction
materials or excavated materials within the drip line), excess foot and/or
vehicular traffic, and parking of vehicles within the drip line. Provide
temporary fences, barricades or guards as required to protect the trees
and vegetation to be left standing.
2. Water trees which are to remain within the limits of the contract work as
required to maintain their health during the course of construction
operations.
3. Root Pruning shall be performed wherever grades will be lowered
within the critical root zone of a tree to be preserved. See Section 721
Tree Preservation.
C. Site clearing:
1. Clearing shall consist of removal and disposal at ground level of trees,
brush, shrubs, grass, weeds, other vegetation, down timber, rotten wood,
rubbish, fences, incidental structures, bituminous and concrete paving,
and general debris within the limits of disturbance as shown on the plans.
2. Grubbing shall consist of removal of stumps, roots, stubs, foundations,
and other buried items and debris which interfere with this work. Such
removal shall be carried out to a depth of not less than two (2) feet below
sub-grade or sub-base levels.
3. Trees, stumps, and roots that are to be removed as a result of site
clearing shall be removed completely.
D. Disposal of waste material:
1. Burning of combustible cleared and grubbed materials is not permitted.
2. All waste material must be removed from the site and legally disposed
of.
E. Replacement of damaged trees:
1. A concerted effort shall be made by the Contractor to protect the trees
adjacent to the limits of clearance. If trees outside the limits or clearance
are damaged, the following procedures shall be followed to repair the
damage:
a) Repair or replace trees damaged by construction operations in
a manner acceptable to the M-NCPPC Arborist. Repair tree
damage by a qualified Contract Arborist. Replace trees, which
cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by the M-NCPPC Arborist.
b) If the M-NCPPC Arborist determines that the tree or shrub is
damaged and not repairable, the contractor will be responsible to
M-NCPPC for the following:
i. Removal and clean-up.
ii. Cost of Assessed value of tree as established through
procedures of the Council of Tree and Landscape
P35-140 Vol2-3
Appraisers or another agreeable method by the M-NCPPC
Arborist.
F. Protection and restoration of existing improvements:
1. Restore any improvements damaged by this work to their original
condition, as acceptable to M-NCPPC or other parties or authorities
having jurisdiction.
101.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment shall be full compensation for clearing and grubbing including removal
and disposal of fences, selective tree trimming and scar repair, when not covered
as a specific pay item in the contract document, all material, labor, equipment,
tools and incidental items necessary to complete this work. Payment shall be
made on a unit rate or lump sum basis as indicated in the bid proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-4
SECTION 102 - REMOVAL OF EXISTING FACILITIES
102.01 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the removal, wholly or in part, and legal off-site
disposal of pavement, fences, curbing, walks, pipe, guardrails, structures and
any other existing features which are not designated to remain as indicated in the
Contract drawings or as directed by the Construction Manager. The work shall
also include salvaging of any designated materials and proper backfilling of the
resulting trenches, holes and pits. Items that are not specifically listed for removal
as described herein will be performed under Section 200 “Excavation, Filling and
Grading item” or Section 101 – Clearing and Grubbing.
102.02 MATERIALS
Not applicable
102.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all structures and obstructions or
portion thereof as necessary for the satisfactory completion of the project. Any
designated salvageable material shall be removed, without unnecessary
damage, and shall be stored by the Contractor within the project limits as
directed. Any materials designated for salvage and return to M-NCPPC shall be
protected and returned to a place designated by Construction Manager.
B. Structures located in roadways or parking lots (culverts, pavement, etc.) shall
be removed only when satisfactory arrangements have been made to
accommodate traffic. Pipe that has been designated for removal and storage
must be cleaned and carefully stored so as not to damage the sections of pipe.
C. Pavement, walks and curbs to be removed either wholly or in part shall be cut
neatly or removed at an existing joint. Asphalt pavement to be patched shall be
saw cut at limits designated in the field. Where paved areas are designated for
removal, all underlying gravel and sub-base material shall be removed.
D. Existing drainage structures (manholes, inlets, catch basins) designated to be
abandoned must be removed to a minimum of one foot below finished subgrade
or ground surface in a manner that will not damage pipes which are to remain.
When directed, existing inlet and outlet pipes shall be sealed with masonry or
concrete of a thickness (2’ min) acceptable to the Construction Manager.
Castings to be removed will become the property of the Contractor, unless
indicated otherwise on the plans.
102.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The accepted quantities of existing facilities removed and disposed of, as
directed, will be paid for at the contract lump sum or unit price as specified in the
proposal, which shall be full compensation for removal and disposal. The
Commission reserves the right to eliminate from this item any or all facilities. For
each facility eliminated from this item, the item will be credited to the extent of the
cost eliminated, which will be determined from a breakdown submitted by the
contractor showing the tabulation of individual unit costs used in arriving at the
contract prices for this item. A breakdown of existing facilities shall be submitted
and accepted by the engineer prior to beginning work. The price bid shall include
P35-140 Vol2-5
all labor, materials, and equipment required to perform the work. If this item is not
listed in the bid items, it shall be considered incidental to the overall contract.
P35-140 Vol2-6
SECTION 105 - PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
105.01 DESCRIPTION
Within ten (10) calendar days after the start of construction, the Contractor shall
furnish and erect a Project Identification Sign at the project site, at a location
selected by the Project Manager. The sign shall be neatly painted, weather
resistant and lettered, to identify the project, with pertinent information on the
project as stipulated by the Project Manager. Contractor shall submit a 8 ½”
X 11” graphic representation of sign for approval prior to fabrication.
105.02 MATERIALS
A.The sign shall be 4' x 6' constructed of 3/4" plywood and shall have a smooth
finish white background. Lettering shall be black latex paint or adhesive vinyl
firmly affixed to the plywood surface, and each letter shall be a minimum of 3” in
height. Letters shall be legible graphic type, as approved by the Project
Manager. The sign shall be mounted on two 4” x 4” timber posts with adequate
bolts and fittings to ensure proper stability.
105.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. After installation of the sign is completed, it will be inspected and approved by
the M-NCPPC Project Manager. If reflection is apparent on the sign, it’s
positioning shall be adjusted by the Contractor, as directed by the Project
Manager. The sign shall be erected at a height where the bottom of the sign is a
minimum of 5’ from the ground it is erected on. The Contractor shall maintain the
sign for the duration of the project. If peeling or damage occurs due to weather,
construction activity or vandalism, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
restore the sign to its original condition at no cost to the Commission. At the
completion of the project, the Contractor shall remove the sign from the project
site.
105.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Project ID sign may be considered incidental work, or bid as a separate item in
this contract. If it is not listed in the Bid Items it shall be considered incidental to
the overall contract. Please refer to the bid items in the Bidding Documents for
method of payment.
P35-140 Vol2-7
SECTION 107 - CONSTRUCTION STAKEOUT
107.01
DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing and maintaining construction layout stakes as
specified in the Contract Documents or as directed by the M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
Horizontal and vertical control on site will be established by the Commission prior to the
commencement of construction. All construction stakeout as and when necessary for the
satisfactory completion of this project shall be provided by the Contractor.
107.02
MATERIALS
The material for flagging the clearing limits shall be a 3” international orange vinyl material with
LOD printed on it with 2” letters. The Contractor shall, as part of the construction stakeout
operation, before any clearing operation commences and prior to pre-construction meeting with
MCDPS, demarcate limit of disturbance throughout the entire project as shown in the Contract
Documents and labeled as Limit of disturbance to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager.
107.03
CONSTRUCTION
A.
The Contractor shall use the horizontal and vertical controls as provided by the
Commission and shown on the plans; to accurately stakeout all proposed
facilities, LOD, and grading. The Contractor is responsible for all layout work
and stakeout work as necessary (including re-staking as needed) to insure proper
locations and grading as shown on the plans.
B.
Prior to construction, all stakeouts must be reviewed by the Construction Manager
or Inspector. Construction manager review shall not be construed as approval.
C.
Commission crews shall in no way be responsible for providing further assistance
to the Contractor above and beyond providing the initial horizontal and vertical
controls. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to protect and maintain all
control lines and benchmarks. Reestablishing damaged controls or benchmarks
will be done by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
D.
The Contractor shall use competent personnel and state of the art equipment for
all engineering work required to set and maintain the elevations and dimensions
as specified in the Contract Documents.
107.03.02
GRADE CONTROLS
The Contractor shall provide approved equipment to check the grades as directed by the
Construction Manager.
P35-140 Vol2-8
107.03.03
FLAGGING
The flagging shall be placed continuously around work areas. In areas where trees are not to be
disturbed, the Contractor shall individually flag those trees in a line along the clearing limits that
are not to be moved or destroyed and provide tree protection measures as required in the contract
documents. If the clearing or LOD flagging has been disturbed or damaged, the Contractor shall
reflag the areas within 48 hours after notification by the Engineer that replacement flagging is
needed.
107.03.04
UTILITIES
The contractor must contact Miss Utility to locate all existing off site utilities. The contractor is
responsible for the location of the on-site underground utilities that are not located by Miss
Utility. It is the contractor’s responsibility to furnish written proof to the Construction Manager
that all utilities have been cleared for both off site and on site utilities. This proof may be a copy
of the Miss Utility fax-back or a copy of the Miss utility on line record for off site and written
confirmation from the contractor for the location of on site utilities. Excavation may proceed
only when both Miss Utility and the Construction Manager agree that all utilities have been
located. Test pitting of utilities will be the responsibility of contractor and will be incidental to
the work.
107.04
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Construction stakeout will not be measured but will be paid for at the Contract - lump sum price.
The payment will be full compensation for furnishing, placing and maintaining construction
layout stakes, flagging of clearing limits and wetlands, and for all material, labor, equipment,
tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment of the Contract lump sum price
will be prorated and paid in equal amounts on each monthly estimate. The number of months
used for prorating will be the number estimated to complete the work. If construction stakeout is
not listed in the bid items, it shall be considered incidental to the overall contract.
P35-140 Vol2-9
SECTION 111 - AS-BUILT DRAWINGS (RECORD DRAWINGS)
AND SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION
111.01
DESCRIPTION
Throughout construction, the Contractor shall maintain all pertinent records of
construction materials, testing, and inspections required to document that the actual
construction is in conformance with the Contract Documents and regulatory permits. At
the completion of the project, the contractor shall develop certified final redlined as-built
drawings of the project and obtain approval and closeout of all permits, including those
from the Montgomery County Department of Permitting Services (MCDPS). The
Contractor shall also provide the Commission with two (2) bound copies of all
submittals, shop drawings, correspondence, material certifications, operating manuals,
inspections, and testing results related to completed project. Preparation of As-Built
plans includes, but is not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Confirming the horizontal locations and vertical elevations of all new facilities
built throughout the park (relative to original controls provided by the
Commission)
Storm drain and storm water management facilities shall be surveyed during
installation. This includes invert elevations and dimensions for base of core
trench, infiltration trench, filters, underground structures, and geotechnical
information as required by MCDPS, etc.
Underground utilities, irrigation systems, septic tanks, etc. including profiles,
inverts and top of facility elevations
Foot print of structures and top of curb elevations
Any considerable change or shift in the size or location of any ballfield or
other facilities from approved drawings
Any utility certification as required for as-built certification of the
underground utilities such as WSSC
All the survey work required for As-Built plans is the sole responsibility of
the contractor
Any significant deviations from the approved drawings
A digital file in AutoCADD format and a set of mylars of the approved AsBuilt plans and all supporting documents must be submitted to the
Commission
In addition to the standard requirements of the owner, the Contractor shall also be
responsible for completing all As-Built requirements related to any permits issued for the
project. The Contractor shall prepare As-Built plans in accordance with the standards,
procedures, and requirements of the permit agency at the time of construction. This
includes any required survey, inspection, and certification by an independent firm
familiar with the work performed. For example, the completed As-Built package for
Stormwater Managements facilities shall include all supporting documents and
information as required on the latest MCDPS “As-Built/Record Drawing Plan Review
Checklist” (sample attached). Furthermore, the Contractor shall make any and all repairs
and/or modifications required to obtain As-Built approval and final release of permit at
P35-140 Vol2-10
no additional cost to the owner. The Contractor shall submit certified As-Built plans
and support documents directly to the permitting agency, with two (2) copies to the
Construction Manager. Once DPS approves the As-Built plans and Construction Manager
concurs, the Contractor shall submit to the Commission a digital file including scans of
all approved Mylars including permit drawings. The Contractor shall coordinate with the
permitting agency and inspectors as required to obtain final approval and permit release.
The Contractor shall consider the As-Built preparation, review, and approval as part of
the overall construction schedule and shall complete this work within the Contract Period
established for the project. The design documents in electronic file format (AutoCADD
2000) including base survey information will be provided to the contractor.
111.02
MATERIAL
Not Applicable
111.03
CONSTRUCTION
Not Applicable
111.04
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools and incidental
items necessary to complete the work. Payment shall be made on a unit rate or lump sum
basis as shown in the bid proposal. Up to 20% of the full payment for storm water
management related bid items may be withheld at the discretion of the Commission
pending MCDPS approval of As-Built plans.
P35-140 Vol2-11
SECTION 200 - EXCAVATION, FILLING & GRADING
200.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Work consists of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for
and incidental to the execution and completion of earthwork as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.
B. The extent of excavation, filling and grading is shown on the drawings.
C. Preparation of subgrade for slabs and pavements is part of this work.
D. Backfilling around facilities such as structures, curbs, pavements, etc., is
included as part of this work.
200.01.01 DEFINITIONS
A. The determination of rock excavation, which will be measured in the field by
the Commission and paid for at Unit Price per cubic yard or method acceptable
to the M-NCPPC’s Project Manager, shall be that mineral material which will
require blasting, use of pneumatic equipment for breaking and which is not
removable by use of a Caterpillar model D-8 Bulldozer or equivalent with a
single-tooth ripper. The removal of disintegrated rock shall be classified as earth
Excavation. The rock excavation as measured in the field shall be deducted from
the volume of Excavation item provided it is within the grading limits of the area.
Rock Excavation outside of these limits shall be carried out only at the discretion
and direction of the M-NCPPC’s Project Manager.
B. Minimum Effort: If rock is not removed during the process of normal digging
and ripping, then extend the excavation to expose the rock surface within the
limit of original excavation. Contact the M-NCPPC Project Manager or his
representative for further direction.
C. Earth Excavation: Anything not classified as rock.
D. Unsuitable Materials: Debris, man-made or fabricated materials, concrete
spoil, decayable material, and soft, expansive or unstable matter which cannot
be field compacted to densities specified.
200.02 MATERIALS
A. Fill and backfill (Refer to section 916 - MSHA, 2008 Standard Specifications)
1. Minimum requirements:
a. Cohesion less materials shall be classified in accordance with
AASHTO guidelines as either A-3 (sand) or A-2 (sand and fines),
and the minimum dry unit weight shall not be less than 110 PCF
maximum dry density as determined by A.S.T.M. D-698.
b. Cohesive materials shall be classified in accordance with
AASHTO guidelines as either A-4 (silt), A-5 (silt), A-6 (clay) or A-7
(clay) with a minimum dry unit weight not less than 105 PCF
maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D-698.
c. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials approved
by the Project Manager and free of rock or gravel larger than
P35-140 Vol2-12
2" (top 12” of subgrade) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen
materials, organic and other deleterious matter.
d. For topsoil please refer to section 723.
B. Sheeting, shoring and bracing: Sheeting, shoring and bracing materials shall
be timber, steel or aluminum, or a combination thereof, designed as required by
a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Maryland, to retain the earth
around structures, prevent cave-in and settlements, and to fulfill all safety
requirements.
1. Timber shall be structural grade with minimum working stress of 1,100
psi.
2. Steel sheet piling shall conform to requirements of ASTM A328,
continuous interlocking type. Struts, bracing and all other accessories
required for the sheet piling system shall meet requirements of ASTM
A36.
200.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Submittals: Test Reports-Excavating, Filling, and Grading:
1. The Contractor shall be responsible for hiring a geotechnical company
to carry out soil testing for all structural fills and pond embankments and
as required and shall submit 2 copies of the following reports directly to
the Project Manager from the testing service, with copy to the
Contractor.
a. Verification of each footing subgrade.
b. Field density test reports.
c. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of
soil encountered.
d. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or
results of bearing tests of each 8” stratum tested.
e. Summary of all testing and certification (sealed by PE) that
construction was completed in accordance with contract drawings
and specifications.
B. Site Information:
1. Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as
representations or warrants of continuity of such conditions between soil
borings. It is expressly understood that M-NCPPC will not be responsible
for interpretations or conclusions drawn by Contractor. Data are made
available for the convenience of the Contractor.
2. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made
by Contractor at no cost to M-NCPPC.
C. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work. If
utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during
earthwork operations.
1. Should piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,
consult the Project Manager immediately for directions as to
procedures. Cooperate with M-NCPPC and utility companies in keeping
respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to
satisfaction of utility M-NCPPC.
P35-140 Vol2-13
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by
the Commission or others, except when permitted in writing by the
Project Manager and then only after acceptable temporary utility
services have been provided.
D. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is prohibited. If use of explosives is
required it shall be with prior written permission from the Commission and
authorities having jurisdiction. In that case the Contractor is solely responsible for
handling, storage, and use of explosive materials when their use is permitted.
E. Protection
1. Safety: Provide protective measures necessary for the safety of
workmen, the public and adjacent property. Prevent cave-ins, collapse of
walls, structures and slopes, both on and adjacent to the site.
2. Standards: Comply with regulations of local authorities having
jurisdiction, including all applicable OSHA requirements.
3. Repair: Include the removal of damaged materials and replacement
with new materials (as required by original Contract Documents) where
such materials are affected by settlement or other damage.
F. Site Preparation
1. Excavation consists of cutting, removing, filling, compacting and
grading of material encountered when establishing required grade
elevations in accordance with plans and specifications, which are not
classified rock excavation or unauthorized excavation.
a. Topsoil- all topsoil must be removed from all areas prior to
grading. Topsoil shall be stripped, stockpiled and re-spread on
unpaved areas.
2. Rock excavation consists of removal and disposal of materials
encountered that cannot be excavated without the use of explosives or
pneumatic equipment. Typical materials classified as rock are, solid rock,
rock in ledges, and rock hard aggregate deposits (refer to section
200.01.1). Intermittent drilling performed to increase production but not
necessary to permit excavation of material encountered will be classified
as earth excavation.
3. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials in excavation
under footings, foundation bases, retaining walls, slabs, slopes, site
grading by extending indicated bottom elevations of footings or indicated
subgrade elevations or indicated line grades or dimensions without
specific direction of the M-NCPPC Project Manager. All
unauthorized excavation including remedial work such as backfilling and
compacting with earth or gravel, lean concrete fill or any other material to
bring elevations to grades as specified and to the satisfaction of the MNCPPC Project Manager, shall be carried out at the Contractor's
expense.
P35-140 Vol2-14
4. Additional excavation: When excavation has reached the required
grades, subgrade elevations and lines, notify the M-NCPPC Project
Manager, who will make an inspection of the site. If unsuitable bearing
materials are encountered at required elevations, the M-NCPPC
Project Manager and/or Geotech Engineer may require further
(deeper) excavation and replacement of unsuitable (excavated) material.
a. All areas to be paved will be proof rolled at subgrade in the
presence of the M-NCPPC Project Manager or Park
Inspector. If deemed necessary, bad soils below subgrade will be
undercut and replaced as described below. At the end of each day
undercutting is performed, the Contractor shall certify, in writing,
the quantity, in cubic yards, of undercutting performed in
agreement with the Park Inspector. Both parties shall sign the
certification, which shall be submitted to the Project Manager
at the end of the day.
b. Type 1 undercutting: If possible unsuitable soils will be removed
and distributed on-site in locations designated by the M-NCPPC
Project Manager; otherwise materials will be hauled off-site
at no additional cost to M-NCPPC. Suitable soils will be placed in
the undercut area from on-site sources; as directed by the MNCPPC Project Manager. Refer to appropriate compaction
section.
c. Type 2 undercutting: If possible unsuitable soils will be removed
and distributed on-site in locations designated by the Project
Manager; otherwise materials will be hauled off-site at no
additional cost to M-NCPPC. Crusher run stone or other select
borrow material will be hauled in and used as replacement
material as directed by the Project Manager. Refer to
appropriate compaction section.
5. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply
with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and
brace where sloping is not possible space restrictions or stability
of materials excavated.
a. Maintain sides of slopes of excavations in safe
conditions until completion of backfilling.
6. Dewatering:
a. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater
from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site
and surrounding area.
b. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.
Remove water to prevent softening of subgrades,
foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil
changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and
foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suctions
and discharge lines, and other dewatering system
components necessary to convey water from excavations.
c. Convey water removed from excavations to collecting or
run-off areas with approval of MCDPS Inspector. Provide
P35-140 Vol2-15
and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other
diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do
not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.
d. Contractors shall be aware of low areas that are likely to
experience groundwater seeps and take appropriate
measures to properly dewater excavations in those areas.
e. Dewatering will be the responsibility of the contractor
and shall be done in conformance with best management
practices and shall be incidental to the contract. The
Commission shall not pay for areas requiring undercutting
due to insufficient dewatering practices.
7. Material Storage:
a. Stockpile and protect satisfactory excavated materials,
until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape
stockpiles for proper drainage.
b. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of
excavations.
c. Dispose of excess and or unsatisfactory and waste
materials as specified hereinafter.
8. Excavation for Structures:
a. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a
tolerance of plus or minus 0.10', and extending sufficient
distance from footings and foundations to permit placing
and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services,
other construction and for inspection.
b. In excavating for footings and foundations, do not
disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final
grade just before concrete is placed. Trim bottoms to
required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive
other work.
c. Concrete footings, foundations and like structures shall
be placed at the elevations shown on the drawings or as
specified. Buried walls of former structures, which may
exist where footings, foundations, etc., are to be placed,
are to be removed to one foot below the elevations of
bottoms of such footings, foundations, etc. When this has
been accomplished, the M-NCPPC Project Manager
shall inspect such walls and if he finds them to be
structurally sound, removal shall cease. However, if the MNCPPC Project Manager considers further removal
necessary, the Contractor shall proceed until suitable
conditions are reached. The Contractor shall accomplish
such removal to the elevations of bottoms of footings,
foundations, etc., as part of the contract; however, he shall
be paid for required removal one foot below these
elevations. Also, if due to the character of the soil or to
encountering utilities or obstacles not known to exist, the
M-NCPPC Project Manager orders other additional
P35-140 Vol2-16
excavation performed, the Contractor shall be paid for
such work, as well as for further removal of walls, in
accordance with applicable unit prices listed in the Bid or
Proposal. However, the Contractor will not be paid for
excessive excavation as a result of an error on his part.
d. All topsoil shall be removed from areas where footings,
foundations, pavement or structures have to be built. If the
topsoil extends deeper than proposed elevations, then
procedure given in paragraph F.4 above shall be followed.
9. Excavation for Stone, Concrete, and Bituminous Pavements:
Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross-section, elevations
and grades as shown. All excavated areas, which are to be paved, shall
be compacted in accordance with paragraph 12, of this Section.
a. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 1'0" below
subgrade and backfill with suitable material approved by the
Geotechnical Engineer.
b. All topsoil from under areas to be paved with stone, asphalt or
concrete, shall be removed to the subgrade elevations. If
unsuitable material is encountered, with the direction of MNCPPC’s Project Manager, all unsuitable material shall be
removed until suitable soil is encountered. At that point the MNCPPC Project Manager shall inspect the soil and if that is
deeper than the required elevations for sub-base, sub-grade etc.,
the M-NCPPC’s Project Manager shall direct the use of
replacement material to bring grades up to required elevations.
Such backfill materials shall be compacted in accordance with
specifications for compaction until required density is achieved
before proceeding with the next step. Procedure as laid out in
paragraph F.4 above shall be followed in such cases for additional
excavation.
10. Excavation for Ditches:
Cut ditches to cross-sections and grades as shown. Deposit excavated
materials to prevent cave-ins or material falling or sliding into ditch.
Keep ditches free of debris until final acceptance of the work.
11. Cold Weather Protection:
Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35 degrees F.
12. Fills and Backfills:
a. Improved unpaved areas: Areas on which fill is to be placed
shall be stripped of all topsoil and then scarified prior to placement
of fill. Fill material shall be placed in 8-inch (maximum thickness
before compaction) layers to be continuous and horizontal over
the entire length of fill. Each layer of fill shall be compacted by an
approved power roller. Compaction shall be carried out at
optimum moisture content to a dry density of 85% for nonstructural areas. For slopes over 3:1 please see plans for
P35-140 Vol2-17
specifications or follow instructions given by M-NCPPC
Project Manager. The dry density of the compacted fill shall
be determined by ASTM D1556. The moisture content of the
compacted embankment layers shall be as mentioned elsewhere.
The remaining embankment shall be suitable earth fill, free from
stones that will be retained on a sieve with 3-inch square openings
or as directed by the M-NCPPC’s Project Manager, and
compacted as specified above. Soft spots identified by the MNCPPC’s Project Manager during proof rolling will be
undercut and backfilled. Proof rolling and compaction equipment
shall meet the requirements as mentioned elsewhere. Payment for
undercutting and backfilling to eliminate soft spots shall be made
in accordance with the Contract provisions affecting the work.
b. Paved surfaces and slab backfill: Compact after proof rolling
and each layer of backfill or fill materials to 95% maximum dry
density.
c. Footings and Foundations: When permitted by M-NCPPC
Project Manager sub-foundation concrete can be used or
CR6 can be placed under footings and foundations and shall be
compacted to not less than 95% maximum density.
d. Athletic Fields: Compact after proof rolling and each layer of
backfill or fill materials to 90% maximum dry density.
e. Pond embankments: Project for stormwater management
facilities and other pond embankments shall be completed in
accordance with NRCS-MD Code No. 378 Pond Standards/
Specifications and MCDPS Water Resources Section
requirements.
f. Moisture Control: The soils used in fill and backfill shall be
moistened or aerated to within 2% of the optimum at no additional
cost to the M-NCPPC.
1. Where the soil layer is too dry, the Contractor shall apply
water uniformly using approved equipment to increase the
moisture content to within 2% of the optimum.
2. Where the soil layer is too wet, the Contractor shall dry
the soils by plowing or discing to aerate the soil and
reduce the moisture content to within 2% of the optimum.
g. Tests including classification, fill placement and soil compaction
shall be made under the supervision of the M-NCPPC’s
Project Manager or Inspector. Compaction Equipment shall
be subject to approval by the Project Manager and shall
meet the following criteria based on soil type as follows:
1. Cohesionless Soils: Vibratory drum compactors
weighing in excess of 5 tons and capable of providing
minimum impact force 30,000 lbs. at minimum frequency of
100 v.p.m with smooth drum. The maximum speed shall
not exceed 5 M.P.H. and a minimum of 3 passes is
required for all areas.
2. Cohesive Soils: Sheepsfoot or tamping rollers shall
consist of metal drums or shells, not less than four feet in
diameter, equipped with self-cleaning tamping feet.
P35-140 Vol2-18
Tamping rollers shall make at least 4 complete coverages
of the material being compacted and rolling shall continue
until the tamping feet "build-up" or "walkout" of the surface.
Operating speeds of tamping roller shall not exceed 5
m.p.h.
13. Fine Grading
a. Quality Assurance
Contractor must supply evidence of having performed similar fine
grading work on a least three other sites especially in regards to
maintaining the degree of accuracy outlined in the grading
specifications.
The equipment, which is used on the site, shall be capable of
producing work within the grading tolerance as specified within
this specification for area to be graded.
b. Procedure
1. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of
disturbance under this section, including adjacent
transition areas. Smooth finish surface within specified
tolerances; compact in accordance with paragraph F.12 of
this Section with uniform levels or slopes between points
where elevations are shown, or between such points and
existing grades.
2. Ditches: Finish ditches to ensure proper flow and
drainage.
3. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within
not more than 0.10' above or below the required subgrade
elevations.
4. Pavements: Shape subgrade under pavement to line,
grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than
1/2" above or below the required subgrade elevation, duly
compacted.
5. Athletic Fields: The field shall be graded on the specified
slope to a specified plane to the other or any point
between the sides of said plane. If specified on the plans,
the plane may require to be graded to a tolerance of ¼”
when measured from side to side or end-to-end.
6. Grading Surface of Fill Under Building Slabs: Grade
smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified,
and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a
tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10' straightedge.
14. Maintenance
a. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from
traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. Repair and
re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to
specified tolerances.
b. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed
compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction
P35-140 Vol2-19
operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and
compact to required density prior to further construction.
15. Disposal of Excess and Waste Materials
a. Removal from M-NCPPC Property: Remove waste materials,
including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and debris from
the M-NCPPC property and legally dispose of it. Off-site disposal
shall be considered incidental to contract.
200.04 MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools and
incidental items necessary to complete the work. Payment shall be made on a
unit rate or lump sum basis as indicated in the bid items.
P35-140 Vol2-20
.
212.01
SECTION 212 - STONE BASE
DESCRIPTION
Work consists of all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the
execution and completion of preparation of stone base, as called for in the plans and
specifications herein.
212.02
MATERIALS
A.
Graded Aggregate Sub-base (ASTM D2940): This material shall be in accordance with
MSHA (2008) Specifications Section 901.
B.
#2 / #3 Stone: This material shall be in accordance with M43, No.2
C.
No. 57 (AASHTO M43): This material shall be in accordance with MSHA (2008)
Specifications, Section 901, (No. 57) stone.
D.
Bank Run Gravel Sub-base (ASTM D2940). This material shall be in accordance with
MSHA (2008) Specifications, Section 910.
E.
Crusher Run Aggregate (CR-6):
Specifications, Section 910.
212.03
This material shall be in accordance with MSHA
CONSTRUCTION:
A.
After completion of excavation, filling and grading, it shall be ensured that the line, grade,
shape, elevations are in accordance with and shall meet the final grades as shown in the
plans. It shall also be ensured that the sub-base has been properly compacted during the
excavation/grading operation to 95% of maximum dry density. The area where the stone
base is to be provided shall be free of topsoil or any other unsuitable material. The earth subbase shall not be frozen. The tolerance of the earth sub-base shall be +1/2 inch from the
designed grade.
B.
The M-NCPPC Construction Manager shall approve the earth sub-base before stone is
deposited.
C.
The stone material as specified in the plans and "materials" above, shall then be deposited
and spread in the area (roads, parking lots, tennis courts, multi-use courts, etc.) as required to
the depth of fully compacted stone as shown in the plans, details, list of items, contract, etc.
The material shall be spread on earth sub-base, foundations, or preceding layer (previously
compacted to required density), in a manner that will prevent segregation of coarse and fine
particles. Proper equipment shall be used to indicate the required depth for the spreading of
stone layers. An approved machine capable of spreading the material to the desired width
shall be used.
P35-140 Vol2-21
D.
Compaction requirements: The moisture content shall be maintained within 2% of the
material's optimum moisture. The maximum dry density for bank run gravel shall be in
accordance with AASHTO T180. For GASB, the dry density shall be in accordance with
MSMT 321. Compaction shall begin by making a single pass with a steel wheeled roller
weighing not less than 8 tons or such a weight as to provide the compaction density
mentioned above. All rolling shall be done longitudinally beginning at the sides, overlapping
the shoulder at least a foot, and progressing towards the center of the road, parking lot, tennis
courts, multi-use court or any other facility requiring a stone base. The compaction operation
shall continue until all compaction marks are eliminated and the layer/course is properly
compacted.
E.
After the compaction has been completed by the Contractor, the Construction Manager or his
representative will witness the stone base surface proof rolling by contractor and if he is not
satisfied with the compaction will require the Contractor to re-compact, remove the stone to
check the sub-base and adjust it if necessary, delay the rolling to permit drying of the
subgrade, reconstruction of the entire base or sub-base, or request the Geotech engineer or an
approved lab check the density of the stone base at the contractor’s expense and at no cost to
the Commission.
F.
These methods shall apply for each layer/course of stone base, should there be more than one
layer of stone base.
G.
Tolerances after spreading, laying and compacting a stone base shall be no more than 1/2
inch from designed grade. The compacted thickness of the stone base, duly approved by the
Commission, shall be as per plans, sections, and details for the various facilities requiring a
stone base. Serpentine origin crushed stone shall be used only if it is to be covered by
asphalt paving or concrete.
212.04
A.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools and incidental
items necessary to complete the work. Payment shall be made on a unit rate or lump sum
basis as shown in the bid proposal; or shall be considered incidental to other bid items if not
specifically listed on bid forms.
P35-140 Vol2-22
SECTION 308 - SEDIMENT AND EROSION CONTROL
308.01.01
STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
All sediment control measures shall be installed and maintained per latest MCDPS Standards for
Erosion and Sediment Control, the latest MDE/WMA/NRCS/MASCD Maryland Standards and
Specifications for Erosion and Sediment Control, and the MDE/WMA National pollution
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Notice of Intent (NOI) General Permit for construction
activities.
Please refer to Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway
Administration’s Specifications entitled, “Standard Specifications for Construction and
Materials” dated January 2008, revisions thereof, or additions thereto.
308.02
MATERIALS
See 2008 MSHA specifications section 308.02 Material.
308.03
CONSTRUCTION
See MSHA specifications section 308.03 Construction. Add the following:
A.
Upon approval of the construction contract and issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the MNCPPC Construction Manager will arrange a pre-construction meeting between
Montgomery County DPS Sediment Control Inspection Staff, the General Contractor,
appropriate M-NCPPC staff, and any other required county, state or jurisdictional
personnel.
1. The Contractor will be provided with copies of the Sediment Control Permit and all
other required permits at this time, and must keep a copy of each permit on site at all
times.
2. The Contractor shall not start any construction prior to this meeting.
3. Contractor shall review and understand Sequence of Construction and present any
concerns to Construction Manager prior to start of work.
B.
Installation of sediment control shall begin only after the Sediment Control Inspector has
granted approval, and shall include any modifications to the approved Sediment Control
Plan that the Sediment Control Inspector has required. Contractor is responsible for
proper installation of all controls and coordinate field adjustments to ensure functioning
throughout construction.
C.
All subsequent notifications for inspection and coordination with the Sediment Inspector
are the responsibility of the Contractor. Events requiring Sediment Control inspection
and approval include, but may not be limited to start of grading, compliance with warning
notices, lifting of stop work orders for violations, start of temporary or permanent
P35-140 Vol2-23
stabilization, removal of Sediment Control facilities, and any other pertinent events noted
in the plans or specifications.
D.
Grading shall be accomplished throughout the entire project such that: existing surface
drainage pathways and existing pipe/culvert conveyance systems outside of the limits of
disturbance are not impacted; hazardous conditions are not created; erosive conditions are
not created outside of the limits of disturbance as a result of site work; and uncontrolled
sediment will not pass or collect into existing drainage systems and their downstream
tributaries.
E.
Maintenance and repair of all sediment control facilities shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall inspect and properly maintain all sediment control
facilities at the end of each working day to ensure that the sediment control device will
not be overburdened by sediment-laden runoff during storm events. M-NCPPC and
MCDPS inspectors will also conduct regular inspections of the facilities and inform the
contractor of any required maintenance and/or repairs.
F.
The Contractor is required to perform weekly inspections of all sediment controls on the
entire site as well as after every rain or snow event, as part of the MDE/WMA NPDES
NOI general permit requirements. All findings shall be documented on the MDE
inspection forms provided at the pre-construction meeting. The completed inspection
forms shall remain on-site at all times and be accessible to all who ask to review these
documents.
G.
M-NCPPC may require the Contractor to install additional sediment controls to improve
sediment removal without impacting the functioning of the approved Sediment Control
Plan. Examples of additional controls including installing a second row of silt/super silt
fence and installing erosion control matting to disturbed areas.
H.
Dust and Airborne Contaminates Control:
1.
The Contractor shall provide water as necessary to reduce airborne dust when
directed by
the Construction Manager, at no additional cost to the M-NCPPC.
I.
The Contractor shall ensure that all public and private roads used by construction
equipment are maintained in safe conditions and kept clean of sediment and debris.
Sediment shall be removed from truck tires via stabilized construction entrances, tire
wash racks, or by other acceptable methods before leaving the construction site. Routine
maintenance shall be performed on the roadways as necessary, including sweeping,
vacuuming, or other acceptable methods and as directed by M-NCPPC.
When washing construction equipment, rinsate shall be directed towards approvedsediment control devices. Rinsate from equipment that is used to handle and transport
concrete shall be directed towards watertight concrete washout structures per design
criteria and details in Section H-6 of the 2011 MDE Sediment and Erosion Control
manual.
F.
Removal of sediment control facilities:
P35-140 Vol2-24
1. Once the project has been completed, and all disturbed areas have been stabilized as
called for in the plans, the Contractor should contact the M-NCPPC Inspector and
MCDPS Sediment Control Inspector for approval to remove the sediment control
features. Note that seeded areas must have a visible stand of vegetation prior to this
inspection.
2. When permitted, the Contractor shall remove all sediment control features and
regrade such areas to proposed designed grades and seed and/or sod them as required.
G.
Install filter logs per plan.
H.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from flowing into
excavations and from flooding Project Site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations or other areas of the Site. Remove water to prevent softening
of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of
sub-grades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge
lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water from
excavations. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or runoff structures. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions
outside excavations limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary
drainage ditches. Dewatering activities must be performed at no additional cost to the
County. Any repair to foundations which results from deficient dewatering is the sole
responsibility and cost of the Contractor.
Contractor shall provide adequate pump(s) for all dewatering. All dewatering
installations must be inspected by appropriate permit inspectors and the Owner prior to
being placed into operation.
308.04
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools and incidental items
necessary to complete the work. Periodic maintenance of sediment control measures as directed
by engineer or DPS inspector shall be included in the bid prices for sediment control items. No
extra payment shall be made for maintenance or removal of sediment control measures.
Payment shall be made on a unit rate or lump sum basis as shown in the bid proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-25
SECTION 322 - STORM DRAINAGE AND STORMWATER MANAGEMENT
322.01
DESCRIPTION
Work includes all labor, material and equipment to construct storm drain systems and stormwater
management facilities, including all appurtenances as shown on the drawings and as specified.
The work shall include, but not be limited to, excavation, dewatering, backfilling, concrete and
masonry work, embankments, filters, outlet works, structures, piping, appurtenances, completion
of as built plans and closure of applicable associated jurisdictional permits, acceptance of the
SWM facility maintenance by Montgomery County Department of Permitting Services
(MCDPS) and M-NCPPC, and/or other related applicable jurisdictions, and all incidental items
to complete the work as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
322.01.2
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
The most restrictive requirements of the latest publications of the following specifications
will be complied with for this project:
1. Maryland DNR, WRA, Stormwater Management Division Standards and
Specifications for Infiltration, February 1984.
2. Montgomery County Government Department of Transportation Storm Drain Design
Criteria and Standards latest edition.
3. USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service –Maryland Code No. 378 Standards
and Specifications for Ponds, latest edition.
4. Maryland Department of the Environment 2000 Maryland Stormwater Management
Design Manual, Volumes I and II, latest edition.
5. Maryland Department of Transportation State Highway Administration Standard
Specifications for Construction and Materials, July 2008.
6. Montgomery County Department of Permitting Services (MCDPS) –Water Resources
current construction standards and specifications for stormwater management
facilities.
322.02
A.
MATERIALS
Pipe: All pipes shall be certified and meet the MSHA Standard Specifications for
Construction and Material, July 2008, Section 905. All reinforced concrete pipes through
stormwater management embankments shall have bell and spigot joints with rubber
gaskets and conform to ASTM Designation C-361, Type A-25, unless otherwise
specified on Drawings.
Storm drain pipes, as installed, will conform as applicable to the following minimum
standards:
P35-140 Vol2-26
Reinforced Concrete Pipe ---------------------- A.A.S.H.T.O M-170
Corrugated Steel Pipe --------------------------- A.A.S.H.T.O M-36
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe -------------------- A.A.S.H.T.O. M-196
High Density Polyethylene------A.A.S.H.T.O M-252, A.A.S.H.T.O M-294
• For 12”- 60” Storm Drain or SWM Pipes use A.A.S.H.T.O M-294-Type-S
• For 4”- 12” Perforated Drain Pipes use A.A.S.H.T.O M-252-Type-C or use
A.A.S.H.T.O M-294-Type-S
Polyvinyl chloride pipe PVC schedule 40&80-------ASTM D1785
All corrugated metal pipe will be helically corrugated, 16 gauge minimum, with ½” x 2
2/3” corrugations, unless otherwise noted.
Pipes labeled CMP on this plan may be either steel or aluminum. Aluminum surfaces
that are in contact with concrete will be painted with one coat of zinc chromate primer.
B.
Portland cement concrete, structures: MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction
and materials, July 2008, Sections 420, 902, 905, 908, 909, 911, 913, 915, 917, and 921.
C.
Precast Concrete structures: MSHA Standard Specifications for construction and
materials, July 2008, Section 305.03.06. Concrete design shall meet the requirements of
ACI 350, Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures, with freezing and thawing
exposures. Concrete shall be a type II or IIA cement, with a 28 day compressive strength
of 4500 psi for cast in place and 5000 psi for pre-cast structures. Concrete shall also meet
the requirements of Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway
Administration Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, Section 420.
D.
Brick for inlets: MSHA Standard Specifications for construction and materials, July
2008, Section 903.
E.
1.
Cement for mortar: MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and
Materials, July 2008, Section 902.
2.
Sand for mortar: MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials,
July 2008, Section 901.01, Table 901A.
3.
Mortar: All mortar shall be composed of the cement and sand specified in Section
322.02 above. For brick masonry, the proportions by volume shall be one part of
cement to two parts of sand. Mortar shall be freshly mixed in small batches for
the work at hand. Tight boxes of platforms, made for the purpose, shall be
used. The sand and cement shall be thoroughly mixed dry, in the proper
proportions, until a uniform color has been produced, whereupon a sufficient
quantity of water shall be added, and the mass further mixed so as to produce a
stiff pat of the proper consistency. Approved methods of machine mixing may be
employed. Mortar shall be used within thirty minutes after mixing, and all hard or
otherwise damaged mortar shall be wasted. Re-tempering of mortar will not be
permitted.
Pipe joint material: Shall be in conformance with the State of Maryland Highway
Standard Specifications Section 907.06. All pipe joints shall be made soil and watertight.
P35-140 Vol2-27
F.
Manholes and miscellaneous structures shall meet the requirements of Montgomery
County DPWT Standards. All storm drain structures are subject to modification by the
engineer to meet field conditions. Where the drop on the main line through a structure
can be accommodated by an invert slope of 1 ½ foot horizontal to 1 foot vertical or
flatter, a rounded bottom shaped channel will be built conforming to the inlet and outlet
pipes. The sidewalls of the shaped channel shall extend to the crowns of the pipes in the
structure and lined with sewer brick on edge. Otherwise, the bottom of the structure shall
be lined with granite blocks that are at least 4 inches thick with no shaped channel
required. The bottom shall slope ½” per foot toward the invert of the outlet pipe.
G.
Embankment material: Shall be as specified on Drawings, required by appropriate
reference documents, and confirmed by on-site Geotechnical Engineer.
H.
Cast-in-place concrete:
1.
Concrete shall meet the requirements of Maryland Department of Transportation,
State Highway Administration Standard Specifications for Construction and
Materials, Section 420. Concrete material for riser structures must also meet ACI
350.
a.
Concrete Strength: Structural concrete will be either mix #3 (f’c = 3,500
psi at 28 days) or mix #6 (f’c = 4,500 psi at 28 days) as designated on the
Contract Documents.
b.
Water cement ratio: Maximum water cement ratio is 0.45.
c.
Air content: 6±1%. Air Entrainment admixtures must conform to ASTM
C260. No admixtures containing calcium chloride are permitted.
d.
Slump: The slump measured at the point of placement as determined in
accordance with ASTM C143 will be: 3 inch maximum for footings and
substructure walls, and 4 inch maximum for beams, reinforced walls and
columns.
2. Concrete Codes, Regulations, Referenced Standards and Specifications:
a.
MSHA Standard Specifications for Construction and materials, July 2008,
Sections 420, 902, 905, 908, 909, 911, 913, 915, 917, and 921.
b.
International Building Code, 2000
c.
American Concrete Institute, “Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete”, ACI 318-02
d.
Detail and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 325-92
e.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
3. Concrete Structure Materials Specifications:
a.
Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, ACR 318, Manual
of Standard Practice For Detailing Reinforced Concrete, ACI 315.
b.
Maryland Department of Transportation, State Highway Administration
“Standard Specification For Construction and Materials”, 2008, Section
421, 902, and 908.
c.
CRSI: Manual of Standard Practice and Recommended Practice for
Placing Reinforcing Bars.
d.
AASHTO: Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.
P35-140 Vol2-28
e.
ASTM: A82, A185, A615
Allowable Tolerances: Cut and bend reinforcing steel to conform to
dimensions shown within the following tolerances:
i. Sheared length: Plus or minus one inch
ii. All other bends: Plus or minus one inch
I.
Filter media: All filter media shall confirm to the latest Montgomery County standards
for the individual device.
J.
Montgomery County-Approved Structures: All structures shown on design plans are as
approved by Montgomery County. Any proposed substitution must be approved by
Montgomery County in writing in advance of construction. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all engineering, submittals, and coordination required to obtain
Montgomery County revision approvals. All work must be coordinated with and
approved by M-NCPPC Construction Manager. In no instance shall M-NCPPC accept a
completed system that provided a lower treatment level than the original design.
K.
Marking/Stenciling concrete structures: All marking materials shall conform to the latest
M-NCPPC standards for storm drain marking.
L.
Underdrains: All underdrains are to be Polyvinyl Chloride (P.V.C.) pipe and meeting the
requirements for Schedule 40. Perforated pipe is to have 3/8” diameter perforations four
(4) inches center to center longitudinally every 90 degrees around the pipe. Slotted pipe
is to have 1/8” wide by 1.9” long slots at a minimum of 4 slots per linear foot and a
minimum of 4 slots per row spaced equally around the perimeter of the pipe.
M.
Stormwater Management Facility Appurtenances:
1.
Structural Plastic Trash Racks: Manufacturer is to be Plastic Solutions, Inc. or
approved equal. Trash racks to be constructed of glass reinforced HDPE. UV
protection must be incorporated to meet or exceed ASTM D2565-99. Mounting
locations must be determined by Manufacturer. The contractor will be required to
use pre-drilled holes as supplied by the manufacturer. All mounting hardware
(3/8” x 3” stainless steel anchor bolts) is included with each rack.
2.
Manhole Frame and Cover: Manhole frame and cover must be provided in
accordance with Contract Documents, all applicable MSHA, MCDOT, WSSC
Standard Details, and the following requirements: Non-Traffic Bearing 28 inch
diameter Revolution manhole frame and cover by East Jordan, or approved equal.
The lettering on the cover must be approved by the Owner prior to ordering.
3.
Manhole Steps: Manhole steps to be Polypropylene Encapsulated and in
accordance with MCDOT Std. MC-520.01.
4.
Drain Valve: Drain valve to be made of ductile iron and fit a 6” dia. DIP. Valve
is to be manufactured by Mueller or Kennedy. At the option of the contractor, an
P35-140 Vol2-29
equivalent valve may be used provided it is approved by the Owner, Owner’s
Engineer, and Maryland Department of the Environment Inspector. Stem
extension to be constructed per ASTM A-36 of 2” diameter steel pipe and secured
to riser with guides constructed of carbon steel per ASTM A-36 and secured to
riser with 3”Lx1 ½”dia. bolts. Stem extension guides are to be hot dip galvanized
after fabrication and spaced 36” apart along the length of the stem extension.
322.03
A.
B.
C.
D.
REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawings
1.
Detail reinforcing in accordance with ACI Detailing Manual.
2.
Bar lists showing the individual weight of each bar, total weight of each bar size
and total weight of bars on list. Base calculated weights on theoretical unit
weights show in ASTM A615, Table 1.
Design Mix Certification
1.
Prior to placing concrete, submit design mixes for each class and type of concrete,
certifying that proposed concrete ingredients and proportions will result in
concrete mix meeting specified requirements.
2.
Include for each class and type of concrete, as many mix designs as there are
combinations of different ingredients or type of ingredients anticipated to cover
requirements of the work.
3.
Establish mix designs through an approved design laboratory. Design concrete
mix for protection against alkali-aggregate reactivity.
4.
The Contractor may present for approval a concrete mix previously approved for
Government work provided such mix is made with proposed ingredients that meet
requirements and provided that concrete has complied with compressive-strength
requirements based on control record of at least 30 consecutive-strength tests
recently obtained.
Cast in Place Installation Documentation: Proposed methods for controlling concrete
temperature and plans for placing concrete taking into account sun, heat, wind, ambient
air temperature or other limitations of facilities that will prevent proper finishing or
curing.
Poured Concrete Certifications
Concrete Ingredients:
1.
Submit with mix design, laboratory test reports and mill or manufacturer’s
certificates verifying that ingredients conform to specified requirements. Use
ingredients in design mix which are representative samples of materials to be used
in the work.
2.
Submit test results whenever the aggregates, cement or other additives to be used
in the concrete come from a different lot, source, other area of quarry, different
quarry or from other than the representative stockpile or batch from which the
original material was tested and approved.
3.
In case the source, brand or characteristic properties of ingredients need to be
varied during the term of the Contract, submit revised laboratory-mix report in
accordance with procedures specified for original mix design.
P35-140 Vol2-30
E.
F.
Concrete Batch Tickets.: Before unloading at the site, submit certification or delivery
ticket from concrete supplier with each batch delivered to the site bearing the following
information:
1.
Name of supplier
2.
Name of batching plant and location
3.
Series number of ticket
4.
Date
5.
Truck number
6.
Specific job designation: contract number and location
7.
Volume of concrete in cubic yards
8.
Class and type of concrete
9.
Time loaded
10.
Type and brand of cement
11.
Weight of cement and fly ash or ground-iron blast-furnace slag.
12.
Maximum size of aggregates
13.
Weights of coarse and fine aggregates
14.
Maximum amount of water to be added and amount of water added at the site
15.
Kind and amount of admixtures - Admixtures containing Calcium Chloride must
not be allowed
Precast Concrete Certification
1.
Manufacturer’s certificates.
2.
Mill tests on each heat showing chemical and physical analyses performed in
accordance with ASTM A615, as modified by ACI 318.
322.04
A.
CONSTRUCTION
Storm Drainage
1.
Handling and alignment of pipe: Pipe shall be carefully handled and lowered into
the trench. In laying pipe, special care shall be taken to insure that each length
shall abut against the next in such a manner that there shall be no shoulder or
unevenness of any kind along the inside of the bottom half of the pipe line.
2.
Bedding Material for HDPE and non-metal pipes: Bedding material shall meet the
requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I material, with the exception that (per
AASHTO Section 30) the maximum particle size of the bedding materials shall be
1.25 in. (32 mm). The bedding material upper limit shall be equal to one-third of
the pipes O.D., unless otherwise directed by the MNPCCP Construction Manager.
A minimum of 6” of loosely compacted bedding material shall be provided below
the bottom surface of the pipe prior to pipe placement. Final backfill material
shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321 Class I, Class II, or Class III
material. All initial and final backfill material shall be placed in 6 to 8 inch lifts
and compacted to a minimum 90% Standard Proctor Density.
P35-140 Vol2-31
Bedding material for concrete pipes: Bedding material shall consist of a wellgraded mixture of stone, gravel, and sand in accordance with AASHTO M145
type A-1, A-3. This is further Section 322 - Storm Drainage and Stormwater
Management 322-4
Feb 2012 described and identified as “Class C bedding” found in the American
Concrete Pipe Association “Concrete pipe & Box culvert installation” guidelines:
www.concretepipe.org/pdf/installation_guide.pdf.
For other pipe installations not included above, follow the most stringent
guidelines of the latest publications from WSSC and MCDOT.
3.
Pipe placement and foundation: Before joints are made, each pipe shall be well
bedded on a solid foundation and no pipe shall be brought into position until the
preceding length has been thoroughly embedded and secured in place. Any
defects due to settlement shall be repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
When plastic pipe is used, the Contractor shall periodically check for pipe
deflection during pipe installation and within 30 days of the completion of the
project. The internal diameter of plastic storm drain pipes shall not be reduced by
more than 5 percent of its design diameter. If the installation does not meet these
requirements, the pipe shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the
Commission. Bell holes shall be dug sufficiently large to insure the making of
proper joints. No pipes shall ever be supported by the bell joints only. Trench
widths shall conform to the latest regulations found in the MCDOT Storm Drain
design criterion which is equal to the outside diameter of the pipe plus 18 inches
on both sides of pipe, or 2 times the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is
narrower. Where any portion of the proposed storm drain system is located in a
fill section, Contractor shall provide select fill material compacted to 95%
A.A.S.H.T.O. T-99 density from original undisturbed ground up to structure
bottom slabs and pipe bedding.
4.
Equipment for handling material: Proper and suitable tools and appliances for the
safe and convenient handling and laying of pipes shall be used.
5.
Cleaning pipe: The pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are laid and
shall be kept clean until acceptance of the completed work. The open ends of all
pipelines shall be provided with a stopper carefully fitted so as to keep dirt and
other substances from entering. This stopper shall be kept in the end of the pipe
line at all times when laying is not in actual progress.
6.
Cutting the pipe: Whenever a pipe requires cutting, to fit into the line or to bring
it to the required location, the work shall be done in a satisfactorily manner so as
to leave a smooth end. Cost of cutting the pipe shall be included in the unit price
for the pipe.
7.
Trench water: The excavation in which the pipe is being laid shall be kept free
from water and no joint shall be made under water. Water shall not be allowed to
P35-140 Vol2-32
rise in the excavation until the joint material has received its set. Care shall be
used to secure water tightness and to prevent damage to, or disturbing of, the
joints during the backfilling process, or at any other time.
B.
8.
Laying the pipe in freezing weather: No pipe shall be laid upon a foundation into
which frost has penetrated, nor at any time when the Commission Construction
Manager shall deem that there is danger of the formation of ice or the penetration
of frost at the bottom of excavation, unless all required precautions as to the
minimum length of open trench and promptness of backfilling are observed.
9.
Grade all disturbed areas to provide positive drainage.
10.
After Stabilizing site, all Storm Drain Inlets are to be marked/stenciled with MNCPPC issued decals. Contractor shall coordinate with M-NCPPC construction
manager to obtain and return materials.
Stormwater Management
The construction of all stormwater management facilities shall conform to the approved
drawings, Montgomery County Stormwater Management construction standards, MDE
Stormwater Design Manual Volumes I&II, and the State of Maryland Highway Standard
Specifications. The Contractor is responsible for fully understanding the design and
functions of the proposed facilities and for constructing facilities in full compliance with
design standards and the approved plans.
1.
Design Engineer (DE) and Geotechnical Engineer (GEO)
The Contractor shall designate a Design Engineer (DE). The purpose of the DE is
to oversee and inspect the construction of all stormwater management facilities
and related stormwater management structures at no additional cost to MNCPPC.
The minimum qualifications of the DE shall be: 1) submitted to M-NCPPC for
approval; 2) familiar with the design, construction, and functionality of
stormwater management facilities; and, 3) a licensed Professional Engineer (PE)
registered in the State of Maryland.
The DE shall be solely responsible for overseeing, inspecting, and certifying that
all stormwater-related facilities are built per the approved project plans and
specifications. This includes all above and below ground structural and material
components. The DE shall verify all critical inverts and elevations throughout
construction to ensure conformance with approved designs. This information
shall be provided to M-NCPPC in a timely manner during construction. The DE
shall make any corrections and adjustments required to fully provide required
design volumes, function, and structural integrity of facilities at no additional cost
to the owner. The DE shall also verify that all site improvements, flow paths, and
drainage areas to each facility are in conformance with the approved design plans.
P35-140 Vol2-33
The DE shall be responsible for signing any applicable MCDPS inspection
checklists related to each stormwater-related facility. Note, all applicable
inspection checklists should be shown on the project plans; in the event that they
are not, they can be provided at the contractor’s request.
The Contractor shall also designate a Geotechnical Engineer (GEO) as required
per MCDPS stormwater management facilities checklist(s). The minimum
qualifications of the GEO shall be: 1) submitted to M-NCPPC for approval; 2)
familiar with the design, construction, and functionality of stormwater
management facilities; and, 3) a licensed Professional Engineer (PE) registered in
the State of Maryland.
The GEO shall be responsible for overseeing, inspecting, and certifying that all
geotechnical-related project elements for all stormwater management facilities are
built per the approved project plans and specifications at no additional cost to
MNCPPC. Note the geotechnical elements are listed in the MCDPS stormwater
management facilities checklist(s) as appropriate for the project, and checklist
responsibilities shall be coordinated with the designated DE.
Any minor adjustments to the design plans during construction of a stormwater
management facility shall be reviewed and approved by DE and/or GEO in
coordination with the MCDPS inspector.
2.
Shop Drawings and As-Built Plans
All Shop Drawings shall be sealed by a PE and submitted to M-NCPPC, and other
related applicable jurisdictions, for review and approval prior to initiating
construction.
Upon completion of construction, the Contractor is responsible for providing
MCDPS, and/or other related applicable jurisdictions, As-Built plans sealed by
the DE and GEO (if GEO is required) and any necessary supporting
documentation. Supporting documentation may include the DPS As-Built/Record
Drawing Plan Review Checklist, all of the signed or initialed inspection checklists
for the related facilities, and copies of all the construction material and delivery
tickets for the related facilities. The Contractor is responsible for coordinating the
closeout inspection with MCDPS, and shall make any and all repairs to the
facility and/or As-Built plan revisions, as required by MCDPS, to obtain final AsBuilt plan approval and final release of permit. All repairs/revisions required by
MCDPS to release the permit shall be made at no additional costs to the owner.
3.
Stormwater Facility Maintenance
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for maintenance of all stormwaterrelated facilities until MCDPS, or other related applicable jurisdictions, conducts
the closeout inspection and releases the permit. The Contractor shall also perform
P35-140 Vol2-34
any required maintenance to the facility to ensure full functionality, and any final
required punch-list items as required by M-NCPPC, prior to final M-NCPPC
acceptance of the facility.
4.
Stormwater Cast-in-place Structures:
a.
b.
c.
Reinforcement Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling:
i.
Ship reinforcing steel in bundles limited to one size and length.
ii. Tag each bundle at mill with waterproof tag showing name of mill,
heat number, grade and size of bars and identifying number.
iii. Protect reinforcing steel and wire fabric from damage; foreign matter
such as dirt, oil and grease; and rust causing conditions.
Reinforcement Materials Installation:
i.
All reinforcement steel must be new billet steel to conform to ASTM
A615 Grade 60, and MSHA Standard Specifications Section 421.02 to
421.03 except as modified herein.
ii. Concrete Protection for Reinforcement: Reinforcement must be
protected by the thickness of the concrete indicated in the Contract
Documents. Where not otherwise shown, the thickness of concrete
over the reinforcement must be as follows:
a. Where concrete is deposited against the ground without the use of
forms, the Contractor must provide not less than 3 inch of concrete
cover.
b. Where concrete is exposed to weather or ground but placed in
forms, the Contractor must provide 2 inch of concrete cover over
all reinforcing steel.
iii. Inspection: Reinforcing must be inspected in the forms and approved
by the Owner before any concrete is placed. Waterstops are to be
installed as specified, and inspected prior to concrete placement.
iv.
Steel Reinforcing: All steel reinforcing must be new billet steel to
confirm to ASTM A 615 Grade 60.
v.
Concrete Joints: Where required, concrete joints must be installed to
include waterstops to assure watertight structure. Type and size of the
waterstops and accommodations for nearby reinforcement must be
approved by the Owner prior to installation.
Concrete Installation:
i.
Prior to any installation of a concrete structure or conveyance piping,
the sub-grade must be tested and approved by a Certified Geotechnical
Engineer registered in the State of Maryland.
Compaction
requirements, as developed at the initial work meeting, must be
demonstrated by the geotechnical testing and reporting, and is a
responsibility of the Contractor. Additional independent quality
assurance testing may be exercised by the County. In the event of any
discrepancy, the Contractor must demonstrate full compliance with the
work order.
P35-140 Vol2-35
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
The base on which concrete is to be poured must be free of water,
mud, debris, loose materials, oil, frost, and ice. Unless specified,
gravel must not be used as concrete sub-base in dam embankments.
The Inspector and Owner must be notified at least 24 hours in advance
of concrete placement. Form work must be approved for lines and
grades by the Owner prior to placing concrete. Concrete must be laid
only in the presence of the Owner or Inspector.
Construction must comply with MSHA Section 420.03 except as
modified herein.
Proper forms (MSHA Standards, Section 420.03.02) must be laid
providing the required depth for the concrete as shown on the plans.
Forms must be heavy and secure in place so as not to move during the
construction process.
Concrete must be placed from a truck which should be no more than
15 feet from the area being poured. Extension of chute beyond 15 feet
may be permitted by the Inspector on request. Tubes or chutes, if
used, must have metal lining, and must have ends lowered as close as
possible to the newly poured concrete. Concrete must not be dropped
from more than 2 feet above the forms. Concrete must be placed in
such a manner that there is no segregation of material or displacement
of reinforcement.
Curing of concrete must be in accordance with MSHA Sections 420
and 902. Any options shown in MSHA Section 420.03.09 will be
acceptable. Spraying with liquid membrane is encouraged. Product
specifications with application rates should be submitted to the Owner
for approval. Failure to cure concrete per specifications may result in
rejection, or removal of the poured concrete as stated in item 11 below.
Concrete must be poured within a temperature range of 50 and 90
degrees Fahrenheit. Special provisions must be developed and
approved by the Owner when pouring outside of this range.
Concrete must be thoroughly consolidated during and immediately
after depositing by mechanical vibration, internal or external as
approved by the Owner.
A broom finish will be used when specified on drawings or details,
and it must be provided before the initial set. Ordinary surface finish
must be used on all other structures. See MSHA 420.03.07(a). All
concrete structures must have chamfered edges.
During construction, the Contractor is required to have the concrete
tested by an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 31, C
39, and C 172. Seven-day and 28-day tests must be conducted. For
each day that concrete is poured on a project site, the Contractor must
provide a minimum of two test cylinders for each mix design to be
tested at a material testing laboratory. All test cylinders must be cured
under the laboratory conditions. In addition, the Owner may require
an equal number of test cylinders cured under the job conditions. The
test results must be forwarded to the Owner. If the concrete fails to
P35-140 Vol2-36
xii.
322.05
meet the requirements, the Owner has the right to require additional
testing or reject the concrete, at the Contractor’s expense.
If any concrete is found to be defective, the Contractor must, at the
direction of the Owner, remove defective concrete at no cost to the
Owner. Concrete must be deemed defective if: the surface is not
finished properly to the satisfaction of the Owner, it does not meet the
strength requirements, it is not cured properly, or it shows excessive
cracking. Any concrete not accepted to the satisfaction of the Owner
must be repoured or repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the
Owner.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools and incidental items
necessary to complete the work. Payment shall be made on a unit rate or lump sum basis as
shown in the bid proposal. Payment for as built drawing and closure of stormwater management
permit will be paid under section 111 – As Built Drawing (Record Drawing) and Support
Documentations. Full Payment for stormwater management related bid items (up to 20% of the
full value of this item) maybe withheld at the discretion of the Commission pending MCDPS
and/or other applicable jurisdictions approval of as built plans.
P35-140 Vol2-37
SECTION 421 — REINFORCING STEEL
421.01 DESCRIPTION. Furnish and place uncoated and epoxy coated reinforcing steel.
421.02 MATERIALS.
Grout
Deformed Steel Bars
902.11(c)
908.01
REINFORCING STEEL
Plain Round Steel Bars for Column Spirals
Welded Steel Wire Fabric
Fusion Bonded Epoxy Powder Coating
for Steel and Touch Up System
908.02
908.05 and .06
Section
465
and
917.02
421.02.01 Supports. Use approved coated metal, plastic, plastic tipped, or galvanized material.
Aluminum is unacceptable. All materials are subject to approval.
For epoxy coated steel, use wire supports completely covered with 1.5 to 9.0 mils of adherent
epoxy coating except for minimum necessary contact marks. Hold the reinforcing steel in place
with plastic coated tie wires fabricated for this purpose.
Steel bars used as supports for epoxy coated steel shall be coated in the same manner as
reinforcing steel.
421.03 CONSTRUCTION.
421.03.01 Working Drawings. Submit working drawings for approval prior to the start of any
fabrication, unless otherwise specified.
421.03.02 Plan Dimensions. All dimensions related to reinforcing steel are out to out
measurement except the spacing is measured center to center.
421.03.03 Cutting and Bending. Cut and bend reinforcing bars at the mill or shop to the shapes
specified before shipment to the job site. Bending shall not be performed in the field except to
correct errors, damage by handling and shipping, or minor omissions in shop bending.
Saw or shear epoxy coated reinforcing bars on skewed bridges and in other locations that are
specified to be cut in the field; flame cutting is prohibited.
421.03.04 Shipping, Handling, and Protection of Material. Ship reinforcing steel bars in
standard bundles; tagged and marked in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Standard
Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Keep bundles intact, undamaged, and
properly identified until ready for use.
P35-140 Vol2-38
Bundle coated steel together for shipment using excelsior or other approved materials, and
banded using plastic or padded metal bands. Perform all lifting with a lifting beam and multiple
supports consisting of a sufficient quantity of straps or slings to prevent abrasion within the
bundle from excessive bending or distortion.
Store bundles at the site on suitable blocking or platforms at least 4 in. above any type of surface
and vegetation. Keep free from vegetation growth, accumulations of dirt, oil, or other foreign
material. Keep blocking sufficiently close to avoid bending and distortion of the bars. Correct
any distortion of the bars or damage to epoxy coating as directed. Touch up any damage to the
epoxy coating as specified in 465.03. Adequately cover epoxy coated bars for protection from
ultraviolet rays from the time of delivery when they are to be stored outside for more than 90
days.
421.03.05 Placing and Fastening. Accurately place all reinforcing steel, including dowel bars,
in the position specified in the Contract Documents or working drawings, and hold firmly during
the depositing and setting of the concrete. Do not insert into the plastic concrete.
Tie all intersections, except alternate intersections need not be tied where spacing is less than 1 ft
in each direction. Do not bend reinforcing steel bars after embedment in concrete.
Before placing concrete, clean all mortar from the reinforcing. Do not place concrete until the
reinforcing bars are inspected and approved by Engineer. Approval shall not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility for correcting problems caused by any shifting of the bars during
the placement of concrete.
Support reinforcing bars and maintain their distances from faces of forms by using approved
templates, blocks, ties, hangers, or other supports. Support bars in the bottom of footings on
approved precast concrete blocks with embedded tie wires or suspend in place. Support bars in
the tops of footings by using approved supports.
Do not use metal, metal with plastic tipped legs, or plastic chairs against formed surfaces that
will be exposed in the finished structure.
The Engineer will perform a final visual inspection of epoxy coated steel at the construction site
after the steel is in place and immediately prior to placing the concrete. Allow four hours of
normal working time after the reinforcing and forms are in place for the inspection.
421.03.06 Splicing. Furnish bars in the lengths and spliced as specified in the Contract
Documents and approved working drawings. Do not perform additional splicing without
approval. Make lap splices with the bars in contact and wired together.
Do not weld reinforcing steel or attachments thereto without authorization.
P35-140 Vol2-39
421.03.07 Substitution. Substitute different size bars only when approved by the Engineer.
There will be no additional compensation for substituting larger size bars in lieu of the bars
specified.
P35-140 Vol2-40
M-NCPPC SPECIAL PROVISIONS
504—HOT MIX ASPHALT PAVEMENT
SECTION 504.03.10 (C) —ACCEPTANCE TESTING
(1) Core Method
DELETE: The Administration will immediately take possession of the QA mixture sample and
deliver the sample to the Laboratory for testing.
INSERT: The Contractor shall have the core samples tested by an independent Laboratory. The
Laboratory will note any density waivers on the daily field density forms with reasons for
waivers.
DELETE: SECTION 504.04 — MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT in its entirety.
INSERT: The following.
504.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement will be measured
and paid for at the Contract unit price. The payment will be full compensation for furnishing,
hauling, placing all materials including antistripping additive, tack coat, control strip, pot hole
and spall repairs, setting of lines and grades where specified, and for all material, labor,
equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Temporary Tie-Ins. Placement and removal of the temporary tie-in where hot mix asphalt is
being applied to the traveled way carrying traffic will not be measured but the cost will be
incidental to the pertinent Hot Mix Asphalt item.
Removal of the existing pavement or structure for the final tie-in will not be measured but the
cost will be incidental to the pertinent Hot Mix Asphalt item.
Adjustments. Adjustment of existing visible manholes, valve boxes, inlets, or other structures
will not be measured but the cost will be incidental to the Hot Mix Asphalt item.
Adjustment of existing manholes, valve boxes, inlets, or other structures that are encountered
below the existing grade will be considered for payment in conformance with SHA GP-4.07.
Removal of Existing Raised/Recessed Pavement Markers.
Removal of existing
raised/recessed pavement markers will not be measured but the cost will be incidental to the Hot
Mix Asphalt item.
Removal of existing raised/recessed pavement markers that are encountered below the existing
pavement will be considered for payment in conformance with GP-4.07.
DELETE: SECTION 504.04.01—PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT AND
PAVEMENT DENSITY in its entirety.
INSERT: The following.
P35-140 Vol2-41
504.04.02 PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR HOT MIX ASPHALT MIXTURE AND
PAVEMENT DENSITY. A price adjustment will be made as specified in SHA GP-5.02 when
the hot mix asphalt properties or pavement density does not conform to Specifications. The
Contract unit price will be adjusted for noncompliance with HMA properties and pavement
density in conformance with these procedures. A pay reduction for pavement density will be
based on individual core test data for a given lot and the lot average density as specified in this
section.
Pay adjustment due to noncompliance with the density requirements will be made against the
adjusted Contract unit price for Hot Mix Asphalt in conformance with Table 504. Price
adjustment will be waived for that portion of the pavement where the Engineer determines that
inadequate density is due to a poor foundation.
TABLE 504
DENSE GRADED HOT MIX ASPHALT MIXES
PERCENT OF MAXIMUM DENSITY
LOT
AVERAGE
NO INDIVIDUAL
BELOW
PAY FACTOR %
92.0 — 97.0
91.0
100
91.0 — 97.0
90.0
95
90.0 — 97.0
90.0
90
89.0 — 97.0
89.0
85
Less than 89.0
—
75.0 or rejected as
determined by the
Engineer
Note 1: When any test data is above 97.0, the Engineer may determine to
make additional pay reduction or reject.
Contractor’s quality control test data will be used in all analysis of compaction compliance in
conformance with 504.03.10.
Acceptance of a mixture lot will be in conformance with Sections 904, 915, and MSMT 735. A
composite pay factor (CPF) for asphalt content, gradation, and mixture will be based on the total
estimated percent of the lot that is within Specification limits as computed using the quality level
analysis in conformance with MSMT 735.
Contractor’s quality control test data will be used in all analysis of mixture compliance in
conformance with 504.03.10.
The Lot payment for in-place density will be computed using the following formula:
LPipd = (CP) X (DF) X (TL)
where:
LPipd = Lot payment in-place density
CP = Contract unit price
P35-140 Vol2-42
DF = Density pay factor from Table 504.04
TL = Tonnage per lot.
The Lot payment for asphalt content and gradation will be computed using the following
formula:
LPmd = (CP) X (MF) X (TL)
where:
LPmd =
CP =
TL =
MF =
Lot payment for mix design
Contract unit price
Tonnage per lot
Mixture pay factor (refer to MSMT 735 for CMPWSL):
when CMPWSL is less than 90 %, MF = 55 + 0.5 CMPWSL
when CMPWSL is greater than or equal to 90 %, MF = 100
An in-place density lot containing material with a pay factor of less than 1.0 may be accepted at
the reduced pay factor, provided the pay factor for density is at least 0.85 and there are no
isolated defects identified by the Engineer.
A mixture lot containing material with a pay factor of less than 1.0 may be accepted at the
reduced pay factor, provided the composite pay factor for asphalt content and grading is at least
0.75 and there are no isolated defects identified by the Engineer.
An in-place density lot containing nonconforming material that fails to obtain at least a 0.85 pay
factor and a mixture lot containing nonconforming material that fails to obtain at least 0.75 pay
factor for asphalt content and gradation, will be evaluated by the Engineer to determine its
acceptance. When the Engineer determines to reject a lot, the lot shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Administration.
When less than three mix samples have been obtained at the time of the acceptance sampling or
at the time a lot is terminated, the Engineer will determine if the material in a shortened lot will
be considered a part of a the previous lot, or will be accepted based on the individual test data.
P35-140 Vol2-43
M-NCPPC Materials Chart
A.
SUPERPAVE
BINDER
LIFT THICKNESS
4.75 mm
PG 64-22
1/2” MIN.
9.5 mm
PG 64-22
3/4” MIN. 11/2” MAX
12.5 mm
PG 64-22
1 ½” MIN.
2” MAX
Medium Surface *1
19.0 mm
PG 64-22
2” MIN.
3” MAX
Fine Base
25.0 mm
PG 64-22
3” MIN.
4” MAX.
Course Base
1/2” MAX
TYPE OF LAYER
Very Fine Surface
Fine Surface
*1) To be used for Hiker/Biker Trails (3” Lift Thickness Max.)
B.
Protective Non-woven Membrane for Paving: AMOCO Petromat 4597 or approved
equal. Installation shall be in accordance with manufactures specifications.
P35-140 Vol2-44
SECTION 607 - CHAIN LINK FENCE
607.01 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing and erecting chain link fencing, including
fabric, posts, footings, framework, hardware and gates (as required).
607.02.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabric: ASTM - F 668, Class 2B
Framework: ASTM - F 1083, Schedule 40 pipe
ASTM - F 569, cold rolled steel pipe for framework (SS 40)
ASTM - A 500, Grade B, steel square sections
ASTM - A 123, hot dip galvanizing
ASTM - F 1043, protective coatings
607.02.2 MATERIALS
The material supplier shall submit certification to the M-NCPPC that all materials
meet or exceed all stipulated specifications.
A. Fence Fabric:
Thermally fused vinyl coated steel fabric shall meet requirements of
ASTM - F668 Class 2B. Samples of fence fabric shall be submitted to MNCPPC prior to installation. Core wire shall be 9 Ga. (.148"), and shall be
galvanized to meet a minimum weight of zinc coating of 0.30 oz./s.f. The
thickness of the fusion bonded vinyl coating shall be 7 - 10 mils., color as
specified. All fabric shall have both selvages knuckled top and bottom.
There shall be no splices in the fabric between the posts
1. General purpose fence fabric: Core wire shall be 9 gauge
(.148") in a 2" mesh.
2. Tennis Court fence fabric: Core wire shall be 9 gauge (.148") in
a 1-3/4" mesh.
3. Backstops panels: Core wire shall be 6 gauge (.162”) in a 2"
mesh.
4. Backstop hoods: Core wire shall be 9 gauge (.148") in a 2"
mesh.
B. Galvanized Steel Framework
1. Schedule 40 Steel Pipe - Standard weight schedule 40 steel
pipe shall conform to ASTM A-1083 and be hot-dipped galvanized
with the zinc coating weighing not less than 1.8 oz./s.f.
2. Cold rolled high strength steel pipe (SS 40) - Pipe shall be
manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM A569 cold rolled,
welded, and have a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
Corrosion protection shall consist of a hot dipped zinc coating
providing a coverage of 1.8 oz/s.f. inside and out, chromate
conversion coating, and a clear acrylic overcoat. Minimum pipe
weights are as follows:
P35-140 Vol2-45
INDUSTRY O.D.
1-5/8"
2"
2-1/2"
3"
4"
O.D. (INCHES)
WALL (INCHES)
WEIGHT (#/FT)
1.660
.111
1.83
1.900
.120
2.28
2.375
.130
3.11
2.875
.160
4.64
4.000
.160
6.56
3. Steel square sections shall conform to ASTM A 500, Grade B
with a minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi. Corrosion protection
shall consist of hot dipped galvanized zinc coating weighing not
less than 1.8 oz/s.f.
4. All hardware (tension bands, tension bars, post caps, loop
caps, sleeves, truss rods, turnbuckles, end clamps, corner
boulevards, tension wire, ties, hog rings, hinges, latches, holdbacks, etc.) shall be hot dipped galvanized pressed steel or
aluminum.
C. Vinyl Coated Framework
1. Steel pipe shall conform to B.1, B.2 or B.3 above. (Exception:
clear acrylic overcoat in B.2 shall be waived.) Hardware shall be
as in B.4 above.
2. In accordance with ASTM F 1043, PVC shall be applied to the
pipe and hardware by the fusion bonding process (thermally fused
and adhered to a primer that is thermally cured to the galvanized
steel) to produce a vinyl thickness of 10-14 mils. Test for adhesion
shall be bond of vinyl coating to substrate will be greater than
cohesive strength of the vinyl itself.
D. Concrete Footings: Refer to Section 420, Portland Cement Concrete
Structures, in the 2008 MSHA Specifications, and to the plans.
607.03 CONSTRUCTION
Refer to plans and details
607.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment,
tools and incidental items necessary to complete the work. Payment shall
be made on a unit rate or lump sum basis as shown in the bid proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-46
Section 705 – SEED and SODDING FOR TURF AREAS
705.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Seeding: This work shall consist of soil preparation, seeding, addition of soil
amendments (as determined by the soil test results), mulching, overseeding, and
mowing all areas designated for turf establishment as specified in the Contract
Documents or as directed by the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
B. Sodding: This work shall consist of soil preparation, addition of soil
amendments (as determined by the soil test results), watering, and placing grass
sod on prepared areas, as specified in the Contract Documents or as directed by
the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
705.01.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Submit for approval proposed seed mixture.
B. Submit Manufacturer's certificates of purity and guarantees of germination in
accordance with Maryland Seed Law to the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
C. Follow Section 723 Landscape Soil for quality assurance of soil and soil
testing.
E. Turf Grass Conditions will not be accepted if there is a poor or thin stand;
improper application of sod, dead grass or sod, use of seed mixtures or sod other
than approved in specifications, improper fertilizer application either uneven
spreading or insufficient amounts, or failure to re-fertilize during extended
acceptance, and the presence of persistent weeds established in turf areas.
705.01.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Landscape Specification Guidelines, latest edition, Landscape Contractor’s
Association (LCA) of Maryland, Virginia and The District of Columbia.
B. “Recommended Turf grass cultivars for Professional Seed Mixtures,”
University of Maryland Turfgrass Technical Update TT-77, most recent edition
(updated annually), formerly Agronomy Mimeo 77, or AM-77.
705.02 Materials
A. Soil:
Follow section 723 for materials.
B. Grass Seed Shall be Maryland Certified. It shall be fresh, clean, new crop
seed mixed in the proportion shown and testing to no more than .02% weed
seed and 85% minimum germination. Approved varieties shall be selected
“Recommended Turfgrass cultivars for Professional Seed Mixtures,” University of
Maryland Turfgrass Technical Update TT-77, most recent edition (See Section
705.3) A copy of this publication can be obtained from the M-NCPPC Project
Manager or by visiting the Maryland Turfgrass Council website
http://www.mdturfcouncil.org or by calling them at 410-836-2876.
P35-140 Vol2-47
C. Seeded Lawn:
Grass Seed shall be - “NO MOW LAWN SEED MIX”
Applied at rate of 5lbs per 1000 sf or 220lbs per
arce
Manufacturer –
Prairie Nursery, Inc.
P.O. Box 306
Westfield, WI 53964
Ph: 1-800-476-9453
www.prairienursery.com
or approved equal
C. Mulch:
1. Bright, small grain type straw. Shall be free of rot and noxious weed
seeds. Apply ½”-3/4” thick layer or 60-80 bales/acre.
2. Hydro mulch: Wood cellulose applied at a net dry weight of 750
pounds per acre. See LCA, Landscape Specification Guidelines, Seeding
and Sodding specifications, Section 5.3 Mulching Materials, for detailed
specifications.
3. Erosion Control Blankets acceptable as determined by M-NCPPC
Project Manager.
D. Mulching and Stabilizing Materials:
All straw mulch shall be bound with a suitable binder or straw shall be rolled
thoroughly with a crimping roller in several directions to prevent erosion of the soil
and/or mulch. See LCA, Landscape Specification Guidelines, Seed and Sod
specifications, Section 5.3 Stabilizing Materials, for detailed specifications.
E. Sod:
1. Shall be Maryland Certified (labeled), inspected and approved by the
Maryland Department of Agriculture.
2. Label must be presented to the M-NCPPC Project Manager at
the time of delivery and prior to installation for approval.
3. Sod shall be a 90/10 mix with 90% of the mix shall be a blend of three
turf type tall fescues, and at least 10% Bluegrass. Approved
varieties shall be selected “Recommended Turfgrass cultivars for
Professional Seed Mixtures,” University of Maryland Turfgrass Technical
Update TT-77 most recent edition. A copy of this publication can be
obtained from the M-NCPPC Project Manager or by visiting the
Maryland Turfgrass Council website http://www.mdturfcouncil.org or by
calling them at 410-836-2876.
4. Specifications for Sod Materials
a. Thickness of Cut: The thickness of the roots and soil should
be ½” to ¾”.
b. Pad Size: Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier’s
standard width and length. Maximum allowable deviation from
standard widths and lengths shall be 5%. Broken pads and torn
or uneven ends will not be acceptable.
P35-140 Vol2-48
c. Strength of Sod Sections: Under ideal conditions, standard size
sections of sod shall be strong enough to support their own weight
and retain their size and shape when suspended vertically from a
firm grasp on the upper 10% of the section without the use of
netting. NOTE: Younger tall fescue will not be strong enough
to pass this test but is still okay to use.
d. Sod Viability: Sod shall not be harvested or
transplanted under drought conditions.
e. Time Limitations: Under optimal conditions, sod shall be
harvested, delivered and installed within a period of 36 hours.
However, because sod is a perishable commodity, if high
temperatures and low moisture extremes occur, its viability
declines and installation should occur within 24 hours from
harvest. Sod not transplanted within this period shall be inspected
and approved or rejected by the M-NCPPC Project Manager
prior to installation.
F. Sod Staples:
On slopes greater than 3:1 or steeper sod shall be stapled at a minimum of
4 staples per square yard of sod.
705.03
CONSTRUCTION
Final Soil Grading and Preparation shall be inspected by the M-NCPPC
Project Manager before seeding and/or sodding commences. Seed, Sod, and
Soil Amendment Rates and Specifications shall adhere to those in Section
723 - Topsoil, unless specifically changed in this contract.
Seeding and Mulching:
1. Final grade and seedbed must be approved by the M-NCPPC Project
Manager before seeding begins and upon completion of the seedbed.
Failure to get the seed bed approved may result in doing the seedbed
preparation over.
2. Seeding may be done immediately thereafter, provided the topsoil has
remained in a good, friable condition and has not become muddy or hard.
If it has become hard, it shall be tilled to friable condition again, and reinspected.
3. Weeds and undesirable grasses growing on existing grade that is to be
seeded and/or sodded must be cut and removed before soil preparations
begins. In some instances an M-NCPPC approved herbicide may be
used as directed and approved by M-NCPPC Project Manager.
Contractor must have current MD Dept. of Agriculture certified pesticide
applicator performing work. Signage and pesticide records shall follow
MDA regulations. Copies of all application records shall be submitted
to Project manager.
4. Before seeding or sodding all soils shall be loosened by means of
tilling and/or disking; then further prepared by York Rake or other
approved equipment, to a minimum depth of four (4) inches. All stones
over 3/4 inch in any dimension shall be removed from the top four (4)
inches of soil by use of screening, a "Rock Hound”, or other means. In
P35-140 Vol2-49
addition, prep should include removal of all trash, debris, roots, brush,
wire, grade stakes and other objects that would interfere with seeding
and sodding.
5. Soil preparation methods shall adhere to the Section 723- Landscape
Soil (Topsoil) and to the LCA, Landscape Specification Guidelines.
Dry Application:
a. Seed Installation: Cultipacker Seeder: This method applies to seed
just below soil surface and covers the seed in a single operation. Seed
should be applied within the top ¼” of the soil in two different
directions for best results. Drop-type/Broadcast Spreader: Apply seed
within top ¼” of the soil in two directions for best results. To improve
soil/seed contact the entire area shall be rolled.
b. Mulching: Apply mulching material to retain moisture and minimize
erosion. See Section 705.2, section C for application rates.
c. Stabilizing: Stabilize the mulch by either mulch anchoring tool,
cellulose fiber, liquid mulch binders or mulch netting.
Hydroseeding:
a. Installation:
Water, seed and fertilizer method: The mixture shall be sprayed on
the previously prepared seedbed in the form of an aqueous mixture.
Refer to “Recommended Turfgrass Cultivars for certified sod and
professional seed mixtures,” for recommended seeding rates. All mixture
shall be constantly agitated from the time they are mixed until they are
finally applied to the seedbed. If fertilizer is mixed into the slurry, no
more than 30 minutes should lapse before it is applied to prevent the
fertilizer from burning the seed. Care shall be exercised to ensure uniform
coverage.
b. Straw shall be applied by hand or with a straw blower and stabilized.
The same rates and procedures shall be followed as detailed in Dry
Application above.
c. Seed, fertilizer, water and cellulose fiber method: The application
procedure for this method is the same as for the first method above. The
rate of cellulose fiber is 50 pounds per 100 gallons of water. Follow
manufacturer’s recommended rates.
Sodding:
Sod shall conform to materials in Section 705.02 Paragraph E of these
specifications.
1. Soil preparation shall conform to Section 723.
2. Sodding may be done immediately thereafter, provided the bed has
remained in a good condition and has not become muddy or hard. If it
has become hard it shall be tilled to a friable condition again, and reinspected by the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
3. Moistening soil: During periods of high temperature, lightly
irrigate the soil immediately prior to laying the sod.
4. Starter Strip: The first row of sod shall be laid in a straight line with
subsequent rows placed parallel to and tightly against each other. Lateral
P35-140 Vol2-50
joints shall be staggered to promote more uniform growth and strength.
Care shall be exercised to ensure that the sod is not stretched or
overlapped and that all joints are butted tightly in order to prevent voids,
which would cause air-drying of the roots.
5. Sloping Terrain: On sloping terrain (3 to 1 or steeper), where
erosion may be a problem, sod should be installed perpendicular to slope
when possible with staggered joints and secured by staples. Staples are to
be driven flush with sod. Sod in swales shall be stapled. Use only
lengths of four feet or more in ditch inverts and swales. Sod joints shall
be staggered.
6. No sod shall be applied to frozen ground and/or frozen sod is not to be
laid.
7. Watering and Rolling: The contractor shall lightly water sod during
installation to prevent excessive drying. As sodding is completed in any
one section, an entire area shall be rolled. It shall then be thoroughly
irrigated so that the underside of the new sod pad and soil immediately
below the sod are thoroughly wet. The contractor shall be responsible to
have adequate water available at the site prior to and during
installation of sod, unless otherwise stated.
PLANTING AND TIMING
A. Regular Seeding Season
Spring - March 1-May 15
Fall - August 15-October 15
Optimum seeding time is late August to mid-October
B. Regular Sodding Season
Spring - (March 1 to May 1)
Fall - (October 1 to November 15)
C. To begin seed and sod installation, obtain approval from the M-NCPPC
Project Manager. To seed or sod at times other than those listed,
requires the approval of the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY SEEDED AND SODDED AREAS
A. Maintenance of grass areas shall consist of watering, mowing, weeding, reseeding and/or re-sodding as necessary to obtain an approved stand of grass.
Maintenance shall continue until M-NCPPC Project Manager accepts the
project.
B. In the absence of rainfall, during the first week of seed or sod installation,
watering shall be performed daily by the Contractor or as often as deemed
necessary by the M- NCPPC Project Manager. Water must be in sufficient
quantities to maintain moist soil to a depth of 4 inches. The total shall be equal
to the equivalent of at least 1 inch of water per week. Watering shall continue
until the stand of turf is accepted. For seeded areas, bare spots, which persist
after three weeks of favorable growing weather, shall be re-cultivated, reseeded, raked and rolled. Re-seeding of bare spots shall be done as many
times as necessary until an acceptable stand of turf is established. For
P35-140 Vol2-51
sodded areas, bare spots shall be re-sodded until deemed acceptable. If the turf
stand is not accepted by the following seeding and sod season, the
Contractor shall re-seed or sod and fertilize, as necessary, the unaccepted
areas at no additional charge to M-NCPPC.
C. If stand provides between 40% and 90% ground coverage, overseed and
fertilize using half of the rates originally applied. If stand provides less than
40% coverage, reestablish stand following original rates and procedures.
D. Flooded, washed-out, rilled or otherwise damaged or defective areas of
seeding, sod, mulch, grade, swales or berms shall be reconstructed and all
grades re-established in accordance with the grade plans or other
specifications or when, in the judgment of the M-NCPPC Project Manager, such
defects or damages are the result of poor workmanship, or failure to meet the
requirements of the specifications.
E. All mowing shall be the Contractor's responsibility until final acceptance
of the project. No mowing shall remove more than one-third of the grass
blade length. Heavy mowing, resulting in grass piles shall be "double mowed"
or the contractor shall remove piles. Height of the grass shall be maintained
between two and a half and three inches, unless otherwise specified.
F. Following are some examples of delays in final acceptance of a project:
1. Improper Grades:
a. Low or high spots on flat or fairly level areas.
b. Improper drainage such as, swales, low areas, rip-rapped outlets
and paved areas.
c. Washed out or rilled areas
d. Exposed debris.
2. Turf Grass Conditions:
a. Poor or thin stand; improper application of sod, dead grass or
sod; use of seed mixtures or sod, other than approved in
specifications.
b. Improper fertilizer application - Uneven spreading, insufficient
amounts, failure to re-fertilize during extended acceptance.
c. Persistent weeds established in turf areas.
705.04
MESUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment,
tools and incidental items necessary to complete the work. Payment
shall be made on a unit rate or lump sum basis as shown in the bid
proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-52
SECTION 721- TREE PRESERVATION
721.01 DESCRIPTION
This work includes: Implementing all arboricultural activities related to tree preservation
and protection of existing trees on site as shown on plans and directed by M-NCPPC
Arborist. The work includes, but is not limited to, tree protection fencing and signs,
pruning, root pruning, mulching, fertilization, and other remedial activities.
721.01.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: All trees on site which are to be preserved will be prepared and
treated to maximize their potential for survival and improve their health and
condition. All work will be performed to meet or exceed current industry
standards. This will also be at the minimum the standards most recently
published by the ANSI and the “Trees Technical Manual; Guidance for
Implementation of Montgomery County’s Forest Conservation Law”.
B.
Company Qualifications: Qualifications to be submitted with bid include the
following:
Contractor will provide an arborist with current certification from the International
Society of Arboriculture and the American Society of Consulting Arborists
(ASCA). Verification of membership in good standing in the National Arborist
Association (NAA). This person shall be responsible for seeing that all work is
performed to standards in a safe and professional manner.
C.
Equipment and Safety:
1.
Equipment: All applicable Federal, State, and Local regulations shall be
followed. The Contractor will be responsible for damage to property
resulting from equipment, including fluid leakage or damage resulting
from equipment failure. All incidents of this type shall be reported
immediately to the M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
2.
Safety shall be a primary concern while working on the property. Qualified
company shall have an established safety program and adhere to all
N.A.A., O.S.H.A., and A.N.S.I. standards applicable to the tree care
industry. This includes all electrical and utility requirements as well as
personal equipment and safe work procedures. All accidents resulting in
property damage or personal injury shall be reported immediately to the
M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
3.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to structures,
installations, fixtures, paving, concrete, plant materials and any other
items on the property which result from the execution of work prescribed.
All work is to be performed in the safest manner possible in order to avoid
damage of any kind.
4.
Pesticide Applications
a. If pesticide applications are required, a Certified Pesticide Applicator
shall be responsible for supervision of all applications of pesticides on the
property. The name and certification number of certified applicator(s)
assigned to this job shall be submitted to the M-NCPPC Construction
Manager.
b. All pesticides shall be applied in strict accordance with label
instructions and all applicable federal, state, and local requirements. All
P35-140 Vol2-53
pesticide applications shall be approved by the M-NCPPC Construction
Manager prior to application. Pesticide Labels and Material Safety Data
sheets shall be available for all pesticides while on the site.
D. Definitions:
1.
Tree Diameter shall be defined as diameter at breast height (dbh) which
is the average tree diameter at 4.5 feet, measured from the ground on
the uphill side of the tree.
2.
Tree Caliper shall be defined as the diameter of the trunk at 6" above the
soil for trees up to 6" in caliper and diameter at 12" above the soil for
trees up to 12" caliper.
3.
Critical Root Zone shall be defined as 1.5-foot of radius for every inch of
trunk diameter at four feet six inches above ground level on the uphill side
of the tree.
4.
Tree Preservation Area shall be defined as all areas outside limits of
construction which contain trees and all areas within the limits of
construction which are designated as tree preservation areas on the
plans and/or in the field by fencing and signage.
721.02 MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer:
1.
Granular: 30-7-7 with 50% of nitrogen in slow release form. Formula shall
contain micronutrient compliment.
2.
Liquid: 30-10-7 arboricultural grade. Nitrogen shall be 67% slow release
in the form of urea formaldehyde. Potassium shall be derived from soluble
potash. Phosphorous shall be in the form of phosphoric acid.
B. Root stimulant:
Rootstm concentrate; Essentialtm, manufactured by Growth Products Limited;
MycorTree Saver Injectable, manufactured by Plant Health Care, Incorporated,
440 William Pitt Way, Pittsburg, Pennsylvania, 15238, (412) 826-5445; or
equivalent product subject to approval of Construction Manager.
C. Tree Protection Fence:
Tree protection fence shall be a minimum of four feet high. Welded Wire: 14
gauge galvanized welded wire with 2" x 4" openings attached to 6’ minimum “T”steel posts, driven at least 2’ into ground @ 10 foot intervals or approved
equivalent. Brightly colored flagging shall be attached to top of fence to ensure
visibility. Chain Link: 1 ½ gauge Galvanized. All posts are 1.5 to 2 inch O.D. @
10 foot intervals or approved equivalent.
D. Tree Protection Signage:
Signs shall be laminated or otherwise weatherproof and printed in bold text so as
to be easily read from a distance of 20 feet. Wording on signage shall be
provided in both English and Spanish.
721.03 CONSTRUCTION
A. Schedule:
P35-140 Vol2-54
Contractor’s Arborist shall be responsible for performing all arboricultural
activities included within the scope of this specification. All activities will
commence immediately upon notice to proceed. Activities will be completed in a
continuous manner and coordinated to prevent delay of other construction
processes.
B. Labor:
Contractor’s Arborist will dedicate labor and equipment as necessary to complete
the work. It shall be the Contractor’s Arborist's responsibility to maintain a
consistent crew on the job site in order to complete work in a timely manner. It
will be the Contractor’s Arborist's responsibility to supervise work and scheduling
and see that work progresses in an efficient manner.
C. Meeting:
The Contractor shall be required to contact the M-NCPPC Construction Manager
to set up a meeting in the field to review the location of trees to be saved and
limits of construction. Any potential conflicts between construction and
preservation shall be addressed at that time.
D. Notifications:
Contractor’s Arborist shall notify the M-NCPPC Site Plan Enforcement Inspector
from the Development Review Division (FCP Plans) and the Construction
Manager Arborist of any site condition changes which may affect work progress.
E. Initial Work:
No other construction activity may occur on site until tree preservation fencing
has been installed and approved by the M-NCPPC Site Plan Enforcement
Inspector from the Development Review Division and the Construction Manager
Arborist.
F. Construction Activity:
All construction activity within the areas fenced off around the trees shall be
prohibited. This shall include the following activities:
1. Parking or driving of equipment, machinery or vehicles of any type.
2. Storage of any construction materials, equipment, stockpiling,
excavation or fill, soil, gravel, etc.
3. Dumping of any chemicals, (i.e. paint thinner from cleaning brushes),
wash-out materials from cleaning equipment, concrete or mortar
remainder, trash, garbage, or debris of any kind.
4. Burning within or in proximity to protected areas.
5. Felling trees into protected areas.
6. Trenching or grading within the Critical Root Zones of protected trees
for any purpose without notifying the M-NCPPC Construction Manager 10
days in advance of operation in writing. This includes utilities, lighting,
irrigation, drainage etc.
G. Tree Preservation Area:
Any work required by plans which is in a tree preservation area shall be
performed by hand. All work will be performed in a manner to prevent
compaction, siltation and disturbance of the root mat of all associated trees and
P35-140 Vol2-55
understory trees. At no time shall tree protection fencing be removed or relocated
without permission of M-NCPPC Arborist Construction Manager.
H. Subcontractor:
The contractor shall be responsible for insuring that all subcontractors are aware
of tree preservation specifications.
I. Critical Root Zone:
Contractor may operate equipment within the root zone of trees to be preserved
only if buffered with 1/2" plywood with a 6” layer of wood chips underneath; or 12
inches of wood chips. Approval from M-NCPPC Construction Manager is
required prior to operation of any equipment in tree preservation areas. Root
protection measures shall be inspected and maintained throughout construction.
J. Location:
Contractor will be responsible for installation of tree protection fencing around
trees and groups of trees to be preserved. See plan for location.
K. Flagging:
Prior to installation, Contractor shall flag or paint location of fencing in field for
verification by M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
L. Bid:
Contractor shall include installation, maintenance, and removal of fencing in bid.
M. Tree Protection Fence:
Fencing shall remain in place and be continuously maintained for duration of
construction.
N. Signs:
Signs prohibiting access to preservation areas shall be placed at least every
thirty feet along preservation fencing. Signs shall be as shown on the drawings.
Minimum size shall be 10 x 12 inches square. Material must be plastic or other
weatherproof material.
O. Root Pruning:
See plan for Final locations for root pruning to be performed determined in the
field in conjunction with both tree protection and sediment control fencing and
approved by the Construction Manager. Root pruning shall be performed
wherever grades will be lowered within the critical root zone of a tree to be
preserved. Root pruning shall be to the depth of excavation, or 24 inches,
whichever is less. A Vermeer RT 200 with the optional root cutter or a approved
equal trencher or vibratory plow shall be used to prune roots. The blade will be
sharpened daily prior to the beginning of the operations. The supersonic air tool
will be used when roots larger than 2” in diameter are exposed to facilitate root
pruning or when root pruning the inner third of a trees critical roots. Roots over 11/2” in diameter shall have a clean cut made on the surface of the root which is
still attached to the tree. This cut shall be made with a handsaw or chain saw as
soon as larger root is severed encountered. Backfill the root-pruning trench with
excavated soil and mulch and mark location for future reference. Silt fence
maybe installed in trench prior to backfilling as long as trench is not open for
P35-140 Vol2-56
longer than 48 hours without watering. Root pruning work will not be done when
more than the top one-inch of soil is frozen. Root pruning will not be undertaken
when the soil is wet and conditions are muddy.
P. Fertilizer:
All trees indicated shall receive a liquid fertilization. Fertilizer will be applied at a
rate of 1.5 pounds of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet of root zone treated.
Fertilizer shall be injected using a soil probe at a depth of six inches. Fertilizer
shall be applied in three-foot grid pattern evenly distributed throughout the root
zone.
Q. Damage:
Contractor will provide services as necessary to respond to damage by
construction activities within 48 hours of notification by the M-NCPPC
Construction Manager.
R. Penalties:
Failure to comply with specifications may result in penalties as prescribed by
Chapter 22A of the Montgomery County Code, Forestry Conservation Law.
721.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools and incidental
items necessary to complete the work. Payment shall be made on a lump sum rate basis
as shown in the bid proposal for the various item stipulated in the proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-57
SECTION 722 - PLANT INSTALLATION
722.01 DECSRIPTION
This section discusses the installation of trees, shrubs, and perennials, and the
application of mulches and planting accessories. Refer to Section 723, Landscape Soil,
for soil preparation and soil testing requirements.
722.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
If the Drawings or Specifications contain any inconsistent requirements, the
greater quantity and better quality of work shall be bid upon and provided by the
Contractor, unless otherwise indicated in writing by the M-NCPPC Project
Manager. If discrepancies are identified, the Contractor shall notify M-NCPPC
immediately for direction, prior to proceeding with the work.
B.
The Landscape Sub-contractor must be approved by M-NCPPC prior to the
contract being executed by M-NCPPC with the General Contractor. Landscape
planting and related work shall be performed by a firm with a minimum of five (5)
years’ experience specializing in this type of work.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all plant material
shown on the drawings and plant list submitted with the contract. The Contractor
shall have investigated the sources of supply and shall be satisfied that all the
plants specified on the drawings can be supplied in the size, variety, and quality
noted before submitting the bid. Failure to take this precaution will not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility for furnishing and installing all the plant
material in strict accordance with the contract requirements and without
additional expenses to M-NCPPC.
D.
If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be
considered for using the nearest equivalent size or variety or an appropriate
alternative species with an equitable adjustment of contract price. Such proof
shall be substantiated and submitted in writing to the M-NCPPC Project
Manager. Substitutions shall not be permitted without written approval by the MNCPPC Project Manager.
E.
Reference Standards:
Comply with those listed below.
1. Nomenclature for plant materials shall be in accordance with Hortus III, by the
staff of L.H. Bailey Hortorium.
2. American Standard for Nursery Stock, ANSI Z60.1, latest edition, American
Nursery & Landscape Association (ANLA).
3 Landscape Specification Guidelines, latest edition, Landscape Contractors
Association*.
*In certain instances, these specifications are different than
recommendations of the Landscape Contractors Association.
722.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Notify the M-NCPPC Project Manager at least 14 calendar days prior to
installation of plant material. Submit a detailed production schedule indicating
P35-140 Vol2-58
various work items and dates each item will be staked or flagged, started and
completed. Include digging and delivery dates for all plant material.
B.
Submit Certificates of inspections required by law for transportation.
C.
Provide two one-pound samples of mulch packaged in a plastic bag. The
samples shall be typical of the lot of material delivered to the site and must
provide an accurate indication of the material’s color and texture. The M-NCPPC
Project Manager must approve materials.
D.
Provide three copies of the following (including manufacturer’s literature or
laboratory analytical data as applicable) to the M-NCPPC Project Manager:
1. Sources of Plant Material (include name of nursery, address, telephone
number, and name of contact person for each source). Plants should be selected
from nurseries that have been inspected and certified by the State Department of
Agriculture in the state where the plant was obtained. All plants shall be certified
pest-free, true to name and in conformance with these specifications. No wild
collected plant material or sheared evergreens may be used. Also, plants, which
have been pruned back, will be rejected.
2. Proposed soil mixes with pH and chemical additives appropriate for each plant
type will be used in the project. Include quantities and proportions of soil,
fertilizer, organic matter, and additives. Refer to Section 723, Landscape Soil for
soil testing requirements and soil amendments.
3. Watering Schedule for plant material during maintenance and warranty period
for approval by M-NCPPC Project Manager. Submit schedule for approval
prior to delivery of plants to the site.
4. A list of previously completed projects of similar size and type will be provided.
This list will include the name, address, and telephone number of contact person
representing the owner at the time of construction and the name, address, and
telephone number of the current project owner.
722.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Planting Season (except where otherwise noted):
1. Deciduous and Evergreen Plant Material: October 15 to April 15.
2. Perennials/ Ornamental Grasses: Spring- March 15 to June 15; FallSeptember 15 to November 15.
3. Spring Flowering Bulbs: September 15 to December 15.
Proceed with planting only when existing and forecast weather conditions are
suitable for work. Perform actual planting when ground is workable, i.e., moist,
not wet or frozen. Planting outside of these time periods requires approval of MNCPPC Project Manager.
722.05 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION PRIOR TO PLANTING
A.
Plants shall be subject to selection by the M-NCPPC Project Manager at the
plants’ place of growth, and inspection upon delivery to the site. M-NCPPC
retains the right to further inspect plants and to reject all unsatisfactory or
defective plant material at any time during the progress of work. Remove rejected
plants immediately from project site.
B.
A written request to select plant material must be received by M-NCPPC Project
Manager at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to digging. The written request
P35-140 Vol2-59
shall state the place of growth and the quantity of plants to be inspected. MNCPPC reserves the right to refuse selection at this time if a sufficient quantity of
plants is not available.
C.
Substrates, compaction and other conditions under which work is to be
performed will be examined. Work will not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
722.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Packaged materials will be delivered in manufacturer's unopened containers or
bundles and will be fully identified with name, brand, type, weight, and analysis.
Packaged materials will be stored in a manner to prevent damage or intrusion of
foreign matter. Any material that has become contaminated will be removed from
the job.
B.
Trees and shrubs will be delivered after preparations for planting have been
completed and soil has been accepted by M-NCPPC Project Manager. Trees or
shrubs will not be bent, bound, or tied in a manner that may damage the bark,
break the branches, or destroy the natural shape. If planting is delayed more
than twenty-four (24) hours after delivery, plants will be protected from severe
weather and any possible mechanical damage. Roots will be kept moist by
heeling-in balled and bur lapped material with a minimum of 2-inches of mulch
over the top of the root ball, roots will be watered regularly.
C.
All plant material shall be covered in transit with a tarp to prevent drying out.
D.
Lift plants only from the bottom of the ball.
E.
Container-grown stock shall not be removed from containers until planting time.
F.
Each group of trees, shrubs, and perennials shall be labeled with a securely
attached waterproof tag bearing the legible designation of botanical and common
name as required by the Maryland Department of Agriculture.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for judging the full extent of work
requirements involved, including but not limited to the potential need for storing
and maintaining plants temporarily and re-handling plants prior to final
installation.
H.
Keep areas of operation clear and clean at all times. During the progress of all
operations, protect walls, roads, paving, curbs and other structures with plywood,
planking, padding or other accepted means as required. The Contractor shall
repair all damaged facilities at no additional cost to M-NCPPC.
I.
The Contractor shall preserve and protect all existing vegetation, unless
otherwise noted. The Contractor shall be responsible for all unauthorized
damage to trees, shrubs, lawn and planting areas. Damaged areas shall be
restored, replaced or repaired by the Contractor as directed by M-NCPPC and at
no additional cost to M-NCPPC.
722.07 SITE INSPECTION
P35-140 Vol2-60
A.
Inspect project site before beginning landscape development operations and
notify the M-NCPPC Project Manager, in writing, of any conditions that might
prevent proper and timely completion of work. Work will not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of work in any
location affected by such conditions.
B.
Test drainage of pits and planting beds. Notify the M-NCPPC Project
Manager of potential poor drainage of tree and shrub pits and planting beds
considered detrimental to growth of plant material. Recommend a program for
correction of poor drainage conditions and submit proposal to the M-NCPPC
Project Manager. Do not proceed with planting operations in areas of poor
drainage until conditions are corrected or direction is given.
C.
Any rock, underground construction work, tree roots, or obstructions encountered
when excavating plant pits must be brought to the attention of the M-NCPPC
Project Manager.
D.
Starting work constitutes acceptance of the soil conditions and any other existing
conditions that may affect plant growth under which the work is to be performed.
After such acceptance, Contractor is responsible for correcting unsatisfactory
and defective work resulting from any unsatisfactory conditions.
722.08 PRUNING
A.
Do not prune plants before delivery. All pruning is to be done on site under the
direction of the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
B.
Under the direction of the M-NCPPC Project Manager, prune out only dead,
decayed, broken, crossing, and inward-growing branches and branch stubs. Do
not cut leaders. Maintain and/or improve the attractiveness of each plant’s full
form, consistent with its natural growth habits. Excessively pruned plants will be
rejected.
722.09 ACCEPTANCE AND WARRANTY
A.
At the completion of all planting work, a final inspection of the landscape
installation shall be performed. At the time of inspection, the Contractor shall
have all planting areas under the Contract free of all pests and weeds and neatly
cultivated. Saucers around planting holes shall be in good repair.
B.
If after the inspection, the M-NCPPC Project Manager is of the opinion that
all work has been performed as per the Drawings and Specifications and that all
plants are in satisfactory growing condition, the Contractor will be issued a
written notice of acceptance in the form of a “Notice of Substantial Completion.”
This will serve as the commencement of the warranty period.
C.
Work requiring corrective action, in the judgment of M-NCPPC, shall be
performed within thirty days after the inspection unless otherwise authorized by
M-NCPPC in writing. No partial approvals will be given unless authorized in
writing by the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
P35-140 Vol2-61
D.
All plant material (trees, shrubs, vines, groundcovers, perennials, and other plant
materials except turf) will be warranted to be in healthy and flourishing conditions
of active growth with a replacement guarantee for a period of one (1) year from
the date the “Notice of Substantial Completion” is issued.
E.
When material is replaced, the warranty duration shall extend to the original
warranty date.
F.
Dead plants and plants not in healthy, vigorous, thriving condition as determined
by the M-NCPPC Project Manager during and at end of warranty period will
be replaced. Replacement plants shall be of the same variety, size and character
as specified for the original planting.
G.
Any material that is 25% dead or more shall be considered dead and must be
replaced at no charge. A tree or shrub shall be considered dead when the main
leader has died back, or 25% of the crown is dead.
H.
Plants shall be free of dead or dying branches and branch tips and shall bear
foliage of normal density, size, and color. Adjacent specimens of the same
species will be matched closely.
I.
Trees, which have settled to an out of plumb condition, shall be reset plumb or
replaced.
J.
Ground cover, perennial, and ornamental grass areas shall be full with no bare
spots, plants shall be vigorous and thriving, and the ground shall exhibit a
minimum uniform coverage of 75 percent throughout the bed area.
K.
Plants found unacceptable at the end of the warranty period shall be replaced at
no charge within one month or in the first month of the next specified planting
season. All guys, cables, and tree stakes shall be removed and disposed of offsite at the end of the warranty, unless otherwise directed by M-NCPPC. All beds
shall be weeded, neatly mulched, and free of litter.
L.
Necessary site repairs caused by plant replacement work will be made at no
extra cost to M-NCPPC.
722.10 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall
continue through the warranty period, but not less than one year.
B.
Maintain plants and beds by watering, weeding, restoring planting saucers
around planting holes, tightening and repairing guy supports, replacing flagging
of guy wires, pruning and resetting plants to proper grades or vertical position, as
required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Manage pests to maintain plants in
a healthy and aesthetically pleasing condition for the long term. Maintain all
plants through the warranty period. Specific maintenance requirements, in
addition to those mentioned above, are outlined as follows.
1. Plants shall be inspected for watering needs at least twice per week
between March 31 and October 31. Plant beds shall be thoroughly watered one
to two times per week to a total depth of one inch of water per week (by rain,
P35-140 Vol2-62
water truck or irrigation.) For the first growing season after planting, trees should
be watered over several days a total of two inches of water per week (by rain,
water truck or irrigation.) After one full growing season, one inch of water for
trees will suffice. Gator bags can be used on trees to directly apply water to the
base of the tree. The Contractor is responsible for arranging for all watering
necessary, even if there is no on-site source of water.
2. All planting beds and mulched areas around trees shall be kept free of weeds
from March 1 through October 31, and shall be weeded twice per month during
this period. Weeding by means of pre-emergent herbicides or by spraying
herbicides is prohibited in planting beds. Weeds shall be removed in planting
beds either by hand (with a long handled fork to remove the entire root system)
or by use of Round-up applied using a wick applicator. Within a bio-retention
facility all weeds must be removed by hand two week before planting. Round up
should be applied at a rate of 5:1 in early spring and late fall and at a rate of 3:1
during the peak-growing season. Round-up application must be done under the
direct supervision of a Certified Pesticide Applicator. Weeding personnel must be
able to identify the difference between desirable plants and weeds. Pre-emergent
herbicides and sprays may be used in mulched areas of trees that have no
herbaceous plantings.
3. All ground covers, perennials and ornamental grasses shall be cut back to
approximately 6 inches from the ground in early March, before spring-flowering
bulbs, ground covers and perennials germinate. If mowers, weed wackers or
bush wackers are used, take care not to damage bark of trees and shrubs.
Deadheading during the growing season (removal of spent blooms) is not
recommended.
4. All planting beds shall be mulched following the late winter/early spring cleanup described above. Mulch shall be material described in this specification. The
total depth of mulch in planting beds shall not exceed two inches. Mulched areas
of trees shall also be re-mulched at this time to a depth not to exceed three
inches with material described in this specification. Perennials and ornamental
grasses shall be fertilized following mulching with 10-10-10 fertilizer at a rate of 8
lbs. per 1,000 square feet, and shrub beds shall be fertilized with 10-10-10
fertilizer at a rate of 5 lbs. per 1,000 square feet. Mulch shall be maintained
throughout the year at the required depths. Beds and individual pits shall be neat
in appearance with clearly defined edges and maintained to the designed layout.
5. Newly planted trees do not require fertilization. If trees do not appear healthy,
consult registered Arborist or certified Horticulturist for recommendations prior to
fertilizing trees. Submit proposed fertilization program to M-NCPPC for approval
prior to fertilization.
6. Pruning of trees shall occur throughout the year, as necessary to remove
broken, dead or diseased branches, suckers on main stems of trees, sprouts
growing at the base of trees, crossed branches, and low limbs that interfere with
traffic or maintenance. Broken, dead or diseased branches should be removed
from shrubs throughout the year as necessary. The natural character of shrubs
shall be kept intact. Shrubs shall not be pruned as hedges. Shrub branches
which interfere with traffic on walkways should be selectively pruned.
8. Leaves and light items shall be removed from lawns, planting beds and paved
areas by raking or with machine blowers before they become wet or matted. The
Contractor shall clean up leaves as described above and dispose of materials off
site once every two weeks from October 1 through December 31. Heavy items,
P35-140 Vol2-63
such as branches and plant debris, shall be removed from all areas year-round
as necessary. Clean up of trash is the responsibility of M-NCPPC.
9. Guy wires and anchoring cables shall be tightened as needed to maintain
tautness throughout the first growing season. After the plant has been in place
for one full growing season, the Contractor shall remove all tree staking and
guying materials and dispose of them off site.
10. Monitor plants on a monthly basis throughout the year, noting any signs of
stress, pests or decline. If problems are observed, the Contractor shall take
immediate action to identify the problem source and determine the appropriate
corrective measures. The Contractor shall engage professional arborists and
horticulturists as needed at no additional cost to M-NCPPC. M-NCPPC shall be
immediately advised of problems and recommended corrective actions. The
Contractor shall submit inspection and recommendation reports promptly to the
M-NCPPC Project Manager for review. Pesticides shall be applied by
personnel licensed to do so in the state of Maryland. All pesticides shall be
approved by M-NCPPC for the intended uses and application rates prior to use.
C.
Clean Up:
The Contractor shall clean up and remove off-site all debris created by this Work.
722.11 MATERIALS
A.
Tree Support System: (Staking should be done at the direction of the MNCPPC Project Manager In windy locations and for plants bearing heavy
crowns.)
1. Stakes: Hardwood Stake, nominal 2 inches x 2 inches x 6 feet tall (2 feet
should be driven into the ground).
2. Wires: Provide wire ties of 2-strand, twisted, pliable galvanized steel wire, size
indicated, not lighter than 14 gauge. Guy wires shall be sufficiently loose to allow
2 to 3-inches of sway at the contact point of plant material.
3. Hose: Two-ply reinforced rubber hose not less than ½-inch diameter.
4. Flagging: Commercially available, plastic surveyor’s tape, 6-inch length X 2inch width, color white.
B.
Mulch for Planting Beds:
Leaf Mulch -Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter derived from
leaves, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100
percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 2 to 5
decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of
substances toxic to plantings.
C.
Mulch for Tree Areas without Understory Plantings:
Shredded Leaf Mulch -Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter
derived from leaves, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by
weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content
of 2 to 5 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free
of substances toxic to plantings.
D.
Soil Amendments:
Refer to Section 723, Landscape Soil.
E. Pesticides:
P35-140 Vol2-64
Provide information on pesticides needed for pest control and apply only with the
written acceptance of the M-NCPPC Project Manager. All pesticides shall be
approved by the M-NCPPC Project Manager for the intended uses and
application rates prior to use and shall be applied by an applicator certified by the
State of Maryland
F. Water:
The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish a supply of water to the site at no
extra cost to M-NCPPC if municipal water is not available at the site at the time of
planting or thereafter during the maintenance period. All work injured or damaged
due to the lack of water or due to the use of too much water, shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility to correct. Water shall be free from impurities injurious
to plant materials.
722.12 LANT MATERIALS
A.
All plant material will be furnished by M-NCPPC via Pope Farm Nursery,
7400 Airpark Road, Gaithersburg, MD 20879. 301-258-4027. Contractor is
responsible for pickup and delivery of plant material to site.
B.
Plants shall be in accordance with American Nursery and Landscape Association
Standards (ANLA) and nursery-grown with best horticultural practices under
climatic conditions similar to those of the Project for at least two years, unless
specifically noted otherwise. All plants shall meet the referenced ANLA standards
for quality by being exceptionally full, uniform, so trained or favored in
development and appearance as to be superior in form, density, spread of
branches, compactness, symmetry, and shall be certified stock. Bare root plants
are prohibited. The M-NCPPC Project Manager shall make determination of
quality.
C.
Plants must be sound, healthy, and vigorous; well branched and densely foliated
when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae and shall
have healthy, well-developed root systems. Plants must be free from physical
damage or adverse conditions that would prevent vigorous growth. All trees shall
be single stem specimens unless otherwise noted.
D.
Plants must be true species and variety shown on drawings.
E.
Balled and bur lapped plants shall be freshly dug. They shall be adequately
balled with firm natural balls of earth of a diameter and depth not less than that
recommended by the American Nursery and Landscape Association Standards
(ANLA). Balls shall be firmly wrapped with untreated burlap. Any surface soil
above the original grade of the tree or shrub root ball or covering or obscuring the
flare of the tree trunk or shrub crown must be removed prior to planting in order
to determine the specified planting depth. All balled and bur lapped trees shall
exhibit the flare of the trunk at the soil line. Tree root balls with more than four
inches of extra surface soil will be rejected by M-NCPPC. Shrub root balls with
more than one inch of extra surface soil will be rejected by M-NCPPC.
F.
Balled and bur lapped plants that are 2-inches or more in caliper shall be
drumlaced or have wire baskets.
P35-140 Vol2-65
G.
No balled and bur lapped plants shall be planted if the ball is cracked.
H.
Heeled-in plants from storage are allowed only if approved by the M-NCPPC
Project Manager.
I.
Trees that have damaged or crooked leader, missing leaders or multiple leaders,
unless specifically specified, will be rejected. Trees with damage or abrasion of
the bark, sun scalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts more than 1-1/4" that have
not completely callused will be rejected. Rejected plants will be removed
immediately from the site.
J.
The root system of container-grown plants shall be well-developed and welldistributed throughout the container, such that the roots visibly extend to the
inside face of the growing container and hold its soil together firm and whole.
Container grown plants shall not be root bound. Container grown plants shall
have no large roots growing out of the container. Spiraling roots, root curl, and
any type of deformation of the roots of plants grown in containers shall not be
accepted. No container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth when
taken from the container shall be planted.
K. Plant Size
1. Plants must conform to the measurements specified in plant schedules except
that plants larger than specified may be used if acceptable to the M-NCPPC
Project Manager. Use of such plants shall not increase the contract price. If
larger plants are accepted, the root ball shall conform to ANLA specifications.
2. A caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk 6" above the
natural ground line for trees up to 4"' in diameter and at point 12" above the
natural ground line for trees greater than 4" in diameter.
3. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height
and spread dimensions specified refer to the main body of the plant and not from
branch tip to tip.
4. No plant shall be less than the minimum size when a range of sizes is given.
The minimum size acceptable gives measurements after pruning when pruning is
required.
5. Plants that meet measurements specified, but do not possess normal balance
between height and spread, or height and a caliper, shall be rejected.
6. Shrubs shall meet the requirements for spread or height stated on the
drawings. The measurements for height shall be taken from the ground level to
the average height of the shrub and not to the longest branch. Single stemmed or
thin plants shall not be accepted. The side branches must be generous, well
twigged, and the plant as a whole shall be well branched to the ground. The
plants must be in a moist vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, and
root or branch injuries. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery to the site.
7. Ground covers, perennials, ornamental grasses, and bulbs shall be of size,
age and condition listed on the drawings. Plants shall be healthy and free of all t
ypes of pests. Ground covers, perennials and ornamental grasses shall be
potted, and shall have not less than six buds, eyes or crowns.
722.13 SOIL PREPARATION
A.
Planting Pits for Trees and Shrubs (Soil Mix Type 1):
P35-140 Vol2-66
1. Excavate individual planting pits to dimensions indicated on the plan drawings.
The pit should be as deep as the root mass and at least twice as wide. The
planting pit, if dug with a backhoe or other machine, shall be finished by shovel
so that the root ball shall sit on undisturbed soil. Mix transplant inoculants into
existing soil at rates specified or recommended by inoculants manufacturer.
Blend the inoculants into the top 8- inches to 10-inches of the backfill. Do not
blend soil mixes in individual plant pits. Add soil mix after placement of plants in
individual planting pits.
B.
Landscaping areas – Ornamental Grasses/ Perennials (Soil Mix Type 2):
1. For existing soil to remain in place and be amended for planting beds, loosen
existing subsoil to a depth of 12-inches for perennial beds. Add organic matter,
soil amendments and fertilizer based on soil test results and rototill until
thoroughly blended. Level and re-grade planting bed prior to installation of
Landscaping Soil. Install 3-inches of landscaping soil to surface of bed and fine
grade prior to installation of plant material.
2. For soil preparation in critical root zone areas of existing trees, all work must
be done by hand with shovels and rakes, unless otherwise approved in writing by
the M-NCPPC Project Manager.
722.14 LAYOUT AND GRADES
A.
Stake locations of trees and shrubs and outline of bed areas for review and
adjustment by M-NCPPC prior to planting. Place shrubs, perennials, bulbs and
ground covers in specified locations in bed areas in the presence of M-NCPPC
before containers are removed, so that adjustments may be made prior to
planting. Obtain the approval of the M-NCPPC Project Manager of layout before
planting. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 14-calendar days’ notice to
M-NCPPC for review of planting bed and plant layout.
722.15 PROJECT
A.
Verification of Conditions:
1. Areas and conditions where plant materials are to be installed will be
examined and the General Contractor will be notified of conditions detrimental to
proper and timely completion of work. Work will not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected to permit proper installation of work. Commencement of
planting operations constitutes acceptance of soil conditions and any other
existing conditions that may affect plant growth.
2. Areas to be planted will be brought to line and grade designated or accepted
by the M-NCPPC Project Manager before staking plant materials.
3. Trees, shrubs, and ground cover plant will be inspected for injury, insect
infestation, and for improper pruning. Planting will not begin until deficiencies are
corrected or plants are replaced.
B.
Utilities
1. The Contractor shall determine the location of all underground utilities prior to
soil work and plant installation and perform work in a manner that will protect
utilities from damage. Hand excavate as required and provide adequate means
of support and protection of utilities during soil and planting operations. Maintain
grade stakes set by others until parties concerned mutually agree upon removal.
P35-140 Vol2-67
The Contractor shall repair all utilities damaged by soil and planting operations at
the Contractor’s expense.
2. If there is a conflict between the utilities and planting, the Landscape
Contractor must notify the M-NCPPC Project Manager to determine
alternative planting sites.
722.16 PLANTING
A.
Installation
1. The root collar of all trees and shrubs should be planted level with existing
grade as shown in the planting details. The root collar flares out at the base of
the trunk, just above the roots. The flared base of the trunk shall always remain
above the surface and the roots should be covered with soil. Compliance could
entail excavation and removal of excessive soil on the top of the root ball before
the plant is acceptable for planting. The root flare should be visible following plant
installation.
2. Place the plant material in the planting pit, planting bed, or planter to proper
grade and alignment indicated.
3. Set trees on undisturbed grade to prevent plant from sinking.
4. For container plants, remove plant from container taking care not to damage
root ball. After removing plant, vertically score root ball using a sharp knife, about
1/8-inch deep and about every 2 to 3-inches in circumference.
5. For balled and bur lapped material, remove and discard of all burlap, ropes,
and wires from trunks and top one-half of B&B root balls.
6. Set plants upright, plumb centered in pits and positioned as directed by the MNCPPC Project Manager.
7. Space ground cover and perennial plants in accordance with indicated
dimensions and spacing requirements as shown on plans.
8. Install ground cover plants and perennials so that roots are surrounded by soil
below mulch.
B.
Backfill:
1. Backfill with soil mixture specified: existing soil and inoculants. Inoculants must
be added to existing soil backfill in the presence of the M-NCPPC Project
Manager.
2. Backfill sides of plant pit halfway with soil mixture and tamp as pit is being
filled. Eliminate air pockets.
3. Finish backfilling sides of pits and tamp firmly. Maintain plants plumb and
straight.
4. For all non-ericaceous trees and shrubs add transplant inoculants at rates
specified or recommended by inoculants manufacturer. Blend the inoculants into
the top 8- inches to 10-inches of the backfill.
5. Never cover the top of the root ball with soil.
6. Watering saucer must be located on the outside edge of the planting pit as
shown in the planting details.
C.
Mulching:
1. After planting has been completed and verified as acceptable by the MNCPPC Project Manager, mulch plant pits, planting beds, and planters with
specified mulching material a minimum of 2-inches and maximum of 3-inches,
and tapering to 0-inches at the plant stem immediately after planting. Mulch
P35-140 Vol2-68
touching the stems of plants will be considered unacceptable. Cut bed line with
smooth constant edge to minimum depth of 3".
2. Planting areas shall conform to specified grades after full settlement has
occurred and after mulch has been applied. Remove tags, labels, strings, etc.,
from plants (identification tags shall remain on the plant until after inspection by
the Project Manager has been completed).
D.
Watering:
1. Thoroughly water all planted areas immediately after planting. Ensure root
balls are saturated and saucers do not wash out. Each plant should be watered
thoroughly on the inside of the saucer until it is filled, even during rain. After
watering, rake mulch to provide a uniform finished surface. Slow release watering
devices will improve survivability.
722.15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools, and incidental
items necessary to compete the work. Payment shall be made on a unit rate or lump
sum basis as shown in the bid proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-69
Section 723 - LANDSCAPE SOIL
723.01 Description
Landscape soil shall be used for soil preparation and amending existing soil for
landscape areas, erosion control areas, and lawn areas. Lawn areas
are
defined as any area that will support grass either planted as seed or sod including
playing fields. Landscape areas are defined as any area that will support perennials,
annuals, bulbs, shrubs, and trees.
723.02 Quality Assurance
A.
If the Drawings or Specifications disagree among them or the Drawings
disagree with the Specifications, the greater quantity and better quality of
work shall be bid upon and provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise
indicated by the M-NCPPC Construction Manager in writing. If
discrepancies are identified, the Contractor shall notify M-NCPPC
immediately for direction, prior to proceeding with work.
B.
All work shall meet minimum requirements of Montgomery County
Department of Permitting Services Topsoil specification as well as what is
contained within this specification.
C.
The submittals listed below will be made for the landscape soil aspect of
this project to the M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
1. Manufacturer's and/or source data for all materials including soils.
2. Certified chemical and mechanical analysis of samples of topsoil,
existing soil, soil mixes, soil amendments and organic compost materials
used in making of soil mixes.
3. Submit a list of equipment anticipated for soil work, unloading
materials, handling and installation.
4. Samples provided by the Contractor shall be typical of material to be
delivered to the site and shall provide an accurate indication of color,
texture, and the organic make-up of the material. Submit three pound
samples of the following:
a. Organic Matter: one sample of each type of organic matter to
be used.
b. Imported Off-Site Soil Prior to Amendment: one sample
c. Amended Off-Site Soil: one sample
5. Submit soil tests to the M-NCPPC Construction Manager for all soil to
be obtained from both on-site and off-site as described in 723.02D.
D.
Soil Testing:
1. All soil testing shall be done at the Contractor’s expense. Soil tests
shall be conducted by a state laboratory or recognized commercial
laboratory. Each sample shall be extracted from a six-inch deep core and
prepared in accordance with recommendations of the soil-testing
laboratory.
2. Each soil test shall determine soil texture (mechanical analysis), pH,
magnesium, phosphorus, potassium, soluble salts, total calcium, nitrogen,
and percent organic matter. If the soil is sandy, it shall also be tested for
P35-140 Vol2-70
boron. Soil test results shall include laboratory recommendations for soil
amendments to correct deficiencies and accomplish planting objectives.
Follow recommendation of Landscape Specification Guidelines, latest
edition, Landscape Contractor’s Association of Maryland, Virginia, and
The District of Columbia, Seeding and Sodding Section for optimum plant
growth and provide course of action based on their recommendation. The
Contractor shall submit plans with the soil test results showing the
locations of all soil tests. Incomplete test results and plans will be rejected
by M-NCPPC, and shall be redone at the Contractor’s expense.
3. For all new soils provided from off-site sources, obtain one soil test for
each soil source per 500 cubic yards of soil and submit soil test results
and soil amendment recommendations to M-NCPPC Construction
Manager for review and acceptance prior to distributing and amending
soil.
4. For all existing stockpiled topsoil to be redistributed on site, obtain one
soil test per 500 cubic yards of soil prior to application. Submit soil test
results and soil amendment recommendations to M-NCPPC Construction
Manager for review and acceptance prior to redistributing and amending
soil.
5. Where paving and base materials have been removed and the area is
to be re-established with lawn or planting, obtain one composite soil test
per 10,000 square feet of subsoil material, or at least one composite test
for each separate excavated area. Each composite soil test shall consist
of no less than five one-half cup samples taken at random from each
sampling area. Each sample shall be taken from a six-inch deep core.
The five or more samples shall be mixed together to form a composite
sample, from which a pint sample shall be extracted, air-dried and tested.
Submit soil test results and subsoil amendment recommendations to MNCPPC Construction Manager for review and approval subsoil
amendment recommendations prior to filling the area with soil.
6. For existing soil to remain in place and be amended for landscape
areas, submit one composite soil test for each isolated bed area
(separated from other beds by paving). For existing soil to remain in place
and be amended for lawn areas, submit one composite soil test per
20,000 square feet. Composite tests for planting areas shall be mixed
from a minimum of five samples as described in #5 above. Composite
tests for lawn areas shall be mixed from a minimum of ten samples as
described in #5 above. Submit soil test results and soil amendment
recommendations to M-NCPPC Construction Manager for review prior to
amending soil.
7. Following completion of soil amendment operations and fine grading,
and prior to planting, 10 additional soil samples shall be taken at random
from planting and lawn areas throughout the site. The M-NCPPC
Construction Manager shall determine locations of tests. These samples
shall not be composite samples and are to assure that soils have been
amended properly prior to planting or installation of lawn. Submit soil test
results to M-NCPPC for review. If it is apparent that soils have not been
amended as specified or protected from contamination, areas not in
compliance with specified requirements shall be reworked and retested
as required until soils meet specified requirements. All rework and
retesting shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
P35-140 Vol2-71
E.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling
1. Package materials will be delivered in manufacturer's unopened
container or bundles; they will be identified with name, brand, type,
weight, and analysis. Packaged materials will be stored in a manner that
will prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. Any material that
becomes contaminated will be removed from the job site.
2. Organic amendments will not be delivered or installed excessively wet
or frozen.
3. Delivery location, stockpile locations and schedule will be coordinated
with the M-NCPPC Construction Manager prior to delivery. Soils will be
protected from eroding while stockpiled on site.
4. Bulk materials will be stabilized after delivery according to the
Sediment Control Plan.
F.
Job Conditions
1. The Contractor shall notify the M-NCPPC Construction Manager at
least ten (10) calendar days prior to the start of landscape soil installation.
2. Determine location of all underground utilities prior to soil work.
Existing utilities, paving, vegetation, and other facilities will be protected
from damage caused by soil installation operations. All damaged areas;
facilities and materials shall be restored, repaired or replaced as directed
by M-NCPPC at the Contractor’s expense.
3. Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of conditions under
which work is to be performed. After such acceptance, Contractor will be
responsible for correcting unsatisfactory and defective work resulting from
unsatisfactory conditions.
723.03 Materials
A.
Landscape Soils are amended existing stockpiled topsoil, amended
existing in-place soil, or amended soil from an off-site source that has
been spread to finish grade, will support plant growth, and meets the
following requirements. The soil shall closely match the mechanical
analysis (percentage sand, silt and clay) of the existing subsoil. Soil shall
be free of cinders, stones, slag, coarse fragments, gravel, sticks, trash,
roots, and other debris over 3/4". Soil will be to a depth of 12” for
landscape areas, 6” for lawn areas. It must also be free of plants or plant
parts of Bermuda grass,
Quack grass, Johnson grass, Nutsedge,
Poison Ivy, Phragmites, Canada
thistle, or any noxious weeds. The
soil shall contain no substances
harmful to plant growth. If the
existing native subsoil is a bank run gravel,
the topsoil or landscape
bedding soil shall be a sandy loam.
1. Soil for lawn areas:
a. The pH shall be between 6.0-7.0.
b. The acceptable amount of Magnesium shall be 35 pounds per
acre; Phosphorus shall be 100 pounds per acre; Potassium shall
be 85 pounds per acre, and Nitrogen shall be a minimum of 50
pounds per acre.
c. Soluble salts shall not exceed 3 mmhos/cm. Calcium levels
shall not exceed 2000 parts per million.
d. Organic Matter shall be greater than three percent.
P35-140 Vol2-72
2. Soil for Landscaping areas
a. The pH shall be based on the specific plant requirements but
will be within the range of 5.5-6.5.
b. The acceptable amount of Magnesium shall be 71-124 pounds
per acre; Phosphorus shall be 62-102 pounds per acre; Potassium
shall be 85-160 pounds per acre, and Nitrogen shall be a
minimum of 50 pounds per acre.
c. Soluble salts shall not exceed 4mmhos/cm, Calcium levels shall
not exceed 2,000 parts per million.
d. Organic Matter shall be between 5%
and 6%.
3. The following soil amendments may be used to amend the soil to meet
specified requirements. Soil amendments and rates of application are to
be determined based on soil test results. Specific recommendations for
the type of amendments can be found in the Landscape Specification
Guidelines by the Landscape Contractors Association of MD, DC, and VA
(most recent addition).
a. Sulfur: Sulfur for adjustment of soil pH shall be an
unadulterated flower of sulfur.
b. Lime: Ground or pulverized limestone, which contains a
maximum of 50 percent total oxides.
c. Organic Matter: To increase organic matter based on soil test
results, the following materials can be used:
I.Yard Debris Compost: Compost made from yard
trimmings, such as leaves, grass clippings and pruning
that have been properly composted, are mature and have
been sieved through a ¾ inch screen. Compost shall be
free of trash and contain no toxic substances harmful to
plant growth. Acceptable Product: Leafgro, available
through Maryland Environmental Services or equivalent
approved by M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
II. Biosolids Compost/ Composted Sludge: Compost made
from polymer dewatered biosolids, that meets the minimum
requirements of EPA 503 standards and permitted by the
Maryland Department of the Environment under COMAR
26.04.06. It is mature and has been sieved through a ¾”
screen. The pH range shall be 6.2-7.2.
d. Fertilizer: Fertilizer analysis and rate of application shall be
determined based on soil test results. Fertilizer shall be uniform in
composition, free flowing and suitable for application with
approved equipment. If compost is used to amend soil, fertilizer is
usually not required.
e. Sand: Clean, washed, coarse masonry sand, sized up to ¼”
particles.
723.04 Construction
A. Examination and Verification of Conditions
1. The areas and conditions where planting amendments are to be
installed will be examined, and the Contractor will be notified of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Work will not
P35-140 Vol2-73
proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to permit proper
installation of work.
2. Cooperation will be undertaken with other trades working in and
adjacent to work areas. Drawings that show the development of the entire
project will be examined to gain familiarity with the scope of other
required work.
B. Soil Preparation
1. All areas to receive landscape soil shall be free of construction debris,
refuse, compressible or decayable materials, stones greater than two
inches and standing water to a depth of 12” for landscape areas and 6”
for lawn areas. Refer to removals work for depth of excavation of specific
areas. Do not place fill when fill materials are wet, frozen or not at the
optimum moisture content for proper compaction. Adjust sub grade levels
as required to ensure that planting and lawn areas have adequate
drainage. Installation of all utilities and irrigation mainlines shall be
competed prior to beginning landscape soil work.
2. After the rough grade of the existing soil is accepted by M-NCPPC, the
Contractor shall perform soil tests as specified (715.2.B.5-6) and submit
test results and soil amendment recommendations to the M-NCPPC
Construction Manager. .
3. The Contractor shall install soil amendments over the existing soil as
approved by M-NCPPC Construction Manager. Soil amendments shall be
tilled into the soil to loosen existing soil to a depth of 12" for landscape
areas, and 6" for lawn areas. Excavation is not required. Rake the area
smooth and compact the subsoil not to exceed 65 percent compaction.
Level and regrade planting bed prior to installation of landscape soil.
4. Landscape soil shall be amended to meet the criteria of this section.
Soil shall be mixed at the stockpile or off site, except for areas of existing
soil to be amended in place. Amendments shall be mixed into soil by
layering the soil and soil amendments in alternating thin layers (not to
exceed six inches) and mixing them uniformly as each layer is added.
5. Fill excavated areas with landscape soil amended to meet the criteria
of this section. Soil shall be placed in successive lifts no thicker than six
inches and compacted with hand-operated equipment to a maximum dry
density of 65 percent. Over compaction of fills, which would be
detrimental to planting objectives shall be corrected by loosening fills
through tilling or other means and recompacting to specified limits at no
additional cost to M-NCPPC.
6. The soil shall not be tilled or amended when the soil’s moisture level is
above field capacity or when soil is frozen.
7. For soil preparation in critical root zone areas of existing trees, all work
must be done by hand with shovels and rakes, unless otherwise
approved in writing by the M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
723.05 Measurement and Payment
Payment will be full compensation for all material, labor, equipment, tools, and
incidental items necessary to complete the work. Payment shall be made on a
unit rate or lump sum basis as shown in the bid proposal.
P35-140 Vol2-74
SECTION 740 - TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
For Playground and Playground Equipment
1.
Existing Conditions and Site Preparation The contractor is responsible for verification of
existing site conditions. All proposed dimensions are approximate. Proposed improvements
shall be staked out, by the contractor, prior to installation, and approved by the M-NCPPC
Construction Manager. Contractor shall also identify and mark the location of all existing
utilities prior to excavation.
All plant material existing on site is to remain unless otherwise indicated. Existing trees to
remain shall be protected with orange vinyl fence as necessary and shall not be damaged
during construction. Materials and equipment shall not be stockpiled under trees or on
existing root systems. Contractor(s) will be responsible for replacement of any damaged
trees.
All existing equipment and ties shall be removed and hauled away unless Contractor
has been directed to stockpile material or use the existing ties.
The Contractor shall strip the top soil, excavate as detailed on the plans, grade the excavated
area to a uniform 1-2% slope, remove any rocks (1" and over), debris, roots, vegetation, etc.
from the playground area, scarify the exposed subgrade, bring to optimum moisture content,
and roll with a sheep foot roller (10 ton only) to 95% of a maximum density, as per ASSHTO
T99. If there are areas that cannot be accessed by the roller, a vibrator or hand tamper may
be substituted. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to see that no objectionable
materials as listed above are left under the wood chips.
The contractor shall be responsible for removing existing wood chip surface. Contractor shall
then backfill any excavation which does not overlap with proposed surfacing, compact and
reseed as specified. All stockpiles must comply with local codes and regulations. Stockpiles
shall not exceed 35’ ht. above existing grade or a 2 foot horizontal to 1 foot vertical side
slope. All surplus topsoil remaining at the completion of construction shall be removed from
the site by the contractor
The contractor shall remove existing edging as specified on the plans. All cuts shall
be clean and sanded free of splinters. Removed edging shall be disposed of off site unless
otherwise directed by the M-NCPPC Construction Manager.
M-NCPPC will remove designated trees prior to the start of construction. The Horticulture
staff will be consulted if the proposed mulch areas are in tree and shrub areas. Existing
trees to remain shall be protected as necessary and shall not be damaged during construction.
P35-140 Vol2-75
Materials and equipment shall not be stockpiled under trees or on existing root systems.
Contractor will be responsible for replacement of any damaged trees.
Construction and Installation of a Stabilized Construction Entrance (SCE). Work shall
consist of all labor, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the execution and
completions of erosion and sediment control as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein, including measures to prevent erosion and run-off of earth and silt, and methods to
prevent the transport of sediment off-site by construction vehicles. All sediment control
features shall be constructed and installed in accordance with details as shown on the plan.
2.
Installation: Install all the equipment and site amenities per the manufacturer’s details,
specifications, and supervision. Refer to the plans and shop drawings for the exact
configuration of each structure and the placement within the playground.
The footings, for all equipment shall be 6-1/2 bag mix, 3,500 psi Class A concrete. The
footings dimensions shall be a minimum 30" below grade (refer to the attached detail). The
top of the footings shall be backfilled with 4" clean dirt, and this elevation will be the top of
the subgrade on which the wood chips shall be spread by the Contractor.
All structures and equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer’s specifications and
shall comply with Consumer Product Safety Commission and American Society for Testing
Materials (F1487) guidelines. Safety zones indicated on the plans shall be maintained at all
times. Violation of these safety zones will be cause for rejection of the work. The footprint
of the equipment ordered shall fit the footprint of the equipment as shown on the plans.
In addition to standard safety precautions to be taken as indicated in the General
Specifications, Contractor shall erect a portable chain-link fence rental panel (see detail)
around any and all construction areas. This fence shall be a minimum 8' height above
ground, and shall be closed and locked whenever Contractor leaves the site, for any reason,
or for any amount of time. Fence shall be staked (concrete block) at maximum 12' intervals
and shall include all the connecting hardware. Fence shall be maintained daily. Contractor
will also place Keep Out - Playground Under Construction’s signs as needed around the
construction area (minimum 3 per individual area).
Contractor shall use the designated area on the plan as their staging area. Access to the
site shall also be shown on the site plan and shall be adhered to by the contractor.
Supply and Install Play Structure (see construction drawings for the exact
configurations) that shall comply or exceed the following specifications:
P35-140 Vol2-76
Kompan equipment, or approved equalKompan, Inc. 930 Broadway, Tacoma, WA 98402
Tel: 800.426.9788, Fax: 253.579.1045
Kompan.com
Rep: Ardean Praino, (301)758-4368, [email protected]
BLX4100 BLOQX 1
All Footings for the individual play items shall contain attached flanges at the bases for positive
retention in the ground or concrete footings.
All Exposed Hardware shall be constructed of stainless steel.
Panels shall be constructed of die cast polypropylene, UV stabilized for outdoor use.
Corner Brackets shall be located in each corner. These corner brackets shall be constructed of Die
cast Aluminum with a thickness of 2.5 mm.
Cleats shall be constructed from reinforced polyester.
Do-Nut Bases and Caps shall be constructed of polyamide with UV inhibitors.
To prevent very young users from accessing the structure, the lowest hand or foot support shall be 18
inches minimum above resilient surfacing.
PVC (vinyl, plastisol) shall not be present on any portion of the play equipment.
Color - light blue, orange and light grey panels with steel corners
M7000P House
The Floor Panel shall be constructed of 17.6 mm thick high-pressure laminate.
Vertical Wall Panels, Roof Panels and Counters shall be constructed of UV-stabilized high-density
polyethylene panels with material thickness of 19 mm. The panels shall incorporate 80% recycled
material content and be UV stabilized for outdoor use.
Footing Pipes shall be constructed of 42 mm O.D. steel pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness, with a
flange welded onto the bottom, and shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ISO1461.
Corner Brackets shall be constructed of hot-dip galvanized steel.
All Hardware shall be constructed of stainless steel or Delta coated for corrosion protection.
PVC (vinyl, plastisol) shall not be present on any portion of the play equipment.
Color - light blue for the house and fence. Red for the counter manipulative, roof, bench and circular
P35-140 Vol2-77
counter. Yellow for counters, wheel and sign.
MSC5407P Magic Garden
Vertical Panels and Counters shall be constructed of UV-stabilized high-density polyethylene panels
with material thickness of 19 mm. The panels shall incorporate 80% recycled material content and be
UV stabilized for outdoor use.
Footing and Support Pipes shall be constructed of 38 mm O.D. steel tubing with 2 mm wall
thickness. Pipes shall be hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461 after machining.
Sliding Manipulatives shall be constructed of polypropylene, UV stabilized for outdoor use.
All Hardware shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel or Delta magni coated for corrosion
protection.
PVC (vinyl, plastisol) shall not be present on any portion of the play equipment.
Color - yellow for the flower panel and circular panel in back. green leaf, ring manipulative and
counter. Yellow, orange, and red manipulatives. Grey mouse.
MSC5408P Creative Workshop
Vertical Panels and Counters shall be constructed of UV-stabilized high-density polyethylene panels
with material thickness of 19 mm. The panels shall incorporate 80% recycled material content and be
UV stabilized for outdoor use.
Support Pipes shall be constructed of 38 mm O.D. steel tubing with 2 mm wall thickness. Pipes shall
be hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461 after machining.
Footing Pipes shall be constructed of 38 mm O.D. steel tubing with 2 mm wall thickness. Pipes shall
have a flange on the bottom for positive retention and shall be hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461 after
machining.
The Sand Chute shall be constructed of 110 mm O.D. polypropylene tubing with 10 mm wall
thickness.
Curtains shall be constructed of 2 mm thick woven polypropylene.
Corner Brackets shall be constructed of hot-dip galvanized steel.
All Hardware shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel.
PVC (vinyl, plastisol) shall not be present on any portion of the play equipment.
Color – blue house and bench. yellow counter. grey runnel and mouse. yellow, orange green and red
manipulatives. Black crawl through strips
P35-140 Vol2-78
FREEGAME Court
Main Posts Greater than 120 cm in Height shall be constructed of 101.6 mm O.D., 3 mm wall
thickness steel tubing that has been hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461.
Main Posts Less than 120 cm in Height and Horizontal Rails shall be constructed of 88.9 mm
O.D., 3 mm wall thickness steel tubing that has been hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461.
Barrier Panels shall be constructed of UV-stabilized high-density polyethylene panels with material
thickness of 19 mm. The panels shall incorporate 80% recycled material content and be UV stabilized
for outdoor use.
Metal Barrier Panels shall be constructed of 8 mm diameter wire mesh welded into a frame of 5 mm
x 25 mm cross section. The entire welded assembly shall be hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461.
Backboard Panels shall be constructed of laminated (white with black core) 19 mm thick highdensity polyethylene with UV stabilizers. Writing and border lines shall be created by routering 3 mm
into the panel to expose the black core.
The Basket Ring shall be constructed of 25 mm O.D., 3 mm wall thickness steel tubing, welded to a 3
mm thick steel plate and hot-dip galvanized per ISO 1461, then powder-coated.
The Basket Net shall be constructed of either nylon rope or 4 mm diameter stainless steel chain.
Do-Nut Bases and Caps shall be constructed of polyamide with UV inhibitors.
All Hardware shall be constructed of stainless steel or Delta coated for corrosion protection.
PVC (vinyl, plastisol) shall not be present on any portion of the play equipment.
Color – dark blue panels on goal ends. silver (unpainted) steel all around. white back boards. orange
rim and bracket on goal. neutral net.
P35-140 Vol2-79
Landscape Structures equipment, or approved equalLandscape Structures, 601 7th Street South, Delano, MN 55328
Tel: 888.438.6574
Playlsi.com
Rep: Sean Briggs, Sparks @ Play 3705 Crondall Lane, Owings Mills, MD 21117,
sparksatplay.com. (443)334-4990, [email protected]
Toddler Swing (with bucket seat)
Post PlayBooster (PB) General Specifications by LSI. Color green.
Swing Beam Weldment comprised of 3.500” O.D RS-20 (.120” - .130”) galvanized steel tubing, 6”
wide zinc plated steel clamp, 3.500” pipe cap, and 1 1/4” housings with bronze bushings. Finish:
ProShield, color brown.
Fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST) per. ASTM F879
unless otherwise indicated.
Oodle Swing
Swing Seat Rotationally molded from U.V stabilized linear low density polyethylene, color yellow.
Swing Seat Brkt Weldment comprised of 1.66” O.D RS-20 (.85” - .95”) wall galvanized steel tube,
1.000” O. D. x .750” HRPO steel sheet. Finish: Proshield, color metallic silver.
Cable tightly woven polyester-wrapped, six-stranded galvanized-steel cable with a polypropylene
core. (Cable Connectors) 6061-T6 aluminum.
Bumper molded from U. V. stabilized black EPDM rubber encapsulating 11 GA (.120”) HRPO steel
sheet.
Swing Arch Weldment comprised of 3.500” O.D RS-20 (.080” - .090” wall) galvanized steel tube and
½” thick stainless steel tabs. Finish: Proshield, color metallic silver.
Swing Leg 3.500” O.D RS-20 (.080” - .090” wall) galvanized steel tube and ½” thick stainless steel
tabs. Finish: Proshield, color metallic silver.
Swing Hanger Assembly Assembly comprised of 300 series stainless steel knuckle and yoke,
stainless steel swing pin, stainless steel spring pin and iolite bushings.
Fasteners Primary fasteners shall be socketed and pinned tamperproof in design, stainless steel (SST)
P35-140 Vol2-80
per ASTM F 879 unless otherwise indicated.
Goric equipment Goric Marketing Group USA, Inc.
PO Box 410205, Cambridge, MA 02141
Tel: 877.467.4287, 617.499.3393
Goric.com
Contact: Laura Guscott, [email protected]
Flubber or approved equal
Steel Posts Jan Steel pipes 133 mm (5 ¼'') with a rounded cast aluminum post top, minimum
wall thickness 7.1mm (1/4''); anticorrosion treatment and color finish: sandblasting and zinc-/
epoxy-/ polyester-process, color dark blue
Terranos Clamps Two-part cast aluminum connecting clamps for the height-adjustable connection
of rope elements or steel pipes to Terranos steel posts.
-unless
 16mm (5/8'')
Ropes U-Rope-round strand ropes with galvanized steel cores,
otherwise noted; external strands are covered with non-abrasive UV-resistant Polyamide- yarn (no
Polypropylene!) color red.
Planar Netting Rope crossing points localized by durable, drop forged aluminum-ballknots (no
plastic).
Frox-Rope Connections Rope crossing points localized by durable, drop forged aluminumballknots (no plastic).
Flubber Membrane Square rubber element for the insertion into net squares, comprised of
durable, vandal- resistant conveyor belt material.
Flubber Bridges Bridge comprised of durable, vandal-resistant conveyor belt material.
Mountain or approved equal
Steel Dome Polished stainless steel 304 (WST 4301).
Small Hill
Steel Posts Jan Steel pipes
 133 mm (5 ¼'') w
P35-140 Vol2-81
wall thickness 7.1mm (1/4''); anticorrosion treatment and color finish: sandblasting and zinc-/
epoxy-/ polyester-process, color dark blue
Terranos Clamps Two-part cast aluminum connecting clamps for the height-adjustable connection
of rope elements or steel pipes to Terranos steel posts.
Ropes U-Rope-round strand ropes with galvanized steel cores, 16mm (5/8'')- unless
otherwise noted; external strands are covered with non-abrasive UV-resistant Polyamide- yarn (no
Polypropylene!), color red.
Planar Netting Rope crossing points localized by durable, drop forged aluminum-ballknots (no
plastic).
Frox-Rope Connections Rope crossing points localized by durable, drop forged aluminumballknots (no plastic).
Flubber Membrane Square rubber element for the insertion into net squares, comprised of
durable, vandal- resistant conveyor belt material.
Flubber Bridges Bridge comprised of durable, vandal-resistant conveyor belt material
Banister Corrosion-resistant, curved steel pipes, 60.3 mm (2 3/8''); material AISI304 (DIN
1.4301), connected to the main structure.
Embankment Slide or approved equal
Slide Bed 2.5 mm (0.1”) stainless steel
Slide Saddle Support stainless steel
Climbing Rope or approved equal
Post Steel pipes dia. 133 mm (5 ¼’’) with a rounded cast aluminum post top, minimum wall thickness
7,1mm (1/4’’); anticorrosion treatment and color finish: sandblasting and zinc-/ epoxy-/ polyesterprocess, color blue.
Clamps Two-part cast aluminum connecting clamps for the height-adjustable connection of rope
elements or steel pipes to steel posts.
Rope U-Rope-round strand ropes with galvanized steel cores,
–unless
16mmotherwise
(5/8’
’
)
noted; external strands are covered with non-abrasive UV-resistant Polyamide-yarn (no
Polypropylene!), color red.
P35-140 Vol2-82
Kaiser & Kuhne equipmentGoric Marketing Group USA, Inc.
PO Box 410205, Cambridge, MA 02141
Tel: 877.467.4287, 617.499.3393
Goric.com
Contact: Laura Guscott, [email protected]
Effect Disc
Stand Pipe galvanized powder coated steel construction and baked enamel, color blue.
Effect Wheel high pressure laminate 30 mm, turned-milled sickle motif forms, revolving slowly a threedimensional cone and funnel.
Roller Bearings maintain free and tamper proof.
Tower/Bridge/Platform Combination
Tower Posts hot dipped galvanized steel, powder coated and stove enameled, color blue.
Tower Platforms stainless steel triangular shaped platforms, welded construction with covering of
profiled stainless steel sheet, glass bead blasted. Screw flange fixing to posts.
Tower Infills welded structure made of stainless steel tubes, glass bead blasted, beginning from 3’
platform height, screw flange fixing to posts.
Tower Top high pressure laminate color blue
Tower Top Element stainless steel windmill, color red.
Tunnel Slides stainless steel with windows
Tower Net scramble net, Herculus rope, color red.
Plank Bridge robinia plank, Hercules rope, color red, stainless steel mesh
Totter Bridge robinia plank, Hercules rope, color red
P35-140 Vol2-83
Platform stainless steel post, robinia platform covering and infill, rubber flags, color red
Slide stainless steel sheet slide
Supply and install EUROFLEX pour in place surfacing
Goric Marketing Group USA, Inc.
PO Box 410205, Cambridge, MA 02141
Tel: 877.467.4287, 617.499.3393
Goric.com
Contact: Laura Guscott, [email protected]
Material
Rubber granulate:
granulated recycled rubber
Binding agent:
MDI polyurethane
Rubber granulate:
EPDM rubber granulate
Binding agent:
MDI polyurethane
Color
Refer to drawing for areas of specific color
Dimensions/Tolerances
Refer to drawings for areas of specific height
Performance
EPDM
HIC test:
Fire resistance:
DIN EN 1177: 2008, EN 1177: 2008
E on application B s1, DIN EN 13501-1,2002 (of EPDM
surfaces)
Chemical resistance:
conditionally resistant to acids and bases
Cold fracture resistance: 24h/-40 degree Celsius, no fracture
Cold crack resistance: 5h/-30 degree Celsius, no fracture
Color variation after weathering (3, g Gj/m2)4-5
Installation The substructure must be frost-free and level. The bonded granulate base can
be installed directly over substructure. Install in dry weather only at ambient temperature of
50 degree Fahrenheit or above. The temperature on the first night after installation must not
drop below freezing. Follow manufacturer’s installation instruction Nr.9312-R-00.
Supply and install Wood Fiber Product
Product Engineered Wood Fiber or approved equal
Manufacturer
Installation
Zeager Bros.
4000 East Harrisbur Pike, Middletown, PA 17057
Tel: 800.346.8524
Install to a compacted 12" depth. Engineered Wood Fiber.
Natural
P35-140 Vol2-84
compaction will occur in 2-6 weeks. A sample of the Wood Fiber shall be submitted for
approval to the Construction Manager prior to installation. No Wood Fiber shall be spread
without approval of the sample. Wood fiber shall be spread evenly by hand held rakes. The
top of the wood fiber shall be one uniform level, and at a 12-inch depth under the equipment.
3.
Site Clean-Up and Restoration Upon completion of construction, all disturbed areas
including but not limited to play and site amenity areas, are to be restored to their former
state up to the boundaries of the new construction. This is to include all backfilling and
compacting to former or new grades, materials, equipment, etc., to their original condition
(by replacement, if necessary).
P35-140 Vol2-85
SECTION 741 - PLAYGROUNDS
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR INSTALLATION
1.
TIME FOR
DAMAGES
COMPLETION
OF
WORK
AND
LIQUIDATED
The time limit for completion of all work shall be as follows:
CALENDAR DAYS
The construction completion days shall be consecutive calendar days
beginning 10 days after the date given in the Contract Administrator’s written
notice to commence construction. If the Contractor refuses or fails to
complete such work within the period herein above stated, subject to the
condition named in the specifications and drawings, the Commission may
deduct from final payment the sum of $250.00 per day as fixed and agreed
liquidated damages, but not as a penalty, for each calendar day delay after the
expiration of such period until the final physical completion of the work and
its acceptance by the Commission.
The contract shall be in effect for a term of 365 calendar days from the start
date specified in the Notice of Proceed. The Notice to Proceed will be issued
only after the contract is fully executed.
The contract term includes: 1) a reasonable time to complete all work
imposed by the contract inclusive of punch list work; 2) an allowance of time
for weather related delays considering average climatic conditions during the
term; and 3) an allowance for a 90 day retention period following completion
of the work prior to final payment.
Failure to complete the work, or any part of the work, within the specified
time constitutes a breach of contract which may result in termination or
assessment of liquidated damages as provided by the contract.
2.
MINORITY, FEMALE AND DISABLED (MFD) SUBCONTRACTING
LEVEL OF PARTICIPATION
An MFD subcontracting level of participation of 16% has been
established for this IFB, because of IFB is deemed major procurement of
Construction. This IFB has significant subcontracting opportunities, and
therefore, each Bidder must demonstrate compliance with the Commission’s
nondiscrimination in subcontracting program. A Nondiscrimination in
Subcontracting Bid Form must be completed and signed by an authorized
person in order to be deemed responsive.
P35-140 Vol2-86
3.
SUBCONTRACTING, OR ASSIGNING UTILIZATION REPORT
Upon notice of apparent low bid, the Bidder shall be required to submit a
detailed breakdown (type, amount, percentage of total project) of all work to
be performed by the Bidder and each proposed Subcontractor. Once a
contract has been awarded to the successful bidder, no portion of the resulting
contract shall be subcontracted, assigned, or otherwise disposed of except
upon written consent of the Commission’s Contract Administrator. If a
contract is awarded to the Bidder, the Bidder agrees to document the
utilization of all subcontractors by completing a Subcontracting Utilization
Report. This report documents payments made to Subcontractors for work
performed in connection with the IFB and contract identified on this report.
The report includes the Subcontractor’s name, total contract amount,
payments made this period, payment to date, and the total percentage paid. A
copy of the report is attached. See the Forms Section J-4. If the Bidder is
awarded a contract as a result of this IFB, submission of this report will be
required with each request for payment.
4.
CONTRACTOR SITE INSPECTION
The Contractor is responsible for inspecting the site and reviewing all on-site
conditions prior to submitting a bid. No extras shall be paid for items as a
result of the Contractor’s failure to include obvious conditions in the bid
proposal.
5.
LIST
OF
APPROVED
MANUFACTURERS
PLAYGROUND
EQUIPMENT
The following manufacturers have been approved as suppliers for the
equipment specified in this bid package. Equipment from manufacturers not
listed below will need to be reviewed and approved by the Landscape
Architect prior to the bid opening (Refer to Section 8, “Equal Products,
Materials and Equipment, of Instruction to Bidders).
1.
KOMPAN INC.
Approved for all equipment.
2.
LANDSCAPE STRUCTURES
Approved for all equipment.
7.
GORIC
Approved for all equipment
P35-140 Vol2-87
6.
STANDARDS AND WARRANTY
Playground equipment shall be designed and manufactured to meet ASTM
1487 “Standard Consumer Performance Specification for Playground
Equipment for Public Use” and the latest Consumer Project Safety
Commission standards and guidelines for playground safety and EN Standards
as well.
A. Playground equipment shall be provided with the following
warranties:
1.
For all powder coated metal components and hardware,
and all vinyl coated metal components, a minimum tenyear warranty against structural failure due to corrosion,
deterioration, or workmanship, excluding cosmetic
issues.
2.
For all rotationally molded low density polyethylene or
high density extruded or molded polyethylene
components, a minimum ten-year warranty against
structural failure due to deterioration, or workmanship,
excluding cosmetic issues.
3.
For all moving parts, a minimum one year warranty
against failure due to corrosion, deterioration, or
workmanship.
B. The manufacturer's representative must be available during the
installation. The vendors shall be required to be available on a
48-hour notice for periodic inspections and instructions as
needed.
7.
CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
The Bidder shall satisfy the Commission that he/she has been regularly
engaged in the particular skills required to perform grading and installation of
play equipment for at least five (5) years and have established a successful
performance record of completed work on projects of similar size and nature.
The Bidder and each proposed subcontractor must submit references
reflecting that they have completed at least three (3) similar projects in the last
five (5) years incorporating all of the following categories of work:
•
•
Grading
Installation of play equipment
P35-140 Vol2-88
Installers of the play equipment must be certified as installers by the
appropriate play equipment manufacturer.
8.
QUANTITIES
All quantities noted on the bid forms are estimated quantities only and were
taken from available records for the purpose of obtaining a bid price. The
quantities for those items may be increased or decreased without any
adjustment to the contract unit price. The Contractor will not be allowed to
submit a claim against the Commission for any adjustment to the contract unit
price should item(s) be increased or decreased or eliminated.
9.
UNSUITABLE MATERIALS
Serpentine origin stone (CR-6, DGA, Stone Dust #2, #6, and any other
crushed stone) shall not be used on any Park projects (roads, parking lots,
playgrounds, trails, warning trails, warning tracks, shoulders) where the stone
is not covered with asphalt or concrete. No exception will be allowed.
10.
SUPERINTENDENT OR SITE SUPERVISOR REQUIRED
Pursuant to Section 3, Paragraph 3.4, Cooperation by Contractor, of the
General Conditions, the Contractor shall assign a competent Superintendent or
Site Supervisor to this project who shall be on the project site at all times
while work is in progress, and who shall have full authority on behalf of the
Contractor, to execute the orders or directions of the Construction Manager
without delay, and to promptly supply such materials, equipment, tools, labor
and incidentals as may be required for the performance of the work in a timely
and efficient manner.
11.
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
During construction, the installation of the play equipment will be inspected
by the M-NCPPC Construction Manager, M-NCPPC Play Equipment
Inspector, or his/her representative, at least once a week. Progress of the
operation will be noted in the work report of this project. Unexplained and /or
unnecessary delays in the progress of the work will be noted and written
notification will be issued to the Contractor. Play structures will be accepted
only upon written approval of a M-NCPPC Play Equipment Inspector.
12.
SHOP DRAWINGS
Prior to ordering play equipment, the shop drawings will be submitted to the
M-NCPPC Construction manager for approval and selection of colors. The
Construction Manager is to be provided four (4) full and complete sets of shop
P35-140 Vol2-89
drawings from the manufacturer of the play equipment. No equipment shall
be ordered prior to receiving the approval of the M-NCPPC Construction
Manager. The drawings will show the safety zones around each piece of
equipment.
13.
SAFETY
The contractor shall take all necessary and required safety precautions before
and during construction of each playground. All work must meet all safety
requirements.
14.
INSURANCE
The provisions of Contractor’s Liability Insurance and Contractor’s Fire and
Extended Coverage Insurance of the General Conditions shall be strictly
adhered to.
15.
MAINTENANCE KIT
The maintenance kit,that is supplied by the manufacturer with each structure
that is installed, shall be relinquished by the contractor to M-NCPPC as the
owner of the equipment. This kit includes owner’s manual, spare hardware,
spare parts, special tools and touch-up paint.
16.
APPLICABLE GUIDELINES
All equipment shall meet the guidelines issued by the Consumer Product
Safety Commission in their handbook for “Public Playground Safety”, ASTM,
and the Americans with Disability Act (ADA) requirements. Only new
equipment shall be accepted. Old stock will not be accepted. All equipment
shall meet the current guidelines for ASTM and the ADA requirements.
Violation of these safety zones will be cause for rejection of the work. The
footprint of the equipment ordered shall fit the footprint of the equipment as
shown on the plans.
The manufacturer’s representative for the equipment offered shall include
proof of the ASTM verification and include certification from an independent
third party (such as IPEMA) which tested for compliance with relevant ASTM
guidelines.
17.
LEAD PAINT
Lead paint shall not be used, and will not be accepted on any structure that is
painted.
18.
REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS
P35-140 Vol2-90
The Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs and replacements of any
equipment, tools and/or materials if damaged or removed from the
construction site due to any act of vandalism or negligence.
19.
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to call Miss Utility (1-800-2577777), before start of work for stake out of any underground utilities and MNCPPC Central Maintenance to determine other on-site utilities at (301) 6708009.
20.
COMPLETED WORK
The Construction Manager will deem all work 100% complete after the
Contractor has satisfactorily completed all of the punch list items.
21.
PAYMENT APPLICATIONS
All Applications for Payment must be pre-approved for quantity, item by
item, by the Inspector and Contractor, before an invoice is submitted to the
Construction Manager for payment.
Any invoice submitted to the
Construction Manager without following this procedure will be returned to the
Contractor via U.S. mail.
22.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Contractor is advised that all of the General Conditions are binding, and
therefore advised to review the General Conditions, Section D, regarding the
Commission’s policy regarding definitions and responsibilities, scope of
work, control of work, control of materials, legal relationships and
responsibilities, prosecution and performance, and payment of construction
contracts and associated work.
P35-140 Vol2-91
SECTION 741a - PLAYGROUNDS
SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR SUPPLY
1.
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications provide a general guide as to quality, design and components
necessary for the product to perform the function intended. Bidders may offer
“or approved equal” product provided they specify in the bid what
manufacturer and model is being offered. Bidders may offer substitutes
subject to the provisions stated in the General Conditions, Section 4.5, and
must submit complete descriptive literature with the bid. Any and all
substitutions must be equivalent in quality, style and end use to those
specified. Acceptability or rejection of any submitted item shall be at the sole
discretion of the M-NCPPC.
2.
PLAY EQUIPMENT
The products furnished under these specifications shall be new, the latest
product model or new (current) model year, if available. The life expectancy
of the play equipment should be approximately 15-20 years.
3.
GUARANTEE
The bidder guarantees that all products offered (or used in the supply of those
products) carry a guarantee against any and all defects for a minimum period
of one year from acceptance. The bidder must correct any and all defects in
material and/or workmanship that may appear during the guarantee period by
repairing, (or replacing with new items or new materials, if necessary) any
such defect at no cost to the Commission and to the Commission’s
satisfaction. Should a manufacturer’s warranty or guarantee exceed the
requirements stated above, the manufacturer’s guarantee or warranty will be
the primary one used in the case of defect. Copies of manufacturer’s
warranties must be provided upon request. All warranties and guarantees
must be in effect from the date of acceptance by the Commission of the goods
or services. The bidder guarantees that all work shall be accomplished in a
workmanlike manner and the bidder must observe and comply with all
Federal, State, Bounty and local laws, ordinances and regulations in
performing the services listed. Goods and materials provided under this
contract must be of first quality, latest model and current manufacture, and are
not of such age or so deteriorated as to impair their usefulness or safety. Items
that are used or demonstrator models are unacceptable.
4.
BREACH OF WARRANTY
P35-140 Vol2-92
If there is a breach of warranty, the Contractor must correct or replace any
playground equipment, supplies, or parts. Under the Commission’s Right to
Repair, the Commission can retain all playground equipment, supplies, or
parts that need repair and require the Contractor to repay an equitable part of
the equipment price.
5.
QUALIFICAITON OF BIDDERS
Bidders may be required to furnish satisfactory evidence that they are
qualified dealers or manufacturers of the item specified, or regularly engaged
in performing the services on which they are bidding and in both cases
maintain a regularly established place of business.
An authorized
representative of the Commission may visit any prospective Contractor’s
place of business to determine ability, capacity, reliability, financial stability
and other factors necessary to perform the contract.
6.
DELIVERY
The playground equipment is to be delivered to Shady Grove Maintenance
Facility, 16641 Crabbs Branch Way, Rockville, Maryland 20855, between the
hours of 8:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m., Monday through Friday (or to the storage
yard of the Commission’s designated contractor). Delivery will not be
permitted on Saturday, Sunday or Commission Holidays.
Upon delivery of the equipment, the manufacturer’s representative shall
inventory the shipment with M-NCPPC staff to ensure the full order was
shipped. Any missing parts or hardware shall be replaced at that time. Once
the order has been certified as complete, it shall be signed off and approved.
7.
DEALER STATUS
Bidders offering quotations herein, certify that they are current authorized
dealers in good status for all quoted manufacturers. Manufacturer’s written
certification of dealer status must be provided within 15 workings days if so
requested by the Commission at any time during the contract period. Should
the Contractor lose dealer status at any time during the bid or contract period
for any contracted item, that portion of the contract will automatically be
canceled.
8.
REFERENCES
All bidders must provide with their bid at least three references for similar
products or services they have provided within the last three years. Failure to
provide references with the bid may be cause for determining a bidder nonresponsive. Bidders who do not have the required experience may not be
considered for award.
P35-140 Vol2-93
9.
QUANTITY
Quantities shown on the drawings are estimate.
10.
PRICE
The contractor agrees to hold prices for a period of one-year from the date of
award. In the event that the awarded model is discontinued or replaced, the
contractor agrees to furnish the replacement model at the same price or less.
Pricing is to include all delivery.
11.
AWARD
Award will be made to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder based on
total price of each item.
12.
SAFETY STANDARDS
The manufacturer’s representative shall also include proof of ASTM
verification ad include certification from an independent party (Such as
IPEMA), which tested for compliance with relevant ASTM guidelines.
The contractor shall not substitute any material specified in the technical
provisions. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and shall be
of highest quality within the grads of material specified. The vendor shall
replace materials deemed unacceptable by the Commission.
13.
SAMPLES/MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICAITON
Manufacturer’s specifications for the offered product should be submitted
with the bid. All samples/specifications shall be exactly the items the bidder
intends to furnish if awarded a contract. The Commission shall be the sole
judge as to acceptability of samples or specifications.
14.
FAILURE TO PERFORM/DELIVER
In the event of a contractor’s failure to comply with the established supply and
delivery of play equipment schedule, the Commission reserves the right to
make an open market purchase of the required materials and /or services, and
to charge as damages, the difference between the established and the actual
cost incurred by the Commission and to collect such charges from the
contractor, from any money due under this contract, or any other contract with
the Commission. Alternatively, the Commission may assess liquidated
damages at the rate of 1% per day of the cost of such item or services for each
day of delay beyond the established delivery day.
P35-140 Vol2-94
15.
APPROVED PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
The following manufacturers have been approved as suppliers for the
equipment specified in this bid package. Equipment from manufacturers not
listed below will need to be reviewed and approved by the Commission prior
to bid opening (Section 8, “Equal Products, Materials and Equipment, of
Invitation to Bidders”).
1.
KOMPAN INC.
Approved for all equipment.
2.
LANDSCAPE STRUCTURES
Approved for all equipment.
7.
GORIC
Approved for all equipment
P35-140 Vol2-95
SECTION 742 – NOTES TO BIDDERS
1.
Certificates of Insurance shall be required from both the manufacturer and the
vendor.
2.
An authorized contractor will be installing the equipment. It is necessary that
the manufacturer’s representative be available during the installation. The
vendors shall be required to be available on a 24 hour notice with no limit to
the number of times they must be available.
3.
The project Coordinator is to be provided 4 sets of a full and complete set of
shop drawings (installation instructions with plan views and dimensions of
structures) prior to beginning of construction.
P35-140 Vol2-96
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,
concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
A.
1.4
Footings.
Retaining walls.
Slabs-on-grade.
Curbs
Walkways
Division 03 Section 034500 Precast Architectural Concrete
Division 03 Section 321600 Resin Bonded Aggregate Paving
Division 03 Section 066000 - Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Products and
Fabrications
Section 740 – Technical Provisions -For Playground and Playground Equipment.
DEFINITIONS
Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of
the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground
granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with
requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when
characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant adjustments.
1.
Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.
P35-140 Vol2-97
C.
Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending,
and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup
spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical
connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.
D.
Samples: For water stops.
E.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturers
F.
Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating
compliance with requirements:
1.
G.
Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
1.5
Aggregates Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious
expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.
Cementitious materials.
Admixtures.
Form materials and form-release agents.
Steel reinforcement and accessories.
Water stops.
Curing compounds.
Joint-filler strips.
Field quality-control test and inspection reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified
as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACIcertified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications:
A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
1.
C.
Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed
Concrete Production Facilities."
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to
ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to
ASTM E 548.
1.
Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent certification
program.
P35-140 Vol2-98
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and
obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.
E.
ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1.
2.
F.
1.6
ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Steel Reinforcement:
bending and damage.
Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent
B.
Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil,
and other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
FORM-FACING MATERIALS
Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,
true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
1.
Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.
a.
Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and
edge sealed.
B.
Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C.
Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt
irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with
sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
P35-140 Vol2-99
D.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
1.
E.
Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced
plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to
prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1.
2.
2.3
Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the
plane of exposed concrete surface.
Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in
diameter in concrete surface.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B.
Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets.
2.4
REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut
bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B.
Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,
and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture
bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual
of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:
1.
2.5
A.
For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact
forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainlesssteel bar supports.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type,
brand, and source, throughout Project:
1.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I
a.
b.
2.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C orF.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag
P35-140 Vol2-100
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate or better,
graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record
data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service
conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1.
2.
C.
2.6
Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
ADMIXTURES
A.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
B.
Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding
those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures
containing calcium chloride.
1.
2.7
A.
B.
2.8
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
WATERSTOPS
Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, with factory-installed metal eyelets, for
embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate
corners, intersections, and directional changes.
1.
Manufacturers:
2.
3.
a.
Greenstreak.
b.
Progress Unlimited, Inc.
c.
Williams Products, Inc.
d.
or approved equal.
Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb
Dimensions: 6 inches by 3/8 inch thick (150 mm by 10 mm thick)
Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to
5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
polyethylene sheet.
C.
Water: Potable.
ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-
P35-140 Vol2-101
D.
Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound:
Class B, dissipating.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.9
A.
2.10
A.
Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic
fiber.
CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
2.11
A.
Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.
Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other
than portland cement in concrete as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.
Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior
Company; W.B. Resin Cure.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear.
or approved equal
RELATED MATERIALS
1.
B.
ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Fly Ash: 25 percent.
Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent.
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50
percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25
percent.
Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by
temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
high
CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
Retaining Wall, Slabs on Grade andFootings:
mixture as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Proportion normal-weight concrete
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days.
Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.
Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
Air Content: 4-1/2percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2inch (38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.
P35-140 Vol2-102
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
CONCRETE MIXING
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce
mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is
above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
A.
Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be
applied, until structure can support such loads.
B.
Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C.
Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as
follows:
1.
Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
D.
Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1
vertical.
1.
2.
Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
F.
Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units
to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G.
Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and
securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in
forms at inconspicuous locations.
P35-140 Vol2-103
H.
Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.
sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
I.
Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
J.
Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's
written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2
Remove chips, wood,
REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A.
General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work
that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at
not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is
hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection
operations are maintained.
B.
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed,
delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
C.
When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed
concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.3
A.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
1.
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
B.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials
that would reduce bond to concrete.
C.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate
and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do
not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.
D.
Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
E.
Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced
to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh
spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either
direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
P35-140 Vol2-104
3.4
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired,
at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1.
2.
Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
Space vertical joints in walls as indicated.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth as
shown on plans and details.
D.
Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
3.5
A.
3.6
Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
WATERSTOPS
Flexible Water stops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect
exposed water stops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in water stops
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement
unless approved by Architect.
C.
Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams
or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide
construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1.
2.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design
pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
P35-140 Vol2-105
3.
D.
Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
E.
2.
3.
2.
A.
When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4
deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture
temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place
concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture
designs.
Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:
1.
3.7
Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and opentextured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do
not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete
work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing
actions, or low temperatures.
1.
F.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer
and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit
duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture
constituents to segregate.
Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement.
Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature,
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with
tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that
exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view
P35-140 Vol2-106
B.
3.8
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1.
Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view
2.
Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that
created by the rubbing process.
SLABS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,
and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill
low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
C.
Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until
surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth
any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
3.9
WALKWAYS
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,
and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Surface Finish - Medium Broom Finish
3.9
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for
hot-weather protection during curing.
B.
Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if
hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1
kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations.
Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying
concrete, but before float finishing.
C.
Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,
P35-140 Vol2-107
moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period,
continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
D.
Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E.
Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods:
1.
2.
3.
3.10
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days
with the following materials:
a.
Water.
b.
Continuous water-fog spray.
c.
Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover
concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent
absorptive covers.
Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moistureretaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides
and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or
tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.
Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A.
Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
B.
Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement
to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only
enough water for handling and placing.
1.
2.
3.
Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than
1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent.
Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill formtie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match
surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture
and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and
strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and
structural performance as determined by Architect.
P35-140 Vol2-108
3.11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform
tests and inspections and to submit reports.
B.
Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1.
Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd.
(76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressivestrength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at
least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five
are used.
Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ne test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each
concrete mixture.
Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air
temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C)
and above, and one test for each composite sample.
Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratorycured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.
Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any
three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified
compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).
Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests
shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete
placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete
batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture
proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for
both 7- and 28-day tests.
Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not
comply with the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION 033000
P35-140 Vol2-109
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 General Requirements, apply to the work of this section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
B.
The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to:
1. Architectural precast concrete seat walls
2. Connections, including anchorage devices
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength
and water-absorption tests.
C.
Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete
units. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of
each unit. Indicate joints, reveals, and extent and location of each surface finish.
Indicate details at building corners.
D.
Samples: For each type of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural
precast concrete units, in sets of 3, illustrating full range of finish, color, and texture
variations expected; approximately 12 by 12 by 2 inches (300 by 300 by 50 mm).
E.
Material test reports: For aggregates.
F.
Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers:
1.4
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fabricator Qualifications:
A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering
architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This
responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis for all anticipated loads by a qualified professional engineer. Shop Drawings
shall be sealed by a licensed engineer.
P35-140 Vol2-110
1.
Participates in PCI's plant certification programat time of bidding and is
designated a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural
Cladding and Load Bearing Units or participates in APA's "Plant Certification
Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" and is
designated an APA-certified plant.
B.
Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and design recommendations of
PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable
to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.
C.
Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements,
quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units
required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and
Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."
D.
Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast
concrete units, produce a minimum of [2] sample pieces full sized for review by
Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features, finishes, textures, and
transitions in sample units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
A.
REINFORCING MATERIALS
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I or Type III
1.
For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, mix gray with white cement, of
same type, brand, and mill source.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33, with
coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates for
each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
C.
Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments or
colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
D.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible
with other required admixtures.
E.
Chemical Admixtures:
Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions
or other salts by weight of admixture.
P35-140 Vol2-111
2.3
STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A.
Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Stainless Steel Shapes and Pins: ASTM A 304
2.4
A.
2.5
GROUT MATERIALS
Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M,
of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
B.
Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by
qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
C.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement
permitted by ACI 318 (ACI 318M) or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to
ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D.
Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch
or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project,
to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1.
Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) minimum.
2.
Slump: 3in minimum to 5in maximum
E.
Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to
PCI MNL 117.
F.
When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
General: Design and fabricate precast concrete units to comply with manufacturing and
testing procedures, quality control recommendations and dimensional tolerances of
PCI MNL-117, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating,
placing, and supporting reinforcement.
C.
Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and
erection stresses.
P35-140 Vol2-112
D.
Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent seams or planes of weakness from
forming in precast concrete units.
1.
E.
Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without
dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines,
honeycombing, or entrapped air on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures
complying with PCI MNL 117.
1.
Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6,
"Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants."
F.
Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
G.
Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure
with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings.
Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit
on a surface that will not show in finished structure.
H.
Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention
without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant
heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that
stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.
I.
Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with
requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless
repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.
2.7
A.
2.8
FABRICATION TOLERANCES
Fabricate architectural precast concrete units straight and true to size and shape with
exposed edges and corners precise and true so each finished panel complies with
PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well as position tolerances for cast-in items.
APPEARANCE AND FINISHES
A.
Panel faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners,
including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face
surfaces of architectural precast concrete units as follows: Light to Medium Sand Blast
Finish
B.
Finish exposed surfaces: Light to Medium Sandblast finish.
C.
Finish unexposed surfaces: Float finish.
D.
Color: White to Light Grey
P35-140 Vol2-113
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting
architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B.
Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable
tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position,
stability, and alignment as units are being permanently connected.
1.
2.
Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide for uniform joint widths of 1/8” between units
C.
Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or
as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and
spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
D.
Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in
place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping
until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with
adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after
initial set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects
finishes or hardens.
3.2
REPAIRS
A.
Repair damaged architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The
Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with
requirements.
B.
Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation
between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a
distance of 20 feet (6 m).
C.
Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not
comply with requirements.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
B.
Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from
concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
C.
Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint
treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
P35-140 Vol2-114
1.
2.
Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete
fabricator's recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with
detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean
water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.
Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of
exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 034500
P35-140 Vol2-115
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Self-Weathering Steel Plate.
B.
See Division 03 Section 034500 "Precast Architectural Concrete" for precast concrete
seat walls.
C.
See Division 05 Section 055213 "Metal Handrails and Guardrails" for metal handrails
and guardrails.
D.
See Division 06 Section 061500 "Wood Decking" for wood decking.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications
and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B.
Templates: For anchors and bolts.
C.
Samples: For each type and finish of Self Weathering Steel Fascia and Stainless –
Bench Back Supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General:
blemishes.
B.
Ferrous Metals:
1.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A588 steel.
2.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A606, Type 4.
C.
Steel Fascia: ASTM 325-SC Type 3 sizes as noted on plans.
2.2
A.
Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without
FABRICATION
General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
P35-140 Vol2-116
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base
metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux
immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a
manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip
with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications
after assembly.
B.
Self-Weathering Steel Finishes:
1.
Fascia – Medium Sand Blast Finish
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
INSTALLATION
General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications.
Set metal fabrications accurately in location, with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and
true.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together. Weld connections that are not to
be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade
surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required
to be fastened to in-place construction.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built
into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling
nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts
and pack solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.
END OF SECTION 055000
P35-140 Vol2-117
SECTION 055213 – METAL HANDRAILS AND GAURDRAILS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Stainless-steel tube handrails.
2.
Stainless-steel tube guardrails.
3.
Stainless-steel planter guards.
4.
Painted steel guardrail posts.
5.
Painted steel trellis posts, frame and shapes
6.
Stainless steel shapes and bolts.
7.
Stainless steel mesh netting, wire and rope fittings.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-In-Concrete" for foundations associated with
Handrails and Guardrails.
Division 06 Section 061500 “Wood Decking” for anchoring systems associated
with guardrails.
Division 06 Section 066000 "Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Products and
Fabrications”.
Division 09 Section 099653 “High Performance Paint Coatings”
REFERENCES
A.
General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority,
form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are
identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or
other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard
designation.
B.
American Society for Testing and Material (ASTM International)
1. ASTM A380 - Practice for Cleaning and Descaling Stainless Steel Parts,
Equipment and Systems.
2. ASTM A492 - Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire.
3. ASTM A554 – Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.
P35-140 Vol2-118
4. ASTM A554 – Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing
5. ASTM A555 - Stainless Steel Wire.
6. ASTM E985 – Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Stairs for Buildings
7. ASTM F1145 - Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged.
C.
1.4
A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
2.
B.
Military Specification (MIL)
1. MIL-C5688 - Pre-Stretching and Proof-Testing of Wire Rope Assemblies.
2. MIL-W-83420 - Wire Rope, Flexible for Aircraft Control
Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
a.
C.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN)] applied horizontally on an area of 1
sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m).
Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat
loss.
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100
deg C), material surfaces.
P35-140 Vol2-119
D.
1.5
A.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1.
C.
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer licensed
in the State of Maryland responsible for their preparation.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.
2.
3.
Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top
rails, posts, and balusters.
Fittings and brackets.
Assembled Sample of railing system, made from full-size components, including
top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Sample need not be full height.
a.
Show method of finishing and connecting members at intersections.
D.
Welding certificates.
E.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
F.
Closeout Submittals: Submit the Following:
1. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty documents
2. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer’s standard cleaning and maintenance
instructions to avoid detrimental actions to finishes and performance
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Qualifications:
Installer Qualifications: Installer should be experienced in performing work of this
section and should have specialized in installation of work similar to that required for
this project.
C.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code--Stainless Steel."
P35-140 Vol2-120
1.7
A.
1.8
A.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
1.
Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates,
and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid
construction delays.
B.
Delivery: Deliver in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers,
identification labels intact.
C.
Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather
conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
Store cartons and panels in a secure location in a dry place at the project site.
1.10
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard
warranty document executed by authorized company official.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
1.
Stainless-Steel Wire Rope and Fittings:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. Carl Stahl DecorCable, Inc. as basis of design.
660 West Randolph Street
Chicago, IL 60661
PH: 312-474-1100
Fax: 312-474-1789
P35-140 Vol2-121
b. Jakob AG.
955 NW 17th Avenue, Suite B
Delray Beach, FL 33445
PH: 561-330-6502
Fax: 561-330-6508
c. or approved equal.
2.2
GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and
finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304 -Schedule 40.
B.
Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
C.
Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D.
Stainless Steel Flexible Mesh Guardrail Infill:
1. Material: A492 Type 316 stainless steel 7x7 (or 7x19) wire rope joined with 316
stainless steel ferrules
2. Cable Diameter x Mesh Aperture Dimensions: 1.5mm x 60mm
3. Mesh Perimeter Finishes:
a) Closed loops with loose ferrules for “sewn-on” installation method.
b) Closed loops without loose ferrules for “pass through” installation
method.
4.
Direction (Grain) of Mesh: Horizontal Mesh Direction for Rectangular Frame
Shapes.
5.
Ferrule Style: Seamless AISI 316L Stainless Steel Ferrule
2.4
A.
2.5
STEEL
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide the following:
1.
Stainless-Steel: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:
P35-140 Vol2-122
1.
2.
C.
2.6
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for
attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
Anchors: Provide chemical anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal
alloy welded.
B.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 Section "HighPerformance Coatings."
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less
than that required to support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm), unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp
or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar
items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded] connections, unless
otherwise indicated.
H.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
P35-140 Vol2-123
2.
3.
4.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
I.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of
radius indicated.
2.
By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.
J.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of components.
K.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
L.
Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed
by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
2.8
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
2.9
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish.
B.
Non-Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
C.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.10
A.
STEEL FINISHES
Painted Steel Fininshes: See Section 099653 High Performance Paint Coatings
P35-140 Vol2-124
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by
mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from
parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch
in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).
C.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place
construction.
3.2
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to
railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using
plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B.
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication"
Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
C.
Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart
than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve
extending 2 inches (50 mm) beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely
to 1 side.
3.3
ANCHORING POSTS
A.
Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
epoxy grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's
written instructions.
B.
Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm)
larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material,
P35-140 Vol2-125
insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with epoxy grout, mixed
and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap and rinsing with
clean water.
B.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
3.5
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings
at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 055213
P35-140 Vol2-126
SECTION 061500 - WOOD DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
A.
1.4
Solid-sawn floor decking.
Division 06 Section "Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Products and Fabrications"
for deck structural framing.
SCOPE OF WORK
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install the wood
decking products as specified herein.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product and process indicated and incorporated into
items of exterior architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation.
1.
Wood Decking
2.
Decking Fasteners
3.
Sealants
B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
Show details full size.
Show locations and sizes of blocking and nailers, including concealed blocking
and reinforcement specified in other sections.
Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.
C.
Samples for Verification:
1.
Lumber, not less than 50 sq. in. for each species.
D.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.
P35-140 Vol2-127
E.
1.5
A.
Provide Mock-up of connections for Architect’s approval.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of exterior architectural woodwork indicated
for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1.
Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that
woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
B.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation of exterior woodwork only when existing
and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be performed and at least one coat
of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.
C.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
2.
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork
by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork
without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
established dimensions.
D.
Forest Certification: Provide wood decking produced from wood obtained from forests
certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles
and Criteria.
E.
Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who customfabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
1.6
A.
1.7
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that exterior architectural woodwork
can be supported and installed as indicated.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid
delaying the Work.
P35-140 Vol2-128
B.
Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary
coverings. Stack wood decking with surfaces that are to be exposed in the final work
protected from exposure to sunlight.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LUMBER, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard," and with
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
B.
Grade Stamps: Provide solid-sawn wood decking with each piece factory marked with
grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule
requirements and identifying grading agency, species, grade, moisture content at time
of surfacing, and mill. Apply grade stamp to surfaces that will not be exposed to view.
2.1
A.
B.
WOOD DECKING
Grade: FAS1 grade or Green Dex – #1 Grade
Or approved equal
Wood Species: Black Locust (Robinia Pseudoacacia)
1.
Do not use plain-sawn lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3 inches
wide.
2.
Lumber shall be in sound condition, free from worm holes, knots, longitudinal
heart cracks, firm or soft sap wood, fungus, and deformation (twisting or cupping)
which cannot be removed during installation using normal installation methods
and tools. Natural drying checks, to a maximum of 1/8” in width, will be
acceptable.
3.
Dimensional tolerances (measured at 19% moisture content) shall be plus or
minus .08” in both width and thickness.
4.
Hardwood slats shall meet or exceed the mechanical properties as defined by
U.S. Forest Product Laboratories testing methods 50 millimeters (2” standard) as
follows: Bending Strength: 153 Mpa (22,200 psi); Modulus of elasticity: 16 Mpa
2,370,000 psi.
5.
Edges: Radius edge all sides
C.
Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners,
sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural
woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
D.
National Hardwood Lumber Association (NHLA) grading rules shall apply. Retain one
of two options in paragraph below. 15 percent is usually specified for laminated
P35-140 Vol2-129
decking and Select grade solid-sawn decking and is required by AITC 112 for 2-inch
nominal (38-mm actual) solid-sawn decking.
E.
Manufacturers:
Black Locust Lumber, USA
MCIDC Plaza 6395 S.R. 103
North Lewiston, PA 17044
PH: 888.501.0678
www.blacklocustlumber.com
Or
General Woodcraft, Inc/ Mataverde Premium Hardwoods
531 Broad Street
New London, CT 06320
PH: 860.444.7524
Or Approved Equal
2.2
FASTENERS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Solid-Sawn Decking: Provide fastener size and type complying with
decking standard for thickness of deck used. Install fasteners as shown on drawings
and as per manufacturers instructions.
B.
Fastener Material: EB-TY: Hidden Deck Fastening System
Manufactuer: EB-TY Hidden Deck Fastening System
P.O. Box 5389
North Branch, NJ 08876
PH: 1-877-852-6457
Or approved equal
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Shop Fabrication: Where preservative-treated decking is indicated, complete cutting,
trimming, surfacing, and sanding before treating.
B.
Fabricate decking in lengths for controlled random lay-up.
C.
Predrill decking for lateral spiking to adjacent units to comply with referenced decking
standard.
D.
Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing decking, apply a saturation coat of
penetrating sealer.
1.
Sawn Edges – Seal all sawn edges with a use paraffin wax sealer as per
manufacturer’s instructions
P35-140 Vol2-130
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas.
B.
Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in
advance of time substrates are to be built.
C.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion
and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with same grade specified in Part 2 for
type of woodwork involved.
B.
Install woodwork true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed
shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair
damaged finish at cuts.
D.
Preservative-Treated Wood: Where cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends and drilled
holes according to AWPA M4.
E.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk concealed fasteners and
blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush
with woodwork.
F.
Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum
length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36
inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running
joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
G.
3.3
A.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than
1/8 inch in 96 inches.
Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or
before installation of woodwork. Fill nail and screw holes with matching filler where
exposed.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and
visual defects; replace woodwork where not possible to repair. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
P35-140 Vol2-131
B.
3.4
A.
3.5
A.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
ADJUSTING
Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged
decking if repairs are not approved by Architect.
PROTECTION
Provide temporary waterproof covering to protect exposed decking before applying
sealant.
END OF SECTION 061500
P35-140 Vol2-132
SECTION 066000 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
POLYMER PRODUCTS AND FABRICATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY:
A.
This section includes the following Fiberglass Reinforced Polymer Products (FRP) &
Fabrications:
1.
FRP Structural Shapes and Plate
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 03 Section “Cast-in Place Concrete”
2.
Division 06 Section “Wood Decking”
SCOPE OF WORK:
A.
1.04
1.05
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to work of this section.
Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to install the fiberglass
reinforced polymer (FRP) products as specified herein.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
The material covered by these specifications shall be furnished manufacturer of proven
ability who has regularly engaged in the manufacture and installation of FRP systems.
B.
Substitution of any component or modification of system shall be made only when approved
by the M-NPPC Construction Manager or Engineer.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing FRP fabrications
similar to that indicated for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without causing delay in the work.
D.
In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer’s instructions
and recommendations for work.
DESIGN CRITERIA:
A.
The design of FRP products including connections shall be in accordance with governing
building codes and standards as applicable.
B.
Structural members shall be designed to support all applied dead plus live loads. Deflection
in any direction shall not be more than L/240 of span for structural members. Connections
shall be designed to transfer the loads.
P35-140 Vol2-133
1.06
SUBMITTALS:
A.
B.
1.07
Shop drawings of all fabricated pultruded gratings, structural shapes and plate, gratings and
appurtenances shall be submitted to the M-NPPC Construction Manager for approval.
Fabrication shall not start until receipt of M-NPPC Construction Manager’s approval.
Manufacturer’s catalog data showing:
1.
Dimensions, spacings, and construction of grating
2.
Materials of construction
C.
Detail shop drawings showing:
1.
Dimensions
2.
Sectional assembly
3.
Location and identification mark
4.
Size and type of supporting frames required
C.
Samples of each type of product shall be submitted for approval prior to placement of
purchase orders.
SHIPPING AND STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS:
A.
All systems, sub-systems and structures shall be shop fabricated and assembled into the
largest practical size suitable for transporting.
B.
All materials and equipment necessary for the fabrication and installation of pultruded
gratings, structural shapes and plate shall be stored before, during, and after shipment in a
manner to prevent cracking, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping or damage of any kind to
the materials or equipment, including damage due to over exposure to the sun. Any material
which, in the opinion of the M-NPPC Construction Manager, has become damaged as to be
unfit for use, shall be promptly removed from the site of work, and the Contractor shall
receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal.
C.
Identify and match-mark all materials, items and fabrications for installation and field
assembly.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
GENERAL:
A.
Materials used in the manufacture of the FRP products shall be raw materials in
conformance with the specification.
B.
All materials shall be of the kind and quality specified.
C.
With the exception of molded gratings, all FRP products noted in 1.02 shall be manufactured
using a pultruded process utilizing polyester resin with flame retardant and ultraviolet (UV)
inhibitor additives. A synthetic surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior
surface. The flame retardant FRP shapes shall achieve a flame spread rating of 25 or less in
accordance with ASTM test method E-84. (Polyester resin is available without flame
retardant and UV inhibitor additives.)
P35-140 Vol2-134
D.
If required, after fabrication, all cut ends, holes and abrasions of FRP shapes shall be sealed
with a compatible resin coating.
E.
FRP products exposed to weather shall contain an ultraviolet inhibitor. Should additional
ultraviolet protection be required, a one mil minimum UV coating can be applied.
F.
All exposed surfaces shall be smooth and true to form.
G.
Manufacturers:
1.
Structural Shapes and Plates –
Structural shapes and plate: EXTREN 625
Manufacturer: Strongwell Inc.
400 Commonwealth Ave.
Bristol, Virginia 24201
Phone: 276.645.8000
Main Fax: 276.645.8132
Sales Department Fax: 276.645.8172
or approved equal
2.02
STRUCTURAL SHAPES AND PLATE:
A.
Material
1.
B.
Structural shapes and plate shall be made from isophthalic polyester resin with fire
retardant additives to meet a flame spread rating of less than 25 per ASTM E-84 and
meet the self-extinguishing requirements of ASTM D-635. All structural shapes shall
contain a UV inhibitor.
Process
1.
Manufactured by the pultrusion process.
2.
Structural FRP members’ composition shall consist of a glass fiber reinforced
polyester or vinyl ester resin matrix, approximately 50% glass by weight. A synthetic
surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior surfaces. Glass strand
rovings shall be used internally for longitudinal strength. Continuous strand glass
mats or stitched reinforcements shall be used internally for transverse strength
P35-140 Vol2-135
3.
Mechanical properties shall meet or exceed the values listed in Table 1.
Table 1 – Fiberglass Pultruded Material Properties
Minimum Ultimate Coupon Properties (UN)
SERI SERI
ES
ES
SERIES 500/525 PLATE⊗
SERIES 625 PLATE⊗
500/5
3/16” TEST
25
625
1/8"
1/4"
3/8"-1"
1/8" 3/16"-1/4" 3/8"-1"
METH UNITS/ SHAP SHAP 3.175 4.76-6.35 9.5-25.4 3.175 4.76-6.35 9.5-25.4
OD VALUE ES
ES
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
ASTM
PROPERTIES
MECHANICAL
Tensile Stress, LW
D638
Tensile Stress, CW
D638
Tensile Modulus, LW
D638
Tensile Modulus, CW
D638
Compressive Stress,
LWℵ
D695
Compressive Stress, CW D695
Compressive Modulus,
LW
Compressive Modulus,
CW
D695
D695
30,00 30,00
psi
0
0
20,000
N/mm2 207
207
138
psi
7,000 7,000 7,500
N/mm2 48.3 48.3
51.7
106 psi 2.5
2.6
1.8
103N/m
m2
17.2 17.9
12.4
106 psi
.8
.8
.7
103N/m
m2
5.52 5.52
4.83
30,00 30,00
psi
0
0
24,000
N/mm2 207
207
165
15,00 16,00
psi
0
0
15,500
N/mm2 103
110
107
106 psi
103N/m
m2
106 psi
103N/m
m2
20,000
138
10,000
68.9
1.8
20,000
138
10,000
68.9
1.8
20,000
138
7,500
51.7
1.8
20,000
138
10,000
68.9
1.8
20,000
138
10,000
68.9
1.8
12.4
.9
12.4
1.4
12.4
1
12.4
1
12.4
1.4
6.21
9.65
6.89
6.89
9.65
24,000
165
24,000
165
24,000
165
24,000
165
24,000
165
16,500
114
20,000
138
16,500
114
17,500
121
17,500
121
2.5
2.6
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
17.2
17.9
12.4
12.4
12.4
12.4
12.4
12.4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6.89
6.89
6.89
6.89
6.89
35,000
241
30,000
207
35,000
241
35,000
241
30,000
207
15,000
103
2
18,000
124
2
13,000
89.6
1.8
15,000
103
2
18,000
124
2
13.8
1.1
13.8
1.4
12.4
1
13.8
1.1
13.8
1.4
7.58
9.65
6.89
7.58
9.65
6.89 6.89
6.89
30,00 30,00
Flexural Stress, LWℑ
D790
psi
0
0
35,000
N/mm2 207
207
241
10,00 10,00
Flexural Stress, CW
D790
psi
0
0
13,000
N/mm2 68.9 68.9
89.6
Flexural Modulus, LW∪
D790 106 psi 1.6
1.6
1.8
103N/m
m2
11.0 11.0
12.4
6
Flexural Modulus, CW
D790 10 psi 0.8
0.8
0.9
103N/m
m2
5.52 5.52
6.21
Modulus of Elasticityℜ
full
106 psi 2.6
2.8
103N/m
section
m2
17.9 19.3
Modulus of Elasticity >4” full
106 psi 2.5
2.5
P35-140 Vol2-136
ℜ
>102
mm
Parallel Compressive
Shear
Stress, LW℘∪
Shear Modulus, LW⊗∪
Short Beam Shear,
LW∩∪
103N/m
section
m2
17.2
D3846
3,000 3,000
psi
2
—
N/mm
106 psi
103N/m
m2
17.2
20.7
.425
20.7
.425
2.93
2.93
D2344
psi
4,500 4,500
N/mm2 31.0 31.0
Ultimate Bearing Stress,
30,00 30,00
LW
D953
psi
0
0
32,000
2
N/mm
207
207 220.6
Poisson's Ratio, LW∪
D3039 in/in
.33
.33
.31
mm/mm .330 .330
.310
Notched Izod Impact,
LW
D256 ft-lbs/in 25
25
15
J/mm 1.33 1.33
.988
Notched Izod Impact,
CW
D256 ft-lbs/in
4
4
5
J/mm .214 .214
.267
32,000
221
.31
.310
32,000
221
.31
.310
32,000
221
.32
.320
32,000
221
.32
.320
32,000
221
.32
.320
10
1.07
10
1.07
15
.988
10
1.07
10
1.07
5
.267
5
.267
5
.267
5
.267
5
.267
P35-140 Vol2-137
Table 1 – Fiberglass Pultruded Material Properties
Minimum Ultimate Coupon Properties (UN) – cont’d
SERIE SERIE
ASTM
S
S
SERIES 500/525 PLATE⊗
SERIES 625 PLATE⊗
TEST UNITS/ 500/52 625
1/8" 3/16 -1/4" 3/8"-1"
1/8" 3/16"-1/4" 3/8"-1"
METH VALUE
5
SHAP 3.175 4.76–6.35 9.5-25.4 3.175 4.76-6.35 9.5-25.4
OD
SHAP
ES
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
mm
ES
PROPERTIES
PHYSICAL
Barcol Hardness⊕
D2583
—
45℘
45℘
40
40
40
40
40
40
24 HR Water
Absorption∅
D570
% Max
by wt
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
.6
Density
D792
lbs/in3
103
g/mm3
105
in/in/oF
106
in/in/oC
.062.070
1.721.94
.062.070
1.721.94
.060.068
1.661.88
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
Coefficient of
Thermal
Expansion, LW∪
Thermal
Conductivity∪
ELECTRICAL
Arc Resistance,
LW∪
Dielectric Strength,
LW∪
Dielectric Strength,
PF
FLAMMABILITY ⊕
Flammability
Classification (1/16")
Tunnel Test
NBS Smoke
Chamber
Flammability
UL Thermal Index
British Fire Test
D696
C177
.060.060-.068 .060-.068 .068
1.661.66-1.88 1.66-1.88 1.88
.060-.068 .060-.068
1.66-1.88 1.66-1.88
BTU-in/
ft2/hr/oF
W (m *
ºK)
4
4
.58
.58
D495
seconds
120
120
D149
KV/in
KV/mm
35
1.38
35
1.38
35
1.38
35
1.38
35
1.38
35
1.38
35
1.38
35
1.38
D149
volts/mil
200
200
200
N.T.
N.T.
250
N.T.
N.T.
UL94
VO
E-84
25 Max
650-700
E-662
(typical)
Self
D635 Extinguis
hing
Generi
130oC
c
BS
Class 1
476-7
P35-140 Vol2-138
PART 3 – EXECUTION
1.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
PREPARATION:
A.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and
directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
B.
Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect sleeves from
infiltration of water and debris.
INSPECTION AND TESTING:
A.
The Engineer shall have the right to inspect and test all materials to be furnished under these
specifications prior to their shipment from the point of manufacture.
B.
All labor, power, materials, equipment and appurtenances required for testing shall be
furnished by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
A.
Fastening to in-place construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing miscellaneous FRP fabrications to in-place construction; include
threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts
and other connectors as determined by the Engineer.
B.
Cutting, fitting and placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of
miscellaneous FRP fabrications. Set FRP fabrication accurately in location, alignment and
elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true and free of rack; measured from
established lines and levels.
C.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in form work for items that are to be built into concrete
masonry or similar construction.
ALL FRP INSTALLATION:
A.
If required, all field cut and drilled edges, holes and abrasions shall be sealed with a
catalyzed resin compatible with the original resin as recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Install items specified as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
End of Section 06600
P35-140 Vol2-139
SECTION 099653-HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINT COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
SECTION INCLUDES
Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to
complete shop finished high performance paint coatings, as indicated on the drawings
and/or specified herein.
RELATED SECTIONS
Division 05 Section 055213 "Metal Handrails and Guardrails” for metal post and
shapes to receive High performance Paint Coatings.
APPLICABLE CODES, STA NDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Zinc rich primers shall comply with Steel Structures Painting Manual issued by the
SSPC, Paint type 20. Inorganic zinc silicates are acceptable alternatives to zinc rich
epoxies
B.
All materials are to comply with local, state and Federal limits on the Volatile Organic
Content (VOC) limits and other Environmental legislation.
1.5
DEFINITIONS
A.
Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
B.
Gloss ranges used in this Section include the following:
1.
Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65
when measured at a 60-degree meter.
2.
High gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when
measured at a 60-degree meter.
1.6
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each coating system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1.
Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each
material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application.
P35-140 Vol2-140
2.
Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each material
specified.
B.
Certification by manufacturer that products supplied comply with requirements
indicated that limit the amount of VOCs in coating products.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to
simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1.
Provide stepped Samples defining each separate coat, including block fillers and
primers.
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
2.
List of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sample
for location and application.
3.
Submit samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and
texture:
a.
Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4” square samples of flat metal and two 8” long
samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and
other information specified.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed highperformance coating system applications similar in material and extent to those
indicated for Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service
performance.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each coating system
from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1.
A single manufacturer shall be used for all surfaces to receive coating system.
1.8
A.
1.9
A.
WARRANTY
Manufacturer shall supply a ten (10) material warranty.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.
Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove
oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and
P35-140 Vol2-141
work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and applying coatings.
1.10
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
All coatings shall be shop applied, field painting will not be permitted; except for touchup painting.
B.
Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 40 and 95 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
indicated in the coating system descriptions.
B.
Manufacturers' Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the coating
system descriptions by shortened versions of their names shown in parenthesis:
1.
Carboline (CB).
2.
Dupont.
3.
Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
2.2
COATINGS MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality:
Provide manufacturer's highest grade of the various highperformance coatings specified. Materials not displaying manufacturer's product
identification are not acceptable.
1.
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to
designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are
required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other
manufacturers.
Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of
performance for proposed substitutions.
C.
VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including primers,
undercoats, and finish-coat materials, that have a VOC classification of 450 g/L or less.
D.
Colors: Architect shall select color from manufacture’s standard color range.
P35-140 Vol2-142
2.3
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SYSTEMS
A.
Paint
1.
Exterior Exposed Steel Posts and Shapes: Exterior (exposed to the elements)
steel members such as exposed exterior, support members and other items in
addition to members as noted on drawings shall receive the following shop
applied (except as noted) coating systems:
a.
Primer: (Shop Applied) Zinc rich primer in an organic resin, one of the
following:
1)
“Carbozinc 859” (Carboline Co.); 2.5 to 4.0 mils minimum d.f.t.
2)
“Tnemec 90-97 Tnemec-Zinc” (Tnemec Co.); 2.0 to 3.0 mils minimum
d.f.t.
3)
“DuPont 825HP” (DuPont); 3.0 to 5.0 mils d.f.t.
Or approved equal
b.
Intermediate Coat: (Shop Applied) Compatible with, and of the same
manufacturer as the primer. High build, high solids, epoxy mastic, one of
the following:
1)
“Carbogauard 888 or 893 Series” (Carboline Co.); 3.0 to 5.0 mils d.f.t.
2)
“Tnemec N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II” (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 4.0 to 6.0 mils
d.f.t.
3)
“DuPont 25P (DuPont) 3.0 to 5.0 mils d.f.t.
Or approved equal
c.
Finish Coat: (Shop Applied) Compatible with, and of the same
manufacturer as, the primer and the intermediate coat. High build, aliphatic
polyurethane, satin finish, one of the following:
1)
“Carbothane 133 HB” (Carboline Co.); 3.0 to 5.0 mils d.f.t.
2)
“Series 175 Endura Shield III (Tnemec Co. Inc.); 3.0 to 5.0 mils d.f.t.
3)
“Imron 333” (DuPont); 3.0 to 5.0 mils d.f.t.
Or approved equal
B.
Contractor shall prepare all epoxy surfaces that have exceeded manufacturer coat
time, including any evidence of chalking.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
With Applicator present, examine substrates and conditions under which highperformance coatings will be applied, for compliance with coating application
requirements.
1.
Apply coatings only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces to receive coatings are thoroughly dry.
2.
Start of application is construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces within
that particular area.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings are
provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request,
furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible
primers.
P35-140 Vol2-143
1.
2.
3.2
If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the
following from the primer Applicator before proceeding:
a.
Confirmation of primer's suitability for expected service conditions.
b.
Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified.
Notify Architect about anticipated problems before using the coatings specified
over substrates primed by others.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that
are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight
of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1.
After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying high-performance coatings, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to
manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove primers and reprime
substrate.
2.
Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Clean ferrous-metal surfaces. Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC recommendations.
a.
Clean steel surfaces as recommended by coating manufacturer and
according to SSPC-SP 1, 2 and 3 (At high finish areas prepare in
accordance with SSPC SP-10).
b.
Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been
damaged. Wire brush, solvent clean, and touch up with same primer as
the shop coat.
D.
Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
2.
Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as
required during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove
film and, if necessary, strain coating material before using.
3.
Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within
recommended limits.
3.3
A.
APPLICATION
General:
Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material being applied.
P35-140 Vol2-144
2.
3.
4.
Do not apply high-performance coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable coating film.
Coating colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the coating
system descriptions.
Provide finish coats compatible with primers used.
B.
Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions. At high finish areas apply finish by
spray of to replicate spray applied finish to match Architect’s sample.
1.
Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for material applied and of
appropriate size for the surface or item being coated.
a.
Apply primers and first coats by brush unless manufacturer's written
instructions permit using roller or mechanical applicators.
b.
Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film.
c.
Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags,
ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color
breaks.
2.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as
recommended by manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3.
Spray Equipment: Use mechanical methods to apply coating if permitted by
manufacturer's written instructions and governing regulations.
a.
Use spray equipment with orifice size recommended by manufacturer for
material and texture required.
b.
Apply each coat to provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats.
c.
Do not double back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of two
coats in one pass, unless recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as
recommended by manufacturer, to material required to be coated or finished that has
not been prime coated by others.
1.
Recoat primed and sealed substrates if there is evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects caused by insufficient sealing.
E.
Completed Work: Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,
refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.4
A.
CLEANING
Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other
discarded materials from Project site.
1.
After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces.
Remove
spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or
damage adjacent finished surfaces.
P35-140 Vol2-145
3.5
A.
PROTECTION
Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against damage from
coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as
approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
1.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. After completing
coating operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to
protect their work.
2.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in
PDCA P1.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-146
SECTION 131213- EXTERIOR FOUNTAINS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Provide and install fountain equipment mechanical and electrical package in accordance
with the Contract Documents. Furnish all labor, materials, apparatus, tools, equipment,
transportation, temporary construction, and special or occasional services as required to
make a complete working fountain installation, as shown on the drawings, shop drawings,
and described in these specifications. The work of this Section shall include, but not be
limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.2
1.3
Discharge and suction piping systems.
Electrical conduit and wiring systems.
Easi-Set Equipment Building
Automatic waterfill system
Pumping and filtration systems.
Embed pond fittings.
Testing of system.
System training for Owner.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All workmanship and materials shall conform and comply with the requirements of
building ordinances, codes, rules and regulations of all departments of Federal, State
County and City having lawful jurisdiction over the work in this section.
B.
When these specifications and/or drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship,
or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the
above mentioned rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and/or
drawings shall take precedence over the requirements of said rules and regulations.
C.
The contractor shall furnish, without extra charge, any additional material and/or labor
required for compliance with these rules and regulations although not mentioned in these
specifications or indicated on the drawings.
D.
All materials shall be new and shall conform to applicable standards in every case where
such standards have been established for the particular material in question.
E.
All work shall be executed by workmen skilled in craft to which they are assigned.
F.
Adequate supervision shall be provided to maintain high quality workmanship.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Approval is required for submittals by the architect. Submit the following in accordance
with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
B.
Shop drawings shall be provided for the fountain, which include plans, elevations,
sections, details and connections/attachment to other work.
P35-140 Vol2-147
C.
1.4
Product Data shall include descriptive literature, detailed specifications, performance
data, electrical diagrams, and warranty information. They shall be submitted for the
following items.
1.
Fountain Equipment
2.
Fountain Display System
3.
Fountain Electrical Control System
4.
Filtration and Water Treatment System
SUBSTITUTES
A.
Any proposal for substitution of materials or equipment shall be submitted 10 calendar
days prior to the final bid date; otherwise, no substitutions shall be permitted. Submittal
for equivalent or comparable items shall, where applicable, including the following data
which are not necessarily required for specified items:
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Performance Characteristics and hydraulic and electrical load data.
Materials of construction, fabrication, and manufacture.
Certification of Conformance with specific codes, standards and specifications.
B.
Submittal of substituted equipment may be rejected if the component alters the design in
a manner that affects other trades or if it impairs accessibility or critical clearances.
C.
No substitutions shall be made unless authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer or
Designated Representative. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute
material prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended within
the guarantee period, the Contractor shall replace this material or equipment with
material or equipment specified, at its own expense, and to the satisfaction of the
Contracting Officer or Designated Representative.
D.
Contractors submitting bids proposing to use substitute materials and equipment must
also submit a bid on the “as specified” materials and equipment.
E.
Contractors submitting bids on proposed substitute materials and equipment must also
provide written performance guarantee certifying that the substitute materials and
equipment will produce the specified water effects.
F.
Proposed substitutions in the list of equipment included in this section may be made by
the Equipment Supplier only if the equipment is of better quality and more effective than
that listed, improves the design and performance or delivery times, and only if the
changes are thoroughly documented and approved in writing by the Contracting Officer
or Designated Representative prior to procurement.
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
A.
The Equipment Supplier shall guarantee the fountain to perform to the designed water
heights and spray patterns, provided that installation of the equipment is in strict
accordance with supplier’s recommendations, instructions, details, and approved
drawings.
P35-140 Vol2-148
1.6
1.7
B.
The Equipment Supplier shall accept complete Fountain System Design responsibility for
the hydraulic and electrical system, provided that all equipment required for the fountain
installation is procured from the specified equipment Manufacturer as itemized in its
proposals and materials list on the final, approved installation drawings.
C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for installation of all equipment required for the
fountain installation in accordance with fountain supplier’s drawings and instructions.
WARRANTY
A.
All materials and component parts, excluding lamps, supplied by the Manufacturer, shall
be guaranteed to be free from defects of materials and/or workmanship for a period of
one year from date of substantial completion or 18 months from shipment, whichever
comes first. Provide sample warranty form from Equipment and Material supplier.
B.
Contractor shall warrant all material found defective within (1) year of final acceptance
and shall be removed and replaced with new material at no cost to the owner including
labor to remove and re-install any defective materials.
C.
The warranty shall not extend to damage incurred through incorrect or improper
operation and maintenance by the owner. The owner shall assume full responsibility for
proper operation and maintenance upon final acceptance of installation form Contractor.
D.
In case of Manufacturer’s guarantees being limited, or expiring within the specified
guarantee period, the contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and providing
service contracts and additional warranty coverage to extend through the warranty period
as may be required by the owner.
PERMITS AND FEES
A.
The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, inspections, and certificates of
inspection of any governmental and inspection body having jurisdiction over all or any
part of the work included under this section and/or such inspections etc. required by
these specifications.
B.
The Contractor shall secure and pay for all fees and assessments in connection with the
work under contract and shall include this cost in its bid and contract price.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing all specialized fountain mechanical and
electrical materials and tools for the fountain and shall then furnish electrical fountain
components to the electrical contractor for installation and connection.
P35-140 Vol2-149
2.2
B.
Materials not listed within these specifications or on drawings as furnished by the
Equipment supplier, but required for the complete installation of the fountain mechanical
and/or electrical systems, shall be furnished by the Contractor.
C.
Materials shown on the drawings, but not specified herein, shall be provided in
accordance with information shown on the drawings and the general provisions of this
part of the specification.
SPECIALIZED FOUNTAIN MATERIAL MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER
A.
2.3
All fountain equipment specified and supplied to the Contractor shall be supplied by a
single fountain Equipment Supplier/Manufacturer. In this package the equipment item
numbers are from Fountain Craft Mfg. Co. Equals are accepted. Equals are only supplied
by a manufacturer that is currently in the business of supply fountain equipment for a
minimum of twenty (20) years and shall have previously supplied fountain systems
design, drawing and equipment, similar in size and complexity to this specified project.
FOUNTAIN COMPONENTS
A.
The below equipment list sets a standard for the mechanical system and for overall
quality of the system. Approved equals can be substituted.
Item #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
Marlow Model 530SL 4-7, 5 Hp, Cast Iron Pump with 5” Suction and 4”
Discharge Flanges. 1150 RPM
Emperor Aquatics Model CLP 6960A8, Ultra Violet Sterilizer with 2-6” Flanges
Fountain Craft Model WS400, 4” S.S. Waterstop with No Leak Flange
Rain Bird Model PS600-G-Self Cleaning Intake Screen. Maximum Flow Rate
of 750 GPM. 8” Flange connection.
Fountain Craft Model CTLFC-900 Master Control Panel with HOA Door
Switches, GFCI Circuit Panel, Timers, Easy Hook Up Terminal Strip
Warrick Controls Series DF, Duplex Pump Controller with High and Low Alarm
Capability
Warrick Controls Series 3Y, Corrosion Resistant Probes
Warrick Controls Series 3F, Multi Prob Juction Box
Fountain Craft Model FIFCPC-21, ¾” S.S. Entrance Conduits
J.D. Gould Company Model M4-3V, ¾” Brass Solenoid Valve
Rola Chem Model
, 1-1/2” Top Mounted Flow Meter
Easi Set Buildings, Standard 10’12’ Easi-Set Building with Standard Double
Doors
Fountain Craft Model MDFC-Vort-12, 12”x12” Stainless Steel Anti Vortex Plate
Fountain Craft Model WS300, 3” S.S. Water Stop with No Leak Flange
Fountain Craft Model FIPTPG30EX, 3” Stainless Steel Threaded Plug with
Extension Handle
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
Install and connect all equipment in accordance with Manufacturers’ instructions and
recommendations. Provide all piping, valves, and connections recommended by the
Manufacturer for proper operation.
P35-140 Vol2-150
3.2
3.3
3.4
B.
Protect all pipes, equipment, and other parts of the work against injury by exposure to the
weather during construction while stored or installed.
C.
Make all adjustments required for the proper operation of the mechanical system. Use
manufacturer’s factory technicians where adjustments cannot be accomplished by the
contractor’s personnel at contractor’s expense
COORDINATION
A.
The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all trades and appropriate sections of the
construction specifications as necessary to ensure proper provisions for the work of this
section.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the owner’s property from injury
or loss due its work. All damage to existing property (building, utilities, pavement, etc.) or
planting (trees, shrubs, lawn or ground cover) caused by the Contractor during its
operation or as a result of malfunction of installed work during the guarantee period shall
be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
C.
The Contractor shall fully inform itself regarding any available space limitations and
unusual requirements, for the installation of all materials and work furnished under this
section. Although the location of equipment may be shown on the drawings in certain
positions, the Contractor shall also be guided by the Architectural or Engineering details
and conditions at the job, correlating its work with that of the other sections and other
trades, with discrepancies and interferences being brought to the attention of the
Contracting Officer or Designated Representative for the resolution prior to proceeding
with the work.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Supply all piping systems with valves arranged to provide necessary isolation and give
regulating control throughout the system.
B.
Butterfly valves used to isolate equipment or accessories shall be lug type installed in a
manner to allow servicing without draining the system.
C.
Check valves shall close against pressure.
D.
Do not install valve stems below horizontal line.
PLUMBING
A.
Provide schedule 40 PVC piping with pressure fittings.
B.
Provide discharge piping of proper size for all filters and winter drain valves. Extend to
nearest drain.
C.
Provide a readily accessible drain valves at all low points in the system as necessary to
allow the system to be completely drained.
D.
Cut pipe to measurements established at the site. Work into place without springing or
forcing.
P35-140 Vol2-151
3.5
E.
Protect all openings in piping during construction to prevent entrance of foreign matter.
F.
Cut pipe and tubing ends square. Remove rough edges and burrs so that a smooth and
unobstructed flow will be obtained.
G.
Arrange exposed piping straight, parallel and perpendicular to the walls of the structure
unless otherwise shown on drawings.
H.
Wherever 2 or more pipes are installed in parallel, allow sufficient space for required
welding, soldering, painting, and/or the application of insulation.
I.
Bevel all pipe ends with a coarse file or beveling tool.
J.
Clean surfaces to be joined of all loose dirt and moisture from the ID and OD of the pipe
end and the ID of the fitting socket.
K.
Apply a coating of purple primer to the entire ID surface of the fitting socket and to an
equivalent area on the OD of the pipe end.
L.
Apply heavy body gray solvent cement using an appropriate natural bristle brush as
follows: apply a liberal coating of cement around the entire perimeter of the pipe end to a
width slightly more than the equivalent socket depth of the fitting. Apply a light but
complete coating once around the entire depth of the socket surface, avoiding excessive
cement application. Apply a second liberal coating onto the pipe end.
M.
Immediately after cementing, insert the pipe into the fitting to the full socket depth while
rotating the pipe or fitting ¼ turn. Hold joint for at least 15 seconds after joining to make
sure pipe does not back out of socket.
N.
Do not disturb or move the joint for at least 1 hour after joining.
O.
Discard cement when an appreciable change in viscosity takes place or if cement is
lumpy or stringy. Do not thin. Cement must be used before expiration date on container.
PIPING TESTS
A.
Provide all temporary piping, pumps, and gauges necessary to conduct the specified
tests.
B.
Conduct all tests before concealment of work and before any coating, wrap, or insulation
is applied.
C.
Replace or repair any part that leaks. Repeat test until criteria are met.
D.
Do not subject any item to a test pressure greater than the pressure rating of the item.
E.
Underground piping shall be tested as follows:
1.
In accordance with pipe manufacturers’ recommendations and procedures,
pressurize all underground piping (except for drain system) to 60 psi prior to
backfilling (spot backfilling to anchor piping may be done prior to pressurizing).
Piping shall remain pressurized until all backfilling, grading, planting, and
concrete work in the area of the piping is completed.
P35-140 Vol2-152
F.
3.6
3.8
3.9
The completed piping system shall be tested as follows:
1.
Conduct each test for a minimum continuous duration of eight hours.
2.
Hydrostatically pressure test all suction and return piping at 75 psi.
3.
Log pressure readings for all test required above at the beginning and end of
each test and on every working day between. Note the location and cause of any
failure and method of repair on the daily log. Submit copy of the log to the
Architect weekly.
4.
Testing of the completed system, as specified above, shall be witnessed by the
Contracting Officer or Designated Representative.
FLUSHING
A.
Before the fountain system is placed in operation, flush all fountain system piping with
water to remove foreign matter and debris in piping.
B.
Completely drain all piping and equipment. Re flush as necessary until water runs clear.
Fill the system to the required capacity with clean water.
C.
Circulate the water throughout the system for 1 hour, using the display pump. Install start
up screens as necessary to prevent equipment clogging and damage.
D.
After the system has operated for 2 weeks, return to clean the UV sanitizer.
SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Furnish and install all required fasteners, rods, hangers, supports, bolts, nuts, washers,
and plates and shapes using stainless steel hardware.
B.
Furnish and arrange for the installation of all requires inserts and anchor bolts. Provide
templates where appropriate.
C.
Provide additional hangers or supports at all valves, strainers, and elsewhere where
required to properly support any additional pipe loadings. Where several pipes occur at
the same elevation, use trapeze type hangers. Provide copper plated hangers where
hangers are in direct contact with copper piping.
D.
Equipment may not support any of the pipe loading, nor may equipment, except valves
and strainers, be supported by any of the piping. Piping shall not be supported by another
pipe or duct.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
P35-140 Vol2-153
3.10
3.11
A.
Provide securely attached permanently installed nameplates for each piece of equipment
containing all data required to properly identify the equipment (i.e. manufacturer, type,
size, capacity, horsepower, etc.)
B.
Provide flow direction arrow pipe bands on all system piping (Seton or equal)
ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Make temporary and final adjustments for each system and equipment apparatus
installed, using factory trained technicians when appropriate.
B.
Refer to the drawings and operation and maintenance manuals for system start- up and
adjustment details. Contact Manufacturer/Supplier for additional assistance as
necessary.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
3.12
At the time of completion, a period of not less than 8 hours shall be allotted by the
Contractor for instruction of operating and maintenance personnel in the use of all
systems. All personnel shall be instructed at one time, the contractor making at its
expense, all necessary arrangements with manufacturer’s technicians to provide
instruction, product literature, and application guides for the user’s reference
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
The Equipment Supplier shall deliver to the owner the specified quantities of the
Operations and Manuals, together with any additional information or manuals which
would assist in the proper operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
The Contractor shall, at its expense, arrange and provide for the technical instruction of
the owner’s maintenance personnel, by the Equipment Supplier’s personnel, for such
time as is reasonably required to acquaint them with the operation and maintenance of all
equipment furnished and installed under this section.
END OF SECTION 131213
P35-140 Vol2-154
P35-140 Vol2-155
SECTION 26 0000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Scope: Provide all electrical equipment shown on the drawings and as
specificed herein to provide a complete and operational electrical system.
Included but not limited to:
1. All electrical wiring, conduits, and raceways.
2. Furnishing and installing all light fixtures.
3. Electrical equipment connections to all fountain equipment.
4. Lighting controls.
5. Underground conduits for new electrical service and coordination with the
power company.
6. Trenching and backfill for electrical work.
7. Concrete for electrical and light fixture installation.
8. Wring devices, junction boxes, equipment connections, electrical gear,
and miscellaneous accessories for a complete system.
9. Demolition of existing electrical.
B.
General Requirements- All requirements in the architectural specifications,
architectural general notes and the general and supplementary conditions of
these specifications apply to this section and division. Where the requirements
of this section and division exceed those of the architectural specifications and
architectural general notes, this section and division take precedence. Become
thoroughly familiar with all requirements that affect this division, section or
both. Work required under this division includes all material, equipment,
appliances, and labor required to complete the entire electrical system as
required by the drawings and specifications, or reasonably inferred to be
necessary to facilitate each systems functionality as implied by the design and
the equipment specified.
C.
The specifications and drawings for the project are complementary, and
portions of the work described in one, shall be provided as if described in both.
In the event of discrepancies, notify the engineer and request clarification prior
to proceeding with the work involved.
D.
Drawings are schematic in nature, show the various components of the
systems approximately to scale and attempt to indicate how they shall be
integrated with other parts of the work. Figured dimensions take precedence to
P35-140 Vol2-156
scaled dimensions. Determine exact locations by job measurements, by
checking the requirements of other trades, and by reviewing all contract
documents. Correct errors that could have been avoided by proper checking
and inspection, at no additional cost.
E.
1.2
1.3
Specifications define the qualitative requirements for products, materials, and
workmanship upon which the contract is based.
DEFINITIONS: WHENEVER USED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS OR DRAWINGS,
THE FOLLOWING TERMS SHALL HAVE THE INDICATED MEANINGS:
A.
Furnish: to supply and deliver to the project site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembling, installing, and similar operations.
B.
Install: to perform all operations at the project site, including, but not limited to, and as
required: unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying,
working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, testing, commissioning,
starting up and similar operations, complete, and ready for the intended use.
C.
Provide: to furnish and install complete, and ready for the intended use.
D.
Furnished by owner (or owner-furnished) or furnished by others: an item furnished by
the owner or under other divisions or contracts, and installed under the requirements of
this division, complete, and ready for the intended use, including all items and services
incidental to the work necessary for proper installation and operation. Include the
installation under the warranty required by this division.
E.
Engineer: where referenced in this division, 'engineer" is the engineer of record and the
design professional for the work under this division, and is a consultant to, and an
authorized representative of, the architect, as defined in the general and/or
supplementary conditions. When used in this division, it means increased involvement
by, and obligations to, the engineer, in addition to involvement by, and obligations to,
the "architect".
F.
AHJ: the local code and/or inspection agency, authority having jurisdiction over the
work.
G.
NRTL: nationally recognized testing laboratory, as defined and listed by OSHA in 29
CFR 1910.7 (e.g., UL, ETL, CSA), and acceptable to the AHJ over this project.
H.
The terms "equivalent", or -equal" are used synonymously and shall mean "accepted
by or acceptable to the engineer as equivalent to the item or manufacturer specified".
"equivalent" or "equal" products shall be labeled, listed, certified, or all three, by an
NRTL, and acceptable to the AHJ over this project.
PREBID INSPECTION
A.
Personally inspect the site of the proposed work and become fully informed of
conditions under which the work is to be done. Failure to do so will not be considered
sufficient justification to request or obtain extra compensation over and above the
contract price.
P35-140 Vol2-157
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP
A.
Provide all material and equipment new and in perfect condition.
B.
Provide a nameplate for all material and equipment identifying the manufacturer and
providing sufficient reference to establish quality, size and capacity.
C.
All workmanship shall be of the finest possible by experienced mechanics of the
proper trade.
D.
Provide specification/heavy duty grade(s) for all materials and equipment (light duty
and residential type equipment will not be acceptable):
E.
Provide all hoists, scaffolds, staging, tools, machinery and equipment required for the
installation and performance of the electrical work.
F.
Store and maintain material and equipment in clean condition, and protected from
weather, moisture and damage. For the types of material and equipment specified.
G.
General work practices for electrical construction shall be in accordance with NECA 1
(latest edition), standard practices for good workmanship in electrical construction.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide products by one of the manufacturers specified herein or a preapproval equal.
B.
Where manufacturers are not listed, provide products subject to compliance with
requirements from manufacturers that have been actively involved in manufacturing
the specified product for no less than 5 years.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate all work with other divisions and trades so that various components of the
electrical systems are installed at the proper time, fit the available space, and allow
proper service access to all equipment. Refer to all drawings, including, but not limited
to, civil, structural, and relevant equipment submittals to determine the extent of clear
spaces.
B.
Make all offsets required to clear equipment, beams and other structural members, and
to facilitate concealing raceways in the manner anticipated in the design.
C.
Provide materials with trim that will fit properly the types of ceiling finishes actually
installed.
ORDINANCES, CODES, AND CLIENT STANDARDS
A.
Comply with national fire protection association (NFPA) standards, state and local
building codes, and all other applicable codes and ordinances for performance,
workmanship, equipment, and materials. Additionally, comply with rules and
regulations of public utilities and municipal departments affected by connection of
services.
B.
Where conflicts between various codes, ordinances, rules, and regulations exist,
comply with the most stringent, wherever requirements of these specifications,
drawings, or both, exceed those of the above items, the requirements of these
P35-140 Vol2-158
specifications, drawings, or both, shall govern. Code compliance, at a minimum, is
mandatory. Construe nothing in these construction documents as permitting work not
in compliance, at a minimum, with these codes.
1.8
1.9
1.10
C.
Bring all conflicts observed between codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, referenced
standards, and these documents to the engineer's attention for final resolution,
contractor will be held responsible for any violation of the law.
D.
Provide and maintain all necessary signal lights and guards for the safety of the public.
Obtain and pay for all permits for work in this division.
PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Store and protect from damage equipment and materials delivered to job site, in
accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. For materials and equipment
susceptible to changing weather conditions, dampness, or temperature variations, store
inside in properly conditioned spaces. For materials and equipment not susceptible to
these conditions, cover with waterproof, tear-resistant, heavy tarp or polyethylene
plastic as required to protect from plaster, dirt, paint, water, or physical damage.
Equipment and material that has been damaged by construction activities will be
rejected, and contractor shall furnish new equipment and material of a like kind.
B.
Plug or cap open ends of conduits while stored and installed during construction when
not in use, to prevent the entrance of debris into the systems.
C.
Re-establish service to existing equipment that may have been interrupted due to
remodeling.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Include in the base bid the products specifically named in these specifications or on the
drawings. Submit, in the form of alternates, with the bid, products of any other
manufacturers for similar use, provided the differences in cost, if any, are included for
each proposed alternate. Prior to the bid date, substitutions will not be considered
unless submitted to the architect, for engineer's review, at least ten calendar days prior
to the date for receipt of bids. Include the name of the material or equipment for which
it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including
cut sheets, photometric data, and all other information necessary for an evaluation for
each such request. Provide factory generated point-by-point calculations for all exterior
light fixtures (photometric files supplied so the engineer can generate a point-by-point
do not suffice for the point- by-point calculations). Provide interior point-by-point
calculations at the discretion of the engineer.
B.
The engineer will have the final authority as to whether the product is an acceptable
replacement to the specified item. The proposed substitution may also be rejected by
the architect for aesthetic reasons if felt necessary or desirable. In the event the
proposed substitutions herein described are rejected, furnish the specified item.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble and submit to the architect, for engineer's review, manufacturers' product
literature for all material and all equipment to be furnished, installed, or both, under
this division, including shop drawings, manufacturers' product data and performance
sheets, samples, and other submittals required by this division. Provide the number of
P35-140 Vol2-159
submittals required by the architectural specifications however, at a minimum, submit
six (6) sets, or submit electronic pdfs. Before submitting, verify that all materials and
equipment submitted are mutually compatible and suitable for the intended use, fit the
available spaces, and allow ample and code-required room for access and maintenance.
Submittals shall contain the following information. Submittals not so identified will be
returned to the contractor without action.
1.11
1.12
1.13
B.
The contractors stamp, which shall certify that the stamped drawings have been
checked by the contractor, comply with the drawings and specifications, and have been
coordinated with other trades.
C.
Blank page for placement of engineers review stamp.
D.
Transmit submittals as early as required to support the project schedule. Allow two
weeks for engineer review time, plus mailing time, allow an additional two weeks for
re-submittals, if required. Transmit submittals as soon as possible after notice to
proceed and before construction starts. The engineer's submittal reviews will not
relieve the contractor from responsibility for errors in dimensions, details, size of
members, or quantities; or for omitting components or fittings; or for not coordinating
items with actual building conditions.
ELECTRONIC DRAWING FILES
A.
In preparation of shop drawings, contractor may, at his option, obtain electronic
drawing files in AutoCAD dwg or dxf format from the engineer for a non-refundable
shipping and handling fee of $100 for a drawing set up to 12 sheets
B.
Contractor shall contact the engineer for the written authorization. Contractor shall
indicate on the form the desired shipping method and drawing format contractor shall
include payment with the signed authorization form, the signed authorization form and
payment must be received by the engineer before any electronic files will be sent.
TRAINING
A.
At a time mutually agreed upon between the owner and contractor, train owner's
designated personnel on the operation and maintenance of the equipment provided for
this project.
B.
Provide training to include but not be limited to an overview of the system and/or
equipment as it relates to the facility as a whole; operation and maintenance procedures
and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, preventive
maintenance and appropriate operator intervention; and review of data included in the
operation and maintenance instructions.
C.
Schedule training with owner with at least 30 days in advance notice.
WARRANTIES
A.
Warrant each system and each element thereof against all defects due to faulty
workmanship, installation, product design or material for a period of 12 months from
date of substantial completion, unless specific items are noted to carry a longer
warranty in the construction documents or manufacturer's standard warranty exceeds
12 months. Remedy all defects, occurring within the warranty period(s), as stated in
the general conditions.
P35-140 Vol2-160
B.
Also warrant the following additional items:
1. All raceways are free from obstructions, holes, crushing, or breaks of any nature.
2. All raceway seals are effective.
3. The entire electrical system is free from all short circuits and unwanted open
circuits and grounds.
1.14
C.
The above warranties shall include labor and material, make repairs or replacements
without any additional costs to the owner.
D.
Perform the remedial work promptly, upon written notice from the engineer or owner.
E.
At the time of substantial completion, deliver to the owner all warranties, in writing
and properly executed, including term limits for warranties extending beyond the one
year period, each warranty instrument being addressed to the owner and stating the
commencement date and term.
COINCIDENTAL DAMAGE
A.
1.15
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
1.16
Following the requirements in division 1, cut walls, floors, ceilings, and other portions
of the facility as required to perform work under this division, obtain permission of the
architect, owner, and owner's designated structural engineer before doing any cutting.
Cut all holes as small as possible. Patch walls, floors, and other portions of the facility
as required by work under this division. All patching shall be first class and shall
match the original material and construction, including fire ratings if applicable. Do
not cut or penetrate material and construction, including fire ratings. Do not cut or
penetrate structural elements.
ROUGH-IN
A.
1.17
Repair all streets, sidewalks, drives, paving, walls, flooring, finishes, and other
facilities damaged in the course of this work. Repair materials shall match existing
construction. All backfilling and repairing shall meet all requirements of the owner,
city and others having jurisdiction, repair work shall be first class utilizing the best
materials and tradesmen to perform all necessary repair work. Conform to all
requirements of division 2 of these specifications.
Coordinate without delay all roughing-in with other divisions. Conceal all raceways
except in unfinished areas and where otherwise indicated on the drawings.
EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A.
Provide Necessary equipment and accessories that are not provided by the equipment
supplier or owner to complete installation of equipment furnished by others, in
locations as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or both. Equipment and
accessories not provided by the equipment supplier may include such items as flexible
cords and plugs, as required for proper operation of the complete system, in
accordance with the manufacturers' instructions.
P35-140 Vol2-161
B.
1.18
CLEANING
A.
1.19
1.20
Maintain all correct rough-in dimensions, and verify them with architect, owner's
representative, equipment supplier, or all three, prior to rough-in and service
installations.
In addition to the requirements set forth in the drawings and specifications, remove
from the premises dirt and refuse resulting from the performance of the electrical
work, as required, to prevent accumulation. Cooperate in maintaining reasonably clean
premises at all times. Immediately prior to final inspection, make a final cleanup of dirt
and refuse resulting from the work. Clean all material and equipment installed under
this division. Remove dirt, dust, plaster, stains and foreign matter from all surfaces.
Touch up and restore all damaged finishes to their original condition.
ADJUSTING, ALIGNING AND TESTING
A.
Adjust, align, and test all electrical equipment on this project provided under this
division and all electrical equipment furnished by others for installation or wiring
under this division, for proper operation.
B.
Test all systems and equipment according to the requirements in NETA (latest edition)
and all additional requirements specified in following sections. Provide copies of all
test reports to the engineer of record.
C.
Maintain the following on the project premises at all times; a true RMS reading
voltmeter, a true RMS reading ammeter. Provide test data readings as requested or as
required by the engineer.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Provide equipment identification nameplates.
1. On all panelboards, switches, starters, and dimmers, a/c units, and meters.
2. Where indicated on the drawings.
3. Receptacle faceplates and junction boxes with circuit and panel.
4. Light switch faceplates backside with circuit and panel.
B.
Nameplates:
1. Engraved, contrasting color, three-layer, laminated plastic indicating the name of
the equipment, load, or circuit as designated on the drawings and in the
specifications
2. Self-adhering, with a permanent, weatherproof adhesive.
3. Attachment method shall be acceptable to the manufacturers of the equipment to
which the nameplates are being applied.
4. Color: black background with white letters for normal power, letter height; 1/4inch minimum.
5. Light switch faceplates; permanent black magic marker on back.
P35-140 Vol2-162
1.21
SYSTEM START UP
A.
Prior to starting up the electrical systems:
1. Check all components and devices.
2. Lubricate items accordingly.
3. Tighten screws and bolts for connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values
are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486a and UL 486b.
4. Adjust taps on each transformer for rated secondary voltage.
5. Check and record building's service entrance voltage, grounding conditions,
grounding resistance, and proper phasing.
6. Balance all single-phase loads at each panelboard, redistributing branch circuit
connections until balance is achieved. Do not type up final panelboard directories
until all rebalancing and redistribution of circuits are complete.
7. Replace all burned-out lamps, lamps not uniform in color, and lamps used for
temporary construction lighting in permanent light fixtures.
8. After all systems have been inspected and adjusted, confirm all operating features
required by the drawings and specifications and make adjustments as required.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-163
SECTION 26 0519
ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Building wire (600 V)
B.
Metal-clad cable (600 V)
C.
Wire and cable connectors
D.
Insulating tape and tubing
E.
Wire pulling lubricant
LANL PERFORMED WORK
A.
1.3
1.4
GENERAL
None
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.
B.
Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 3300
Submittal Procedures:
1.
1.5
Catalog Data: Compression connectors; indicate installation tools and dies
that will be used.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 7839 Project
Record Documents:
1.
Field Test Records:
a.
Cable pulling records required in Building Wire Installation.
b.
Inspections and tests required in Field Quality Control.
P35-140 Vol2-164
1.6
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.2
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1, Standard
Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
Refer to Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures.
BUILDING WIRE
A.
Provide NRTL-listed building wire as shown on the Drawings with the following
characteristics:
1.
Description: Single conductor 600 V insulated wire.
2.
Conductor:
a.
3.
Insulation: The following types, rated 600 volts:
a.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 98% conductivity,
annealed, uncoated copper, ASTM B 3 Standard Specification for Soft
or Annealed Copper Wire, solid or stranded as specified in Part 3 of
this Section.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings: 1 AWG and smaller,
Type THHN/THWN-2 per UL Standard 83, “Thermoplastic-Insulated
Wires and Cables.”
Color code conductors as follows:
1.
Use colored insulation for color coding conductors 6 AWG and smaller.
2.
Use water and oil resistant colored plastic adhesive tape, 3/4 inch
minimum width, for color coding conductor 4 AWG and larger.
Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 35"
3.
Provide black conductor insulation where colored tape is used for color
coding.
P35-140 Vol2-165
4.
Use the following color codes for AC power system conductors:
System Voltage:
120/240V
Conductor:
Phase A:
Phase B:
Grounded
(Neutral):
Equipment
Grounding:
Isolated Ground:
Switched:
Black
Red
White
Green
--Pink
* Provide grounded conductor insulation with colored stripe when installed in
any raceway, box, or enclosure with wiring of another system voltage.
5.
2.3
Provide color code for control conductors as indicated on equipment or
control system manufacturer’s drawings.
WIRING CONNECTORS
A.
For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 20 to 12 AWG solid and 16 to 14
AWG stranded, use push-on, insulated, spring type connectors, rated 600 V and
105 ºC that are NRTL-listed to UL 486C Splicing Wire Connectors and provide a
means of visual inspection of the connection. Manufacturer: IDEAL “In-Sure.”
B.
For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 8 AWG and smaller, use insulated,
spring type connectors, rated 600 volts and 105 ºC that are NRTL-listed to UL
486C, Splicing Wire Connectors. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok.”
C.
For splices and taps on copper wire, sizes 6 AWG through 1 AWG, use the
following materials:
D.
1.
Tin-plated copper split-bolt connectors that meet the requirements in UL
486A-486B, Wire Connectors; provide with matching 600-volt snap-on
insulating cover. Manufacturer: FCI Burndy “Type KSA” with “Type SC”
insulating cover.
2.
Multi-tap connectors that meet the requirements of UL 486A-466B that
have two or more range-taking mechanical lugs and matching 600-volt
insulated cover. Manufacturers: Burndy ‘POLYTAP” or “UNITAP”, Ilsco
“Type PCT”, Blackburn “AMT”.
For copper wire, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger, use UL 486A-486B listed
circumferential or hexagonal crimp compression terminals, splices, or adapters.
1.
Provide compression terminals and splices made from electro-tin plated
seamless copper tubing and marked with wire size, die index / color code,
and number / locations of crimps. Manufacturers: FCI Burndy Types “YA”,
“YA-L”, “YA-L-NT”, “YS”, and “YC-C.” Thomas & Betts “Color-Keyed.”
P35-140 Vol2-166
E.
F.
2.4
2.
Provide straight and offset compression adapters made from electro-tin
plated aluminum, NRTL listed for use on copper conductors, and marked
with wire size, die index / color code, and number / locations of crimps.
Each adapter shall include a 600 V, 90 degree C rated insulating cover.
Manufacturer: FCI Burndy Types “AYP” and “AYPO.”
3.
Range-taking, die-less, or indenter-applied terminals are not acceptable.
For control wiring use nylon insulated crimp-on terminals with insulation grip that
meet the requirements of UL 486A-486B. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchlok MNG,”
Thomas & Betts “Sta-Kon.”
1.
Use ring tongue terminals for nutted studs.
2.
Use flanged fork terminals for barrier terminal blocks.
3.
Use pin terminals or ferrules for DIN type terminal blocks.
Insulation-piercing type connectors are not acceptable for power or control wiring.
INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING
A.
For making re-enterable tape-insulated splices and connections, provide
varnished cambric electrical insulating tape made of cotton cambric fabric that is
oil primed and coated with electrical insulating varnish. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch
2510” (no adhesive) and Scotch 2520” (pressure-sensitive adhesive).
B.
Insulate taped splices and connections using ethylene propylene rubber (EPR)
tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene,
and Rubber Insulating Tape and is rated for 90 ºC continuous operation and
130 ºC short-term overload service. Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch 130C”
C.
For the outer covering of tape-insulated splices and connections use vinyl plastic
tape that meets the requirements of UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene,
and Rubber Insulating Tape and has the following characteristics:
1.
8.5 mil minimum thickness,
2.
ASTM D-3005, “Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant
Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape – Type
1.”
3.
Rated 600 volts and 105 ºC, suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
4.
Retains flexibility, adhesion, and applicable at temperature ranges from 0
through 100 ºF without loss of physical or electrical properties.
5.
Resistant to abrasion, moisture, alkalis, acid, corrosion, and sunlight.
P35-140 Vol2-167
6.
D.
E.
2.5
Provide heat shrinkable tubing that meets the requirements of UL 486D – Sealed
Wire Connector Systems and has the following characteristics:
1.
Rated 600 volts
2.
Factory applied adhesive/sealant
3.
Split resistant
4.
Manufacturer: 3M “ITCSN”
Use motor lead splicing kits to insulate and seal connections to leads for motors
rated 480V and less. Manufacturer: 3M “5300 Series”
WIRE PULLING LUBRICANT
A.
Provide NRTL-listed wire pulling lubricant that is compatible with the conductor
insulation or jacket, has a maximum coefficient of dynamic friction of 0.25, and
leaves no flammable residue. For cold weather installations, provide wire pulling
lubricant suitable for conduit temperature.
B.
Compatibility with conductor insulation shall be determined in accordance with
IEEE Std 1210, Standard Tests for Determining Compatibility of Cable-Pulling
Lubricants with Wire and Cable.
C.
Manufacturer:
PART 3
3.1
Manufacturer: 3M “Scotch Super 88”
1.
For conduit temperature above freezing: Polywater “Lubricant J.”
2.
For conduit temperature below freezing: Polywater “Lubricant WJ.”
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
B.
Verify that work of other trades likely to damage wire and cable is completed.
C.
Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
D.
Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
E.
Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.
1.
Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions.
P35-140 Vol2-168
2.
3.2
3.3
Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated,
determine exact routing and lengths required to meet Project conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Examine raceways and building finishes that are to receive wires and cables for
compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B.
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
C.
Do not handle or pull cables that are colder than +14 degrees F. Store cold
cables for at least 24 hours in a heated building prior to installation.
BUILDING WIRE INSTALLATION
A.
Install building wire according to, the NEC, the requirements in this Section, and
the following NECA installation standards as applicable:
1.
B.
NECA/AA 104 Recommended Practice for Installing Aluminum Building
Wire and Cable (ANSI).
Do not damage conductor, insulation, or jacket by excessive installation pulling
tension or sidewall bearing pressure.
1.
Calculate expected cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressures for
each set of conductors being pulled into a conduit run where any of the
following combinations of bends and raceway length is exceeded between
accessible pull points:
a.
4 equivalent 90-degree bends and 10 feet of raceway.
b.
3 equivalent 90-degree bends and 40 feet of raceway.
c.
2 equivalent 90-degree bends and 80 feet of raceway.
d.
1 equivalent 90-degree bend and 150 feet of raceway.
e.
Straight pull with more than 250 feet of raceway.
2.
For cable pulling tension and sidewall bearing pressure calculations use
formulas and factors described in IEEE Std 422, IEEE Guide for the Design
and Installation of Cable Systems in Power Generating Stations.
3.
Obtain recommended maximum conductor or cable pulling tension and
sidewall bearing pressure values from the manufacturer, or use the
following maximum allowable values:
a.
Maximum sidewall bearing pressure: 500 lb/ft.
P35-140 Vol2-169
4.
5.
3.4
b.
Maximum tension, pulling directly on conductor: 0.008 lb/cmil
c.
Maximum tension, pulling on basket grip over insulation jacket: 2000
lb, not to exceed 0.008 lb/cmil of conductor.
Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on runs where
cable pulling calculations indicate installation stresses may exceed 80
percent of allowable pulling tension or sidewall bearing pressure.
a.
Record the maximum measured pulling tension for each monitored
cable pull.
b.
Submit the recorded cable pulling tension for each monitored cable
pull and the corresponding calculated allowable pulling tension.
Use a tension measuring device to monitor pulling force on each pull of
conductors for critical systems where a pulling winch is used. Record and
submit the maximum measured pulling tension for each cable pull.
C.
Use solid copper conductors for power circuits 10 AWG and smaller except use
stranded conductors in flexible conduits.
D.
Use stranded conductors for power circuits 8 AWG and larger.
E.
Use copper conductors not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting branch
circuits.
F.
Use stranded copper conductors not smaller than 14 AWG for 120V control
circuits.
G.
Use minimum 10 AWG copper conductors from panelboard to first outlet for 20ampere, 120-volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet; use larger conductors as
indicated on the Drawings.
H.
Use minimum 10 AWG copper conductors from panelboard to first outlet for 20ampere, 277-volt branch circuits longer than 150 feet; use larger conductors as
indicated on the Drawings.
I.
Do not “through-pull” conductors at boxes, fittings or cabinets where a change of
raceway alignment occurs.
J.
Install wiring at outlets with at least 6 inches of slack conductor at each outlet.
CONNECTOR INSTALLATION
A.
Install conductors in terminals, splices, adapters, and connectors in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation
instructions available at the construction site.
P35-140 Vol2-170
3.5
B.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no
perceptible temperature rise above the conductor temperature.
C.
Do not nick conductors when removing insulation.
D.
Do not cut conductor strands to fit into connectors, splices, adapters, or
terminals.
E.
Make connections using clean connection surfaces. Wire brush conductors
immediately before installing lugs, terminals, splices, or adapters.
F.
Install copper conductors, 1/0 AWG and larger, connected using mechanical
lugs, in the locations or conditions described below.
1.
Connection points not NRTL-listed for either compression terminals or
compression adapters.
2.
Where there is insufficient wire bending space to accommodate either
compression terminals or compression adapters.
3.
100 ampere frame circuit breakers.
4.
30, 60, and 100 ampere safety switches.
G.
Terminate power conductors smaller than 1/0 AWG using mechanical lugs.
H.
Terminate control conductors using crimp-on terminals or ferrules. Do not place
stranded conductors directly under terminal screws. Install terminals or ferrules
on conductors using ratchet-type compression tools.
I.
Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and
instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws
and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening
values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are
not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening torques
specified in UL Standard 486A-486B.
INSULATING TAPE AND TUBING INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulating tape and tubing in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the
construction site.
B.
Insulate splices and taps of irregular shapes with manufactured insulating covers
or insulating tape built up to not less than 150 percent of insulation rating of
conductor.
1.
Apply varnished cambric tape over connections where re-entry is likely,
such as motor lead connections.
P35-140 Vol2-171
C.
3.6
3.7
2.
Use rubber insulating tape in half-lapped layers to develop the basic
insulation over splices and taps.
3.
Use vinyl plastic tape in half-lapped layers to provide the outer protective
covering over splices and taps.
Insulate cylinder shaped splices and taps, connector barrels and adapter barrels
using heat shrinkable insulating tubing, insulating covers manufactured for the
connector, or tape insulation as described above.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 0553, Identification for
Electrical Systems.
B.
Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on
Drawings.
C.
Apply color coding tape on conductors at each termination, splice, junction, and
pull box.
D.
Post conductor color code on each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear
assembly, motor control center, dry-type transformer, safety switch, and separate
motor controller. Use type-written, adhesive-backed labels
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Observe conductors and cables during the installation process.
1.
Reject and replace entire reels, rolls, or boxes containing conductors or
cables with material or manufacturing defects.
2.
Reject and replace cable or conductor segments that have been kinked,
dented, or otherwise damaged during handling or installation.
B.
After installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuit is energized,
show product capability and compliance with requirements and verify by
documented inspections and tests.
C.
Perform the following inspections:
1.
Inspect conductors and cables for:
a.
Freedom from material defect or physical damage,
b.
Correct conductor size, material, and insulation type,
c.
Correct color coding and identification.
P35-140 Vol2-172
2.
D.
E.
Inspect connections for:
a.
Correct connector size and type according to the Specifications,
b.
The use of the correct compression dies and the correct number of
crimps on compression connectors in accordance with the connector
manufacturer’s instructions.
Perform the following tests:
1.
After connecting conductors to equipment, test continuity and correct
connection of each power circuit conductor and each control circuit
conductor.
2.
Measure and record the tightness of not less than 10% of each size and
type of mechanical or bolted connection using a calibrated torque wrench or
torque screwdriver.
a.
Compare measured torque with torque recommended by the
connector manufacturer or UL Standard 486A-486B.
b.
If any connection is found to be less than 90% of the recommended
torque, notify the LANL Subcontract Technical Representative and retorque all bolted connections on the Project.
Remove and replace defective, incorrect, or improperly installed conductors and
connectors. Re-inspect and re-test replacement conductors and connectors.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-173
SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Main Grounding Electrode System (Lightning Protection System grounding is
specified in Section 26 4100.)
B.
Circuit and System Grounding
C.
Enclosure and Equipment Grounding System
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures:
1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for grounding conductors, grounding
clamps, grounding bushings, grounding plates, grounding bars, chemical
ground rods, exothermic weld materials, compression grounding connector
materials, static grounding materials, and signal reference grid materials.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for signal reference grid fabrication
and installation.
3. Project Record Documents: Submit project record documents to include
specified certifications and field test reports of installed grounding systems.
1.3
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.
B.
Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) for the application and environment in which installed.
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 Standard
Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
P35-140 Vol2-174
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.2
2.4
2.5
Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500, Substitution
Procedures.
GROUND ELECTRODE CABLE
A.
2.3
PRODUCTS
Provide bare stranded, soft temper copper cable that conforms to ASTM B8
Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors.
GROUND ROD
A.
Provide NRTL listed ground rod(s) as shown on the Drawings.
B.
Furnish ground rods fabricated from Type K copper tubing approximately 10 feet
long, 2 inches in diameter and containing a hygroscopic electrolyte material.
C.
Furnish each ground rod with a 24 inch long 4/0 AWG copper pigtail, a protective
cover box, and sufficient ground ground-enhancing backfill material for installation
in a 6 inch augered hole.
D.
Manufacturers: Lyncole Industries Inc., LEC Inc., Superior Grounding Systems
Inc.
GROUND ELECTRODE BACKFILL MATERIAL
A.
Provide ground enhancement backfill material for ground rods and cable type
electrodes.
B.
Field-mixed backfill material shall consist of approximately 75 percent gypsum
(calcium sulfate), 20 percent bentonite clay, and 5 percent sodium sulfate.
C.
Commercial backfill material, when at 300% moisture content ((weight of
water/weight of material)x 100), shall have a resistivity of approximately 250 ohmcm at 30% solids density and a pH of 8 to 10.
D.
Manufacturers: Lyncole “Lynconite”, LEC Inc. “GAF”, Superior Grounding
Systems “Electro-Fill”
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Provide NRTL-listed THHN/THWN insulated copper wire.
B.
Use solid grounding conductors 10 AWG and smaller where not subject to
vibration or repeated flexing.
C.
Use stranded grounding conductors for 8 AWG and larger.
P35-140 Vol2-175
D.
Use stranded grounding conductors where subject to vibration or repeated flexing.
Use stranded grounding conductors in flexible conduit at motor connections.
E.
Color code grounding conductors as follows:
1. Equipment ground:
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
a.
Conductors 6 AWG and smaller: Green colored insulation.
b.
Conductors 4 AWG and larger: Green colored insulation or black
colored insulation with 3/4 inch wide band of water and oil-resistant
green plastic adhesive tape.
PIPE GROUNDING CONNECTORS
A.
Provide NRTL-listed copper-alloy connectors for making cable to pipe
connections.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney “ABG” or “CG”..
CONDUIT GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A.
Provide NRTL-listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150 C rated insulated throat
grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.
B.
Manufacturers: O-Z/Gedney Type “BLG”
EXOTHERMIC WELD GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide molds and welding material for making exothermic weld connections.
B.
In interior locations and in vaults, use low smoke emission type welding material.
C.
Match mold and weld material to material types, shapes and sizes to be joined.
D.
Manufacturer: ERICO Cadweld
COMPRESSION GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide wrought copper connectors, terminals, taps, and splices for making
irreversible compression grounding connections.
B.
Furnish NRTL-listed grounding connectors that are suitable for direct burial and
have been tested successfully according to the requirements of IEEE Std. 837
IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation
Grounding.
C.
Provide connector manufacturer’s hydraulic compression tools and dies that
match the connectors.
P35-140 Vol2-176
D.
Match connector and die size to material shapes and conductor sizes to be
joined.
E.
Use two-hole heavy-duty compression lugs for bolted connections to ground bars,
ground plates, and equipment ground pads.
F.
Manufacturer: Burndy “Hyground”
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that work of other trades likely to damage grounding and bonding material
has been completed.
B.
Electrode locations and grounding cable routing shown on Drawings are
approximate unless dimensioned.
1. Install electrodes and route cable as required meeting project conditions.
2. Where electrode location or cable routing is not shown, and destination only
is indicated, determine exact locations, routing, and lengths required to meet
project conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Examine equipment and building finishes that are to receive grounding and
bonding material for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
GENERAL
A.
Comply with the requirements of the NEC, this Section and the Drawings.
B.
Install grounding and bonding material according to manufacturer's instructions.
Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
C.
Use the following connection methods unless otherwise specified or indicated on
the Drawings:
1. Use exothermic weld grounding connections for underground or concealed
connections of dissimilar materials.
2. Use exothermic weld or compression grounding connections for underground
or concealed connections of like materials.
P35-140 Vol2-177
3. Use exothermic weld, compression, or bolted grounding connections for
accessible connections.
4. Make bolted connections using bolts, nuts, flat washers, and toothed lock
washers suitable for the connector and the installation environment;
acceptable materials include high strength silicon bronze and 18-8 alloy
stainless steel.
5. Make irreversible bolted connections using 18-8 alloy stainless steel tamperresistant bolts and tamper-resistant nuts along with flat washers, and toothed
lock washers. Tamper-resistant nuts and bolts must resist loosening with
common tools; acceptable tamper-resistant fasteners include penta-head,
break-away, and oval designs.
D.
Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and
bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for
connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not
indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B. Use a calibrated torque wrench.
E.
Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure
for compression connectors. Follow connector manufacturer’s installation
instructions and use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the
connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed.
F.
Install exothermic welds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces
indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
G.
Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action
or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and
connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and
make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum to steel connections with stainless steel separators and
mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum to galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper
jumpers and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material to
prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
H.
Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529, Hangers and Supports for
Electrical Systems.
P35-140 Vol2-178
3.4
MAIN GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A.
Concrete Encased Electrode: Where available, use the building concrete grade
beam or strip footing to make a concrete encased main grounding electrode; use
either copper ground cable or reinforcing steel as follows:
1. Install a continuous ground cable in the bottom one-third of the grade beam
around the entire perimeter of the building. Use ground cable as indicated on
the Drawings, not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required by the
NEC, and not smaller than 4 AWG. Space cable from the bottom and sides of
the grade beam so it has at least 2 inches of concrete coverage.
Bond the reinforcing bars together using bare copper ground cable jumpers
that are either exothermically welded to the reinforcing bars or connected
using hydraulically compressed tap connectors. Use jumpers compatible with
the tap fitting that are not smaller than the grounding electrode cable required
by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.
B.
Supplemental Electrodes: Install one or more of the following supplemental
grounding electrodes to obtain the required ground resistance or to establish a
main grounding electrode that is separate from the lightning protection ground.
1. Install one or more chemical ground rods located 5 ft outside the building
perimeter and at least 6 ft from any lightning protection grounding. Install
ground rods in 6 inch diameter augered holes with at least 10 ft separation
between rods. Backfill each hole with a slurry of ground electrode backfill
material in accordance with the chemical ground rod manufacturer’s
instructions. Install protective cover box, suitable for the traffic at the location,
over each electrode.
2. Install a bare copper ground cable not smaller than the grounding electrode
cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 2 AWG, not less than 20 ft
long, buried not less than 30 inches deep adjacent to the building foundation.
Encase the electrode in a 2 inch envelope of ground electrode backfill
material slurry.
3. Install a bare copper ground cable not smaller than the grounding electrode
cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG at least 20 ft long in
the concrete envelope for the building electrical service conduits. Position
ground cable in concrete to provide not less than 2 inches cover on all sides.
C.
Bond exterior underground metal fire protection and potable water service pipes
to the main ground electrode bar; use pipe grounding fittings and ground cable as
indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode cable
required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG. Make bond to each water pipe
at an accessible location within 5 ft of where it enters the structure. Comply with
NEC requirements for bonding around water meters and insulating joints.
D.
Bond the nearest building perimeter structural steel column or effectively
grounded metal structure to the main ground electrode ground bar; use ground
P35-140 Vol2-179
cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the grounding electrode
cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.
3.5
3.6
E.
Bond each interior metal piping system to the main ground electrode bar; use pipe
grounding fittings and ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller
than the grounding electrode cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4
AWG. Make bond to each pipe at an accessible location.
F.
Bond each building perimeter structural steel column to the main grounding
electrode use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the
grounding electrode cable required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.
G.
Label each conductor connected to the main ground electrode ground bar or main
ground electrode ground bar extensions.
CIRCUIT AND SYSTEM GROUNDING
A.
Connect the service entrance equipment ground bus to the main electrode ground
bar; use ground cable as indicated on the Drawings, or not smaller than the
grounding electrode conductor required by the NEC and not smaller than 4 AWG.
B.
In the service entrance equipment, connect the neutral bus to the ground bus
using a bonding jumper not smaller than the grounding electrode conductor
required by the NEC; do not use a bonding screw for this purpose. Make no other
neutral-to-ground connections on the load side of the service entrance
disconnect.
ENCLOSURE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A.
Provide permanent and effective equipment, enclosure, and raceway grounding in
accordance with NEC requirements and as further specified or shown on the
Drawings.
B.
Provide an equipment ground bar, separate from any neutral bar, in all
switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers,
starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc., for grounding the enclosure and for
connecting other equipment and raceway ground conductors. Make connections
to the ground bar using mechanical lugs or compression lugs.
C.
Make connections and couplings on metallic conduit systems wrench tight.
D.
Bonding Bushings:
1. Install bonding bushings on metallic conduit containing circuits rated 100
amperes and higher.
2. Install bonding bushings on metallic conduits entering enclosures through
concentric, eccentric or oversize knockouts.
P35-140 Vol2-180
3. Install bonding bushings on metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic
enclosure without effective electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded
bushings.
4. Bond conduit bonding bushing lug to the equipment ground bar or ground lug
in switchgear, panelboards, transformers, motor control centers, starters,
disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. Size bonding jumpers in accordance with
the NEC.
E.
Provide an insulated equipment grounding conductor for each feeder and branch
circuit.
1. Install the grounding conductor within the common conduit or raceway with
the related phase and neutral conductors and connect to the grounding
terminal or grounding bus in each box or cabinet.
2. Size equipment ground conductor in accordance with the NEC or as shown
on the Drawings.
3.7
F.
In each 15 or 20 ampere branch circuit outlet box and junction box, install a green
colored washer head grounding screw with a 12 AWG equipment grounding
conductor pigtail.
G.
Connect receptacle grounding terminals to the equipment ground system using
minimum 12 AWG equipment grounding conductor. Do not use a "self-grounding"
receptacle strap as the only equipment grounding path.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
General: Perform on-site verification, certification and acceptance testing of the
grounding installation during construction. Verification and testing will be
witnessed by designated LANL representatives.
B.
Before work is concealed verify and certify that the following grounding
installations have been made correctly:
1. The building grounding electrode system. This includes the bonding of the
foundation reinforcing bars, bonding of the structural steel columns, and
bonding of other metallic systems and other grounding electrode systems.
2. Ground plates and grounding bars.
3. All other underground grounding installations.
C.
Acceptance Testing: Perform acceptance testing and submit written reports.
1. Perform ground-impedance measurements using the "fall-of-potential"
method in accordance with IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,
Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.
P35-140 Vol2-181
Use instrumentation specifically designed for ground impedance testing.
Provide sufficient spacing of test electrodes so that the plotted curves flatten
in the 62% area of the distance between the item under test and the current
electrode. When sufficient spacing of electrodes is impractical for the "fall-ofpotential" method, perform ground-impedance measurements using either
the "intersecting curves method" or the "slope method", referenced in IEEE
Std. 81. Investigate and correct ground resistances that exceed the following
values:
a.
D.
Service rated 50 kVA or less: as required by the NEC
Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of the ground resistance
at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that
may affect test results. Describe any measures taken to improve test results.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-182
SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.3
Furnish and install, hangers, supports, anchors, concrete bases, and other
positive fastenings for electrical components such that gravity loads are safely
transferred to the structure.
Furnish and install hangers and supports that conform to the requirements of the
following codes and standards:
1.
NFPA 70, National Electric Code (NEC)
2.
IBC, International Building Code
3.
ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
4.
NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical
Contracting
5.
Metal Framing Manufacturers Association
MFMA-4, Metal Framing Standards Publication
b.
MFMA-102, Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing
Where a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) has requirements for
such products, provide products that are NRTL listed and labeled for the
application, installation condition, and the environment in which installed.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with project submittal procedures.
1.
1.4
a.
Catalog Data: Submit catalog data for each type of product specified.
Include information substantiating equivalent corrosion resistance to zinc
coated steel of alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material
characteristic.
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
PART 2
2.1
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1.
PRODUCTS.
COATINGS AND MATERIALS
A.
Furnish products for use indoors protected with zinc coating or with treatment of
equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or
inherent material characteristic.
B.
Furnish products for use outdoors or in damp or corrosive indoor locations with
hot-dip galvanized coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance
P35-140 Vol2-183
using approved alternative treatment, finish, or material such as stainless steel
with inherent corrosion resistant characteristics.
2.2
2.3
2.4
RACEWAY SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Furnish supports as described below for the installation of raceway systems.
B.
Use pressed steel, single bolt hangers to support individual RGS, IMC or EMT
conduits from threaded rods or beam clamps. Manufacturer: Steel City “6H_ B
Series.”
C.
For individual runs of EMT up to 1-inch trade size above accessible ceilings, use
spring steel conduit clips with positive snap closure. Manufacturer: ERICO
CADDY “M Series”.
D.
Use malleable iron conduit clamps to secure individual RGS, IMC or EMT conduit
runs across, parallel, or perpendicular to beams, channels and angle supports.
Manufacturer: Steel City “RC, EC, and PC Series”.
E.
Use two-piece carbon steel riser clamps for individual vertical conduits passing
through floors. Manufacturer: Kindorf “C-210 Series”.
F.
Use snap-on type one-hole steel straps to secure individual conduits up to 2-inch
trade size to flat, dry interior surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B “1210 Series” for RGS
and IMC and “4100 Series” for EMT.
G.
Use one-hole malleable iron straps to secure individual conduits up to 4-inch
trade size to flat, dry interior surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B “1275 Series”.
H.
Use one-hole malleable iron straps and conduit spacers to secure individual
conduits to flat exterior or damp flat interior surfaces. Manufacturer: T&B “1275
Series” straps with 1350 Series” spacers.
I.
Support multiple parallel horizontal conduits with trapeze hangers fabricated from
framing channel materials specified below.
OUTLET BOX SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Furnish pre-fabricated sheet steel brackets to support outlet boxes from metal
studs in dry-wall construction.
B.
Single outlet boxes: Provide brackets that are inset to allow for dry-wall ring and
have a far-side support leg. Manufacturer: ERICO CADDY “H Series” or “MEB1”
attached with “SMS8” low-profile self-tapping screws.
C.
Multiple outlet boxes: Provide brackets that are inset to allow for dry-wall rings
and span from stud to stud. Manufacturer: ERICO CADDY “RBS Series”
attached with “SMS8” low-profile self-tapping screws
HANGER RODS
A.
Furnish mild steel rods that conform to ASTM A 307, Standard Specification for
Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength.
B.
Furnish rods that are threaded on both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous
threaded with UNC (coarse) thread pitch.
P35-140 Vol2-184
C.
2.5
FASTENERS
A.
B.
2.6
2.7
Provide swivel hangers to eliminate inelastic bending of hanger rods that are not
seismically braced.
Pre-set Concrete Inserts
1.
Furnish pre-set concrete inserts as shown on the Drawings.
2.
Manufacturers:
a.
Continuous inserts for wood forms: B-Line “B22I-12” or longer.
b.
Spot inserts for wood forms or metal decks: B-Line “B2500” with
“N2500” nut, “B2501”
Post-installed Concrete Anchors
1.
Furnish post-installed expansion, adhesive, and undercut concrete and
masonry anchors as shown on the Drawings and Section [03 1512, Post
Installed Concrete Anchors – High Confidence] [and/or] [03 1534, Post
Installed Concrete Anchors – Normal Confidence].
2.
Power-actuated threaded studs: Use zinc-plated carbon steel or stainless
steel suitable for the intended service:
a.
1/4-20 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti X-W6
b.
3/8-16 threaded stud: Manufacturer: Hilti W10
FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS
A.
Furnish U-channel framing systems that conform to MFMA-4 and are fabricated
using minimum 12-gage steel, with 9/16 inch diameter holes, from 1-1/2 to 1-7/8
inches on center, in the surface opposite the “U” opening.
B.
Furnish fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of
the same manufacturer. Use two-piece, single bolt type conduit straps on Uchannel supports.
C.
Manufacturers: Unistrut, B-Line, Superstrut.
FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A.
Furnish shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled
from U-channel components.
B.
Furnish steel brackets fabricated from angles, channels, and other standard
structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
GENERAL
A.
Install hangers and supports according to the NEC, IBC, NECA 1, the
requirements in this Section, and specific supporting requirements in other
Sections.
B.
Conform to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for selection and
installation of hangers and supports.
P35-140 Vol2-185
3.2
C.
Do not use wire or perforated strap for permanent supports.
D.
Refer to Section 26 0533 - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems for
required flexible sections where raceways cross building expansion joints and
where raceways connect to equipment.
E.
Do not support conduits, boxes, raceways, etc. from ceiling suspension wires.
EXAMINATION
A.
3.3
Examine surfaces to receive hangers and supports for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the system.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
FASTENERS
A.
Pre-set inserts: Install pre-set inserts for anchoring to reinforced concrete slabs,
sides of reinforced concrete beams, and reinforced concrete walls.
B.
Post-installed concrete anchors: Install in accordance with Section [03 1512,
Post Installed Concrete Anchors – High Confidence] [03 1534, Post Installed
Concrete Anchors – Normal Confidence] and the product’s ICC-ES report
conditions of use.
C.
Masonry screw anchors: Use in accordance with NECA 1 and the product’s ICCES report conditions of use.
D.
Power-actuated threaded studs:
1.
Use only to fasten clips or straps for individual RMC or IMC conduits 11/2 inches trade size and smaller or EMT 2-1/2 inches trade size and
smaller.
2.
Install in accordance with the product’s ICC-ES report conditions of use
and the manufacturer’s instructions using recommended tools and loads.
3.
Use only in uncracked concrete.
4.
Install to provide embedment as indicated on the Drawings.
E.
Hollow wall anchors: Use hollow wall anchors for fastening to wallboard, plaster
or paneling.
F.
Toggle bolt anchors: Use toggle bolt anchors for fastening to block, wallboard, or
plaster.
G.
Use wood screws for fastening to wood construction.
H.
Use beam clamps for fastening to structural metal beams, joists, and purlins.
I.
1.
Install a restraining strap at each beam clamp. Wrap the restraining strap
around the beam flange not less than 1 inch. Where purlins or beams do
not provide a secure lip for the restraining strap, secure the strap with a
self-tapping screw or by through-bolting.
2.
Use a locknut on each beam clamp set screw.
Use self-tapping screws or machine bolts, nuts, and washers for fastening to
metal studs or metal surfaces.
P35-140 Vol2-186
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
J.
The use of lead-cinch drop in anchors is not allowed.
K.
Torque threaded fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions.
RACEWAY SUPPORTS.
A.
Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as
necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other
hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and
conduits.
B.
Support three or more parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze
hangers.
C.
Support individual horizontal raceways by separate conduit hangers.
D.
Do not support conduits from ceiling suspension wires.
BOXES AND CABINETS
A.
Support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure, or by approved
brackets or bar hangers, as shown on the Drawings or as required. Where bar
hangers are used, attach the bar to structure on opposite sides of the box.
B.
In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be
supported separately except where used for fixture support.
C.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards as shown on the Drawings or
as required.
FRAMING CHANNEL SYSTEMS
A.
Select and install framing channel systems in accordance with MFMA-103.
B.
Use framing channel to support electrical equipment that is mounted free of
walls.
C.
Use framing channel to support equipment mounted on walls that do not have
sufficient strength to resist pull-out or wallowing out of equipment mounting bolts.
HANGER RODS
A.
Use minimum 3/8-inch diameter threaded rod; use larger diameter rod as
indicated on the Drawings, in other Sections, or in the supported equipment
manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B.
Install a locknut at every hanger rod connection.
C.
Install swivel hangers at the top of hanger rods that are not seismically braced.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-187
SECTION 26 0533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Conduits and fittings
B.
Outlet boxes
C.
Pull and junction boxes
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with project submittal procedures:
1.
1.3
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.
B.
Provide products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in
which installed.
RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING
A.
PART 2
2.1
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 – Standard
Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.2
Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing floor boxes. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500 – Substitution
Procedures.
COATINGS
A.
Provide products with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion
resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material
characteristic that is suitable for the environment in which the product will be
installed and used.
P35-140 Vol2-188
2.3
2.4
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING AND FITTINGS (EMT)
A.
Furnish galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT) that conforms to UL797 –
Electrical Metallic Tubing, NEMA C80.3 – Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
B.
Furnish compression or set-screw type fittings that meet the requirements of
UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings,
Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish
insulated throat connectors.
PVC COATED GALVINIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A.
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Furnish schedule 40 galvanized rigid steel conduit with a PVC coating for
locations specified on the drawings and as specified herein. Provide OCAL or
equal.
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Furnish galvanized steel flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL1
– Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit.
B.
Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron fittings that meet the requirements of UL514B –
Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal
Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated
throat connectors.
LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Furnish liquid-tight flexible metal conduit that meets the requirements of UL360 –
Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit, Electrical.
B.
Furnish zinc-plated malleable iron or zinc-plated steel liquid-tight fittings that meet
the requirements of UL514B – Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and
ANSI/NEMA FB1 – Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and
Cable Assemblies. Furnish insulated throat connectors.
INSULATING BUSHINGS
A.
Provide NRTL listed insulating bushings with 105 ºC rated insulation.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type IB.
GROUNDING BUSHINGS
A.
Provide NRTL listed, galvanized malleable iron, 150 ºC rated insulated throat
grounding bushings with lay-in type ground cable lugs.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type BLG.
P35-140 Vol2-189
2.9
2.10
2.11
EXPANSION FITTINGS
A.
Furnish NRTL listed expansion fittings with hot dipped galvanized malleable iron
body, factory installed packing and a bonding jumper.
B.
Manufacturer: O-Z/Gedney, Type AX, TX or EXE with Type BJ bonding jumper.
RACEWAY MEASURING TAPE
A.
Furnish raceway measuring tape with permanently printed measurements in onefoot increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.
B.
Manufacturer: Greenlee “39243”.
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Provide outlet boxes selected for specific installations using the guidance in NEMA
OS 3, Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes, and the
requirements of this Section.
B.
For dry locations provide galvanized steel outlet boxes that comply with UL
Standard 514-A – Metallic Outlet Boxes and ANSI/NEMA OS1 – Sheet-Steel Outlet
Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
C.
1.
For luminaire outlets use 4 inch x 1-1/2 inch deep octagonal boxes with
fixture stud attachment as required to support luminaires.
2.
For flush outlets in stud walls or above-grade cast-in-place concrete walls use
4 inch square x 1-1/2 inch deep boxes; provide deeper boxes or multiple
gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide raised device covers that
match the thickness of the wallboard and the number of devices. Provide
supplemental box supports to prevent movement of the box.
3.
For flush outlets in above-grade masonry walls use masonry boxes with
conduit knockouts. Provide boxes with depth suitable for the masonry unit
size. Provide multiple gang boxes as required by the number of devices.
4.
For surface outlet boxes in EMT raceway systems, use 4 inch x 2-1/8 inch
deep square boxes. Provide deeper boxes or multiple gang boxes as
required to fit devices. Provide square surface covers that match the installed
device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.
For damp or wet locations and for surface-mounted RMC or IMC raceway systems,
provide outlet boxes that comply with UL Standard 498 and 514, ANSI/NEMA FB1.
1.
For lighting fixture outlets use 4 inch x 2-1/16 inch deep round cast gray or
malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs.
P35-140 Vol2-190
2.
2.12
For flush or surface wall-mounted outlets, use 4-11/16 square, 2-11/16 inch
deep cast gray or malleable iron boxes with threaded hubs. Provide multiple
gang boxes as required to fit devices. Provide gasketed cast gray or
malleable iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers that match the installed
device and have not less than two holes for securing the device to the cover.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
For dry locations in clean, non-contamination environments use galvanized sheet
steel pull and junction boxes that comply with UL Standard 50 Type 1 and the NEC
as to size and construction. Use boxes not less than 4 inches square x 1-1/2
inches deep with screw-secured covers. Provide larger boxes as required by the
number and size of conduits and conductors.
B.
For dry locations in dusty or possible contamination (e.g. beryllium, explosives, or
uranium) environments use galvanized steel pull and junction boxes that comply
with UL Standard 50 Type 12 and the NEC as to size and construction. Use boxes
not less than 6 inches square x 4 inches deep with gasketed covers. Provide larger
boxes as required by the number and size of conduits and conductors.
C.
For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs up to 3/4 inch trade size,
provide 4-11/16 inches square, 2-11/16 inches deep cast gray or malleable iron
pull and junction boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed cast gray or malleable
iron or cast copper-free aluminum covers.
D.
For damp or wet, non-corrosive locations, in conduit runs 1 inch trade size and
larger, provide galvanized sheet-steel pull and junction boxes and covers that
comply with UL 50 Type 3R.
E.
For in-ground, non-metallic, open-bottom handholes use products that are NRTLlisted to ANSI/SCTE 77 – Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity.
1.
Material: Polymer concrete.
2.
Minimum ANSI/SCTE 77 load rating:
a. Located in sidewalks: Tier 8.
b. Located in driveways, parking lots, and off-roadway locations: Tier 15.
3.
Size: Up to 30” x 48”
4.
Cover: Non-skid cover with stainless steel cover bolts.
5.
Identification: Permanent mark or logo on cover prominently identifying the
function of the enclosure in accordance with NEC requirements.
6.
Manufacturer: Quazite “Style PC, PG, or PT”
P35-140 Vol2-191
F.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Provide connection points for equipment grounding conductors in each box.
Examine surfaces to receive raceways and boxes for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GENERAL
A.
Install complete systems of raceways and boxes for wiring systems.
B.
Install raceways and boxes according to NECA 1 – Standard Practices for Good
Workmanship in Electrical Construction, NECA 101 – Standard for Installing Steel
Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT), NECA 111 – Standard for Installing Nonmetallic
Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC), the NEC, the manufacturer’s instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
C.
Raceway termination points and box locations shown on the Drawings are in
approximate locations unless dimensioned. Verify locations before rough-in.
D.
Raceway routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless
dimensioned. Coordinate routing with structure and with work of other trades.
Route as required for a complete wiring system.
E.
Ground and bond raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 0526 – Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
F.
Support raceways and boxes in accordance with the requirements the National
Electrical Code, Section 26 0529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems,
and Section 26 0548 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
G.
Identify raceways and boxes as required in Section 26 0553 – Identification for
Electrical Systems.
H.
Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
I.
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes or raceways.
CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
For low-voltage wiring systems (less than 1000 volts) use conduit materials
according to the NEC and the following:
1.
Outdoors - underground:
P35-140 Vol2-192
a. Direct buried: Use RNC, plastic-coated RMC, tape-wrapped RMC, or
tape-wrapped IMC. Do not use RNC where subject to physical damage.
Install with 24 inches minimum cover from top of conduit to finished grade
or top of paving.
2.
Outdoors - exposed: Use PVC Coated RMC.
3.
Indoors – exposed outside of designated electrical rooms or
telecommunications rooms:
a. Exposed to severe physical damage during or after installation: Use RMC
or IMC.
b. Exposed to moisture: Use RMC or IMC.
4.
Connection to vibrating equipment (including transformers and hydraulic,
pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment) - Use a minimum
of 24 inches; maximum length as determined by the NEC:
a. Outdoors: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
b. In mechanical rooms: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
c. Wet, damp, or corrosive indoor locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal
conduit.
B.
Use 3/4-inch or larger conduit to enclose multiple conductors larger than 12 AWG.
C.
Conceal conduits, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, with finished walls,
floors and ceilings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install concealed
conduits with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering the
type of building construction and obstructions.
D.
Position parallel underground conduits with not less than 7-1/2 inches center-tocenter separation.
E.
Install expansion fittings where embedded conduits cross building expansion joints.
F.
Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to boxes in damp and wet locations.
G.
Use sealing locknuts, hubs, or similar water-resistant fittings on conduits entering
the top of switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets,
pull boxes, and similar enclosures that are exposed in structures with automatic fire
sprinkler systems.
H.
Install insulating bushings or connectors with an insulated throat to protect
conductors or cables at conduit terminations.
P35-140 Vol2-193
I.
Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe
nonmetallic conduits dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement
to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
J.
Install plastic-coated RMC and fittings according to the NEC and manufacturer's
instructions. Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks
and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.
K.
Do not use RNC 90 degree elbows larger than 2 inch trade size; use plastic-coated
RMC, tape-wrapped RMC, or tape-wrapped IMC for 2-1/2 inch trade size and
larger 90 degree elbows.
L.
Maintain the following minimum clearances between conduit and surfaces with
temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C):
6 inches at perpendicular crossings.
2.
12 inches between parallel runs.
M.
Avoid moisture traps in conduit system; provide junction boxes with drain fitting at
low points in conduit system.
N.
Install corrosion protection tape on metal conduits and fittings in contact with soil
using half-lapped wrappings.
O.
Install grounding bushings at the following locations:
P.
3.4
1.
1.
At every entry to enclosures on metallic conduits containing circuits rated 100
amperes and higher.
2.
On metallic conduits entering enclosures through concentric, eccentric or
oversize knockouts.
3.
On metallic conduits that terminate to a metallic enclosure without effective
electrical connection such as locknuts or threaded bushings.
Install conduit measuring tape in empty raceways. Leave not less than 12 inches
of slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.
OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Install outlet boxes with centers at the following heights unless noted otherwise on
the Drawings:
1.
Receptacle, telephone and data outlets:
a. Common Areas (such as conference and break rooms): 18 inches above
finished floor.
P35-140 Vol2-194
2.
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Light switches: center 48 inches above finished floor and within 6 inches of door frame.
B.
Where the Drawings show outlets as adjacent, align outlet boxes with each other
and group them symmetrically.
C.
Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26
2726, Wiring Devices.
D.
Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
E.
Support boxes independently of conduit.
F.
Install a blank cover plate on each outlet box in which no device is installed.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Install pull and junction boxes as shown on the Drawings and as required for
splices, taps, wire pulling, and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B.
Install pull boxes as required to comply with limits on conduit bends and distance
between pull points in the CONDUIT INSTALLATION article of this Section.
C.
Install indoor pull and junction boxes in accessible locations above accessible
ceilings and in unfinished spaces. Position boxes so covers can be removed.
Place boxes to maintain headroom.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust flush-mounted outlets to make front flush with finished floor, wall, or ceiling
material.
B.
Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
C.
Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by
the manufacturer.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and
finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.
P35-140 Vol2-195
B.
Inspection Points – Provide not less than 2 working days advance notice for the
following inspection points. In the notice identify the particular areas of the Project
for which inspection is requested. Correct deficiencies identified during inspections.
1.
Underground conduits: After conduits have been installed but before
concrete-encasement or trench backfilling commences. Inspection may
include but is not limited to:
a. Correct conduit material and size,
b. Proper conduit spacing and supports,
c. Correct conduit stub-up locations.
d. Conduit connection and coupling integrity
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-196
SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Component identification tags.
B.
Equipment nameplates.
C.
Outlet labels.
D.
Wire markers.
E.
Voltage markers.
F.
Warning signs.
G.
Working space markers.
H.
Underground warning tape.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following:
1. Catalog Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product.
2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols,
letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
3. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions,
indicating special procedures and installation requirements.
1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
PART 2
2.1
Conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA 70E, and
OSHA.
Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with
requirements in the Subcontract Documents, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, with those required by codes, standards, Use consistent
designations throughout Project.
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500, Substitution
Procedures.
P35-140 Vol2-197
2.2
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A.
Furnish component identification tags as specified below to identify electrical
equipment using the system designation, equipment identification, tech area
number, and building number.
B.
Coordinate electrical component identification tag schedule with final equipment
identification scheme for project.
C.
Provide component identification tags with black letters on yellow background
with 2 inches by 3 inches dimensions.
D.
Provide minimum 48 point size lettering.
E.
Provide tags made of one of the following materials:
1. Type 1 (Indoor Applications Only):
a.
Laminated plastic adhesive tape with machine printed letters.
b.
Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady.
2. Type 2:
2.3
a.
Two-ply plastic nameplate with letters engraved through yellow surface
showing black core.
b.
Provide UV stabilized material for outdoor applications.
c.
Manufacturer: Seton Nameplate Corp.
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A.
Furnish equipment nameplates as specified below [and scheduled on the
Drawings] to indicate the following information:
1. Category I nameplates:
a.
Served by nameplates: circuit directory information including circuit
number, equipment identification, location of equipment serving the
item, and the circuit voltage (e.g. 208Y/120V, 120/240V).
b.
Serves nameplates: circuit directory information including circuit
number, equipment identification, location of equipment served, and
the circuit voltage (e.g. 480Y/277V, 208Y/120V, 120/240V).
2. Category II nameplates – general or operational information including basic
instructions or specific operating procedures.
B.
Coordinate equipment nameplate schedule with equipment numbering scheme
provided by Subcontract Technical Representative.
C.
Provide nameplates made of one of the following materials:
1. Type 1 (Indoor Applications Only):
a.
Laminated plastic adhesive tape with machine printed letters.
b.
Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady.
P35-140 Vol2-198
2. Type 2:
a.
Two-ply plates with letters engraved through surface color showing
core color.
b.
Use UV stabilized material for outdoor applications.
c.
Manufacturer: Seton Nameplate Corp.
D.
Provide 10 point minimum size lettering.
E.
Provide colors as follows:
1.
2.4
white letters on black background.
OUTLET LABELS
A.
Furnish a typewritten or machine printed label for each switch and receptacle
outlet indicating circuit number, panelboard, and voltage.
B.
Provide labels of the following materials:
1. Laminated plastic adhesive tape with machine printed letters.
2. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady.
2.5
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Provide wire markers for power, control, instrumentation, alarm, and
communication circuit wires.
B.
Furnish split sleeve, heat-shrinkable sleeve, or self-laminating adhesive wire
markers.
C.
Locate a wire marker on each conductor at switchgear, panelboards, pull boxes,
outlet and junction boxes, and each load connection.
D.
Provide typewritten lettering on wire markers as follows:
1. Power and lighting circuits: as-built branch circuit or feeder circuit number.
2. Control circuits: as-built control wire number indicated on schematic and
interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's wiring diagrams.
E.
2.6
Manufacturer: LEM Products, Inc., Brady, Panduit.
WIRING SYSTEM COLOR CODE LABELS
A.
In buildings with more than one voltage system, provide wiring system color code
labels on each panelboard, switchboard, switchgear, and motor control center.
B.
Provide labels with black, 10-point minimum size lettering on a white background.
C.
Provide information on labels as follows:
P35-140 Vol2-199
THIS BUILDING HAS THIS WIRNG SYSTEMS:
120/240V: BLACK, RED, WHITE
D.
Provide labels of the following materials:
1. Outdoor labels shall be suitable for a high-UV environment.
2. Provide machine-produced custom labels printed using a thermal transfer
process:
a.
Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL969, Marking
and Labeling Systems, and has a high adhesion adhesive back.
b.
Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.
3. Use a suitable label-printing machine to generate labels.
4. Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady.
2.7
WORKING SPACE LABELS
A.
Provide labels indicating required working clearance at electrical equipment that
is likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while
energized and it is impractical mark the NEC-required working space on the floor
B.
Material:
1. Use polyester label stock that is NRTL-recognized to UL969, Marking and
Labeling Systems, and has a high adhesion adhesive back.
2. Use printing ribbon recommended by the label stock manufacturer.
3. Use a suitable thermal transfer process label-printing machine to generate
labels and enter the application-specific information.
C.
Minimum dimensions: 3-1/2 x 1-1/4 inches.
D.
Use the following label design:
NOTICE
Keep area in front of this electrical
equipment clear for 3 feet.
OSHA-NEC regulations.
1. Signal word: “NOTICE” in 24 point minimum white italic letters on safety
blue panel.
E.
2.8
Manufacturer: Brother, Seton, Brady
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A.
Furnish underground warning tape for underground cables, conduits and duct
banks.
P35-140 Vol2-200
B.
Use 6 inch wide, 0.004 inch thick, polyethylene underground warning tape black
lettering and the American Public Works Association background colors:
1. Electric power or lighting: red
2. Telephone/data or alarm: orange
C.
Provide lettering that indicates the type service buried below.
1. Electric: "CAUTION ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW"
2. Telephone/data: "CAUTION TELEPHONE LINE BURIED BELOW"
D.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Manufacturer: Utility Safeguard, LLC.
Examine surfaces to receive identification products for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the
identification products. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completion of finish work.
B.
Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
1. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels
and doors.
2. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment.
3.3
C.
Install electrical identification products only when ambient temperature and
humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by
manufacturer.
D.
Clean surface where electrical identification product is to be placed.
E.
Use manufacturer's recommended adhesive for engraved tags and nameplates.
F.
Place electrical identification products centered and parallel to equipment lines.
COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A.
Install component identification tag [as indicated on the Drawings] on the front of
each piece of electrical equipment including switchgear, transformers,
switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, motor controllers, safety
switches, and enclosed circuit breakers.
B.
Position tags so they can be read from floor or ground.
P35-140 Vol2-201
3.4
3.5
EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
A.
Install equipment nameplate or nameplates on the front of each piece of
electrical equipment including switchgear, transformers, switchboards,
panelboards, motor control centers, motor controllers, safety switches, and
enclosed circuit breakers.
B.
Circuit directory information Category I nameplates may be omitted from
equipment which receives an arc flash and shock hazard warning label that
includes the required circuit directory information.
C.
Position nameplates so they can be read from floor or ground.
OUTLET LABELS
A.
3.6
3.7
Install outlet label on outside of device cover for each receptacle outlet and light
switch.
WIRE MARKERS
A.
Install wire markers on power, control and communication conductors at each
appearance in locations such as pull boxes, outlet boxes, junction boxes,
panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, controllers, safety switches,
enclosed circuit breakers, and load connections.
B.
Position markers so they can be read from the front of the enclosure.
WORKING SPACE FLOOR MARKERS
A.
Install floor marking paint on the floor at the locations listed below to indicate the
working space required by the NEC.
1. Front of each low-voltage transformer, switchboard, panelboard, industrial
control panel, motor control center, enclosed circuit breaker, safety switch,
variable frequency motor controller, and magnetic motor controller
enclosure including those furnished with mechanical equipment.
2. Any other equipment likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing,
or maintenance while energized.
B.
Dimensions of working space area shall be as follows:
1. Width: the greater of the width of the equipment or 30 inches.
2. Depth: 3 feet
3.8
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A.
Install underground warning tape in trench above underground conduit, 1 foot
below ground surface.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-202
SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Panelboards for feeder and branch circuit loads.
B.
Load center type panelboards for branch circuit loads.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 3300, Submittal Procedures:
1.
Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing each type panelboard,
accessory item, and component specified. Include data substantiating that
materials comply with specified requirements.
2.
Certification: Submit certification and backup information that panelboard
can perform required functions after a design earthquake as specified in
"SERVICE CONDITIONS" below.
3.
a.
Panelboards designated with Ip greater than 1.0 shall be certified by
the manufacturer to withstand the total lateral seismic force and
seismic relative displacements specified in the International Building
Code (IBC) or ASCE 7 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures.
b.
Manufacturer’s certification shall be based on shake table testing or
experience data (ie, historical data demonstrating acceptable seismic
performance), or by more rigorous analysis providing for equivalent
safety.
c.
Required response spectra shall exceed 1.1 times the in-structure
spectra determined in accordance with IBC AC156 – Acceptance
Criteria for Seismic Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of
Nonstructural Components and Systems.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each panelboard including
dimensioned plans and elevations and component lists. Include front and
side views of enclosure showing overall dimensions, enclosure type,
enclosure finish, unit locations, and conduit entrances. Include the
following:
a.
Enclosure type with details for types other than NEMA Type 1.
P35-140 Vol2-203
1.3
1.4
b.
Bus configuration and current ratings.
c.
Short-circuit current rating of panelboard.
d.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
protective devices and auxiliary components.
4.
Wiring Diagrams: Submit detailing schematic wiring diagrams including
control wiring, and differentiating between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring.
5.
Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Quality
Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, installation, and starting of Product.
6.
Operation and Maintenance Instructions: Submit operation and
maintenance instructions. Include instructions for testing circuit breakers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) for components and installation.
B.
Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment
in which installed.
C.
Comply with NEMA PB 1 Panelboards, NEMA PB 1.1 General Instructions for
Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts
or Less, and NEMA AB 3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.
D.
Comply with UL 67 Panelboards, UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, and
UL 489 Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
E.
The manufacturer of the panelboards shall have an ISO 9001 certified quality
management system.
F.
Furnish products suitable for operation at 7500 ft. altitude.
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 1 Standard
Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction (ANSI) and NECA
407 Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards (ANSI).
B.
Perform receipt inspection of panelboard circuit breakers in accordance with
LANL P 840-1 Procurement Quality. For each panelboard complete a LANL
Form 838c, Quality Assurance Supplement, specifically using clause QC-27
Suspect/Counterfeit Items. Examine each panelboard circuit breaker to verify that
P35-140 Vol2-204
it is genuine, new, and unaltered. Report any suspect/counterfeit circuit breakers
to the LANL Subcontract Technical Representative and the LANL
Suspect/Counterfeit Item Coordinator (SCIC). Indicators of suspect/counterfeit
molded-case circuit breakers include the following:
1.5
1.
Missing date code.
2.
Date code is older than two years, or style is no longer manufactured.
3.
Factory seals broken or removed.
4.
Mislabeled or over-labeled to change size or type.
5.
Non-English text in labels.
6.
Missing or suspect UL sticker; CE is not an acceptable NRTL.
7.
Low quality labeling and/or misspelled words on labels.
8.
Outdated manufacturer’s label or logo, or refurbisher’s name on label.
9.
Not received in original, sealed packaging.
10.
Screwdriver or wrench marks on terminals.
11.
Handle modified to change ampere rating.
12.
Contradicting amperage, voltage, or interrupting ratings.
SERVICE CONDITIONS
A.
Provide panelboards and accessories that will perform satisfactorily in the following
service conditions:
1.
Maximum ambient temperature of 104 °F.
2.
24-hour average temperature not exceeding 86 °F.
a.
PART 2
2.1
Load current harmonic factor not exceeding 5% THD.
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500, Substitution
Procedures.
P35-140 Vol2-205
2.2
PANELBOARDS
A.
Furnish panelboards as indicated on the Drawings and specified in this Section.
B.
Panelboards shall be UL67 listed and shall conform to NEMA PB1.
C.
Main bus rating for the panelboards described in this Section shall not exceed
1200 amperes and main circuit breaker frame size shall not exceed 800
amperes. Refer to Section 26 2413, Switchboards, when main bus rating
exceeds 1200 amperes or main circuit breaker frame size exceeds 800 amperes.
D.
Where practical combine adjacent panelboards into integrated assemblies of 90inch high modular components.
E.
Furnish panelboard cabinets for flush or surface mounted as indicted on the
Drawings.
F.
1.
Furnish NEMA Type 1 enclosures, except where the Drawings or conditions
of installation indicate the following enclosure requirements:
2.
Cabinets shall be not less than 20 inches wide.
3.
Furnish galvanized steel cabinets constructed according to UL 50
requirements.
4.
NEMA 1 boxes shall have removable end walls. NEMA 3, 3S, 4X and 12
boxes shall have end walls welded and sealed.
Furnish trim fronts that meet the strength and rigidity requirements of UL 50.
1.
Each panelboard trim front shall include a door.
2.
Fronts for surface-mounted panels shall be same dimensions as box.
3.
Fronts for flush panels shall overlap boxes at least 1 inch.
4.
Fronts shall have ANSI 49 medium gray enamel electro-deposited over
cleaned, phosphatized steel.
5.
For NEMA 1 panelboards, furnish fronts with hinged door-in-door trim
construction. The front shall contain a smaller lockable door, which when
open, shall provide access to all device handles and rating labels. The
hinged front, when open, shall provide access to all conductors and wiring
terminals. The panelboard door shall open by a single lockable latch; the
entire hinged front trim shall open by removing screws.
6.
Furnish a panelboard circuit directory card in a metal frame mounted inside
the panelboard door. The directory card shall include spaces for circuit
P35-140 Vol2-206
numbers and sufficient spaces to allow each circuit to be described in
sufficient detail to be distinguished from all others.
7.
Furnish cylindrical tumbler type locks for doors. Furnish sliding vault locks
with 3-point latching for enclosures more than 48 inches high. Key all lock
assemblies alike. Furnish two (2) keys with each lock plus spares as
required in the Extra Materials paragraph above.
G.
Furnish panelboard box with dimensions as required to accommodate
compression lugs on cables for the panelboard mains, neutral bar, and circuit
breakers rated 100 amperes and larger. Refer to Section 26 0519 - Low Voltage
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables for compression lug requirements.
H.
Furnish copper equipment ground bus that is adequate for feeder and branch
circuit equipment ground conductors. Bond ground bus to cabinet.
I.
Panelboards having a main circuit breaker shall be NRTL-listed for use as
service entrance equipment.
J.
Equip panelboards with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary
appurtenances, for the future installation of circuit breakers in the “spaces”
scheduled on the Drawings.
K.
Furnish panelboards having NRTL-listed short circuit current ratings not less than
the available fault current indicated on the Drawings. With the exception of
panelboard with a current-limiting main circuit breaker, do not use “series ratings”
for circuit breaker interrupting capacities. The short circuit rating for a
panelboard without a current-limiting main circuit breaker shall not exceed the
lowest interrupting capacity rating of any circuit breaker installed in the
panelboard.
L.
Furnish thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that meet the requirements of UL 489
and NEMA AB 3.
1.
Furnish circuit breakers of the type, rating, and features as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.
Furnish circuit breakers with the following minimum NRTL-listed interrupting
capacities:
a.
120/240V applications: 10,000 amperes, RMS symmetrical
3.
Furnish field adjustable instantaneous trip setting for circuit breakers with
frame size greater than 100 amperes.
4.
Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
5.
Furnish multi-pole breakers with a common trip.
P35-140 Vol2-207
M.
N.
6.
Furnish bolt-on type circuit breakers or circuit breakers that connect to the
panel bus through positive gripping connector jaws and are secured by an
independent mechanical locking device.
7.
Single-pole, 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers intended to switch
fluorescent lighting loads on a regular basis shall have the SWD marking.
8.
Circuit breakers intended to switch high intensity discharge lighting loads on
a regular basis shall have the HID marking.
9.
Furnish UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where
scheduled on Drawings.
10.
Furnish circuit breakers with provisions for connecting the size and number
of conductors indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 26 0519 - Low
Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables for conductor connection
requirements.
Furnish a permanently-installed handle lock-off device for each circuit breaker.
1.
Furnish handle lock-off device that will accept a 1/4-inch padlock shackle.
2.
Securely attach the device to the circuit breaker case; the attachment shall
not depending on a friction fit or the presence of the panelboard front for the
handle lock-off device to remain in place and be functional.
Furnish the following accessories, modifications, or special features for
panelboards as indicated on the Drawings.
1.
Split Bus: Vertical buses of indicated panels divided into two vertical
sections with connections as indicated.
2.
Conduit Covers for Surface Mounted Panels: Same gage and finish as
panel front with flanges for attachment to panel, wall, and the floor.
3.
Contactors in Mains: Mechanically held, with current rating, poles, and
connections as indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Shunt trip: Shunt-trip main circuit breaker or shunt-trip branch circuit
breakers.
5.
Control Power Source: Control power transformer of capacity indicated, for
contactor shunt trip or other devices. Mount in cabinet of panel indicated.
Protect primary with current-limiting fuses. Furnish fused protection of
control circuits.
6.
Extra Gutter Space: Dimensions and arrangement as indicated on the
Drawings.
P35-140 Vol2-208
O.
7.
Gutter Barrier: Arranged to isolate section of gutter as indicated.
8.
Auxiliary Gutter: Conform to UL 870, "Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and
Associated Fittings."
9.
Column Type Panelboard Configuration: Narrow cabinet extended as
wireway to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral
terminal buses.
10.
Neutral bus rated 200% of the phase bus for high harmonic applications.
11.
Subfeed circuit breaker or lug provision as indicated.
12.
Feed-Through Lugs: Sized to accommodate feeders indicated.
13.
Surge Arresters: Refer to Section [26 4100, Lightning Protection] [26 4116,
Lightning Protection for Explosives Facilities].
14.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: Refer to Section 26 4123, Lightning
Protection Surge Arresters and Suppressors, and Section 26 4313,
Transient Voltage Suppressors.
Manufacturers:
1.
Eaton:
a.
2.
Siemens:
a.
3.
3.1
208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “P1”
Square D:
a.
PART 3
208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “PRL1a”
208Y/120 V and 120/240 V: “NQ”
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the control system. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
P35-140 Vol2-209
3.2
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install panelboards where indicated on the Drawings and according to
manufacturer's instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, NECA 407, and the NEC. Have the
manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
B.
Furnish supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 0529
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
C.
Position panelboards so the top circuit breaker handle is not more than 6’-7”
above the surface of the working space in front of the panelboard.
D.
Ground and bond panelboards as required in Section 26 0526 Grounding and
Bonding for Electrical Systems.
E.
At flush panelboards install four 1-inch conduits to junction boxes in accessible
ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. [Install four 1inch conduits to junction boxes in raised floor space.] Install branch circuit
conductors from panelboard spare circuit breakers to junction boxes for future
extension.
F.
Install an auxiliary gutter with permanently installed terminal blocks where a
panel is tapped to a riser at an intermediate location.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.4
Furnish typed circuit directories for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise
directories to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads.
1.
Furnish one hard copy and an electronic copy of the panelboard schedule
to the Facility Manager at project closeout.
2.
Install a plastic-laminated copy of the circuit directory on the inner side of
the panelboard door.
B.
Identify panelboards and install warning signs and arc-flash warning labels as
required in Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems.
C.
Mark floor in front of panelboards to show NEC required working space
according to Section 26 0553, Identification for Electrical Systems..
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Clean, inspect, test, and energize panelboards in accordance with NECA 407.
Exercise each circuit breaker three times to verify smooth mechanical operation.
B.
After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch-up scratches and mars
on finish to match original finish.
P35-140 Vol2-210
3.5
LOAD BALANCING
A.
After Substantial Completion, but not more than two months after Final
Acceptance, conduct load-balancing in accordance with NECA 407 and as
follows:
1.
Do measurements during period of normal working loads as advised by the
User.
2.
Make load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working
schedule of the facility. Arrange with User to avoid disrupting critical
services.
3.
Recheck loads after circuit changes during a normal load period. Record
all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-211
SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Receptacles
2. Wall plates
3. Occupancy sensing lighting controls
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following:
1. Catalog Data
2. Wiring Diagrams
1.3
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC).
B.
Furnish products listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which
installed.
C.
Manufacturers of products addressed in this Section shall maintain an ISO 9001
or ISO 9002 certification.
RECEIVING, STORING, AND PROTECTING
A.
1.5
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1, Standard
Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring
installations, to interface installation of wiring devices with other work.
B.
Field locations of walls, partitions, doors, windows and equipment may vary from
locations shown on the Drawings. Prior to locating sleeves, boxes and chases for
roughing-in of conduit and equipment, coordinate with other trades to determine
exact field location of the above items. Verify direction of door swings so that local
switches are properly located on the strike side of the doorway.
C.
Coordinate wiring device colors with Architect.
D.
Coordinate receptacle requirements for items of equipment provided to the
Project under other sections of this Specification or by the Owner.
P35-140 Vol2-212
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.2
PRODUCTS
Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500, Substitution
Procedures.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Provide back and side wired, screw pressure terminal, straight-blade and locking
type, receptacles as indicated on the drawings.
1. Receptacles shall meet the performance and design requirements of Federal
Specification WC596 and UL Standard 498, Electrical Attachment Plugs and
Receptacles.
2. Receptacle configurations shall be in accordance with NEMA WD 6.
3. Catalog numbers in this article do not indicate receptacle color; see
FINISHES article below.
2.3
B.
For 120 volt convenience receptacles connected to general purpose 20 amperes
branch circuits, provide straight-blade NEMA 5-15R, 15 amperes, 125 volts,
grounding duplex receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and
ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer:
Hubbell “HBL5262”.
C.
Where indicated on the Drawings for special-purpose 120 volt duplex receptacles
connected to 20 amperes branch circuits, provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20
amperes, 125 volts, grounding duplex receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap,
ground terminal, and ground contacts shall be formed from one piece of brass
alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5362”.
D.
For 120 volt receptacles connected to individual 20 amperes branch circuits
provide straight-blade NEMA 5-20R, 20 amperes, 125 volts, grounding single
receptacles. Receptacle mounting strap, ground terminal, and ground contact
shall be formed from one piece of brass alloy. Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL5361”.
E.
For ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles provide straight-blade
NEMA 5-15R, 15 amperes, 125 volts, grounding, “feed through” type, self-testing
GFCI, weather-resistant, duplex receptacle that meet the requirements of UL
Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. Provide units that can be
installed in a 2-3/4-inch deep outlet box without an adapter. Manufacturer: Hubbell
“GFR5262SG.”
SNAP SWITCHES
A.
Provide single pole, double pole, three-way, four-way and illuminated handle snap
switches as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Switches shall be rated 20 amperes, 120-277 volts AC, back and side wired,
screw pressure terminal, quiet type AC switch with yoke grounding screw.
Switches shall meet the performance and design requirements of UL Standard
20, General Use Snap Switches, and Federal Specification WS896.
P35-140 Vol2-213
2.4
2.5
C.
Catalog numbers in this article do not indicate receptacle color; see FINISHES
article below.
D.
Manufacturer: Hubbell “HBL1220” series
WALL PLATES
A.
For flush mounted interior receptacles and wall switches, provide 0.032 inch thick
(minimum) brushed 302/304 alloy stainless steel smooth wall plates that meet the
requirements of Federal Specification WP-455A. Manufacturer: Hubbell “S”
series.
B.
For surface mounted interior receptacles and switches, furnish galvanized steel 4
inch square raised surface covers. Receptacles installed in raised covers shall be
secured by more than one screw. Manufacturer: RACO “800” series.
C.
For GFCI receptacles in damp locations provide weatherproof, cast aluminum,
hinged, self-closing device covers. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP26” or “WPFS26”
D.
For GFCI receptacles in wet locations provide cast aluminum, hinged, “extra duty”
self-closing device covers that are weatherproof whether or not the attachment
plug cap is inserted. Manufacturer: Hubbell “WP826” or “WP826H”
E.
Provide single, multi-gang, and combination type wall plates that mate and match
with corresponding wiring devices.
F.
Use metal plate-securing screws to match plate finish.
OCCUPANCY-SENSING LIGHT SWITCHES
A.
Provide an NRTL-listed, dual voltage (120 and 277 volts), passive infrared
automatic occupancy-sensing wall switch with 180 degree coverage, built-in light
level sensor, adjustable time delay, adjustable sensitivity, and a switching
technology that is suitable for electronic ballast inrush currents. Device shall have
dual manual buttons and dual relays for user-controlled dual-level lighting
switching. Light level sensor shall hold off the second relay when adequate
daylighting is present in the office. Relay contacts shall be rated for at least 1200
watts ballast load at 277 volts. Manufacturer: WattStopper “PW-200-U.”
B.
Catalog numbers also are given on the plans. They doin this article do not
indicate device color; see FINISHES article below.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A.
Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper locations and heights.
B.
Verify that outlet boxes in walls or ceilings are positioned in accordance with NEC
Section 314.20.
C.
Verify that outlet boxes for GFCI receptacle outlets are in locations that will be
accessible after Owner-supplied equipment is in place.
D.
Verify wall openings are neatly cut, comply with NEC Section 314.21, and will be
completely covered by wall plates.
P35-140 Vol2-214
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
E.
Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for
connection to wiring devices.
F.
Clean debris from outlet boxes before installing devices.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install products following manufacturer's instructions. Have the manufacturer’s
installation instructions available at the construction site.
B.
Install devices plumb, level, and secure.
C.
Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, mount devices flush, with long
dimension vertical, and grounding point of receptacles on top. Group adjacent
switches and receptacles under single, multi-gang wall plates.
D.
Do not use the duplex/split-wire break-off tabs in receptacles as circuit conductors
for connecting downstream devices.
E.
Cover devices and assemblies during painting.
F.
Install wall plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets after painting is
complete.
G.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished
areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
H.
Install Class 2 wiring for occupancy-sensing lighting/receptacle control system in
accordance with NEC Article 725.
I.
Install a grounded conductor (neutral) to each switch/controller wall box for each
controlled circuit.
J.
Connect the designated neutral terminal/wire on an electronic lighting control
device to the grounded (neutral) conductor for the controlled circuit. Do not use
the equipment grounding conductor in place of the grounded conductor.
GROUNDING
A.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
B.
Connect isolated ground receptacle grounding terminal to the isolated grounding
conductor.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify wiring devices with circuit number as required in Section 26 0553,
Identification for Electrical Systems.
B.
Identify both ends of occupancy-sensing lighting/receptacle control system
Class 2 control cables with wire markers indicating “from” and “to” information.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each wiring device for defects before installing.
P35-140 Vol2-215
B.
Operate each operable device at least six times with circuit energized; verify
proper operation.
C.
Test 15 and 20 ampere receptacles for proper polarity and ground continuity
using an NRTL listed test device that impresses a momentary current of at
least 15 amperes on the branch circuit conductors and equipment grounding path.
D.
Test ground-fault circuit interrupter receptacle operation with both local and
remote fault simulations according to manufacturer recommendations.
1. Verify that GFCI will trip at 5 ±1 mA current
2. Verify that GFCI does not trip at less than 1.8 mA current.
E.
3.6
Replace damaged or defective wiring devices.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Clean devices and wall plates. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates
or devices.
B.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
C.
Adjust time-out controls each occupancy sensing light switches to the following
settings:
1. Private offices, open offices, laboratories, and restrooms: longest time out
setting, but not more than 30 minutes.
2. Break rooms, storage rooms, and copy machine rooms: 5-minute time-out
setting.
3. Conference rooms: 10-minute time-out setting.
4. Corridors and lobbies: 15-minute time-out setting.
D.
Adjust ambient light sensor in occupancy sensors to hold off or reduce the electric
lighting when daylighting exceeds 80% of the design illuminance at the work area.
(For example, in an office with a design illuminance of 50 footcandles, the
ambient light sensor should keep the lights off as long as the daylighting exceeds
40 footcandles.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-216
SECTION 26 4300
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1
1.1
1.2
GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Type 1 surge protective devices (SPDs) for the protection of electrical power
circuits not exceeding 1000 V.
B.
SPDs for the protection of signal, data, antenna, and control lines.
SUBMITTALS
Submit the following:
A.
Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing SPDs. Include data substantiating
that proposed products comply with specified requirements.
B.
Certifications: For Type 1 SPDs submit UL 1449 Third Edition listing certification
showing:
1.
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
2.
Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes
3.
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV)
4.
Nominal discharge current rating (In)
5.
Type 1 Device Listing
C.
Electrical Diagrams: Submit internal wiring diagram for each Type 1 SPD
illustrating all modes of protection, all field connections, and manufacturer’s
recommended wire and circuit breaker sizes.
D.
Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s installation instruction manual.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s operation and
maintenance instructions.
F.
Samples: Upon request, submit an un-encapsulated but complete Type 1 SPD for
visual inspection; proprietary technology included. MOV type & quantity shall
reflect kA ratings on catalog data.
P35-140 Vol2-217
1.3
1.4
G.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings detailing dimensions and weight of each
individual Type 1 SPD intended for mounting external to an electrical assembly.
H.
Warranty: Submit a warranty, mutually executed by the SPD manufacturer and the
subcontractor, agreeing to replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship
within five years, beginning on the date of LANL acceptance. This warranty is in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies LANL may have under
the Subcontract Documents.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and NFPA 780 – Standard for the
Installation of Lightning Protection Systems for components and installation.
B.
Provide SPDs that are listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory
(NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment in which
installed. Listing standard shall be the following as applicable:
ANSI/UL 1449 – Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices, 3rd
Edition.
2.
UL 497B – Standard for Safety for Protectors for Data Communications and
Fire Alarm Circuits.
3.
UL 497C – Standard for Safety for Protectors for Coaxial Communications
Circuits.
C.
Manufacturer shall maintain an ISO 9001 or 9002 certification.
D.
Provide SPDs suitable for use at a nominal altitude of 7500 ft.
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
PART 2
2.1
1.
Receive, store, protect, and handle products according to the manufacturer’s
instructions and NECA 1 Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical
Construction.
PRODUCTS
TYPE 1 SPD
A.
Provide Type 1 SPD that is NRTL labeled to UL 1449 3rd Edition.
B.
Type 1 SPD shall have a UL 1449 3rd Edition Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)
not less than the following:
System Voltage
208Y/120
208Y/120
Circuit Size
Greater than 400 A
400 A and less
Minimum SCCR
200 kA,
100 kA,
P35-140 Vol2-218
120/240
Any
100 kA.
C.
SPD shall be suitable for use without external or supplemental overcurrent
protection. Every suppression component of every mode shall be protected by
internal overcurrent and thermal over-temperature controls. SPDs relying upon
external or supplementary overcurrent protection will not be considered.
D.
SPD shall have a UL 1449 3rd Edition nominal discharge current rating (In) of not
less than 20 kA.
E.
Suppression components shall be thermally-protected 32 mm or larger metal-oxide
varistors (MOVs).
F.
Type 1 SPD shall provide surge current paths for at least the following modes of
protection:
G.
1.
L-N, L-G, and N-G for Wye-connected systems;
2.
L-L, L-G in Delta-connected systems.
Type 1 SPD UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) shall not exceed
the following:
System Voltage
240/120
H.
J.
L-L
1200V
N-G
700V
Allowable System Voltage Fluctuation (%)
25%
MCOV
150V
Type 1 SPD shall include not less than the following monitoring and diagnostic
features that report the protection status of the SPD:
1.
One green LED indicator per phase and one red service LED.
2.
For Type 1 SPD with a surge current capacity greater than 100 kA provide an
audible alarm with on/off silence function, and one set of NO/NC dry contacts
that change state under any fault condition.
Provide each individual SPD intended for mounting external to the electrical
assembly with a NEMA enclosure that is suitable for the installation location and
environment.
1.
K.
L-G
700V
UL 1449 3rd Edition Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) rating shall
be not less than the following:
System Voltage
240/120
I.
L-N
700V
NEMA 1, 12, 3R, and 4 enclosures shall be constructed of powder-coated
steel.
Provide Type 1 SPD with an integral disconnect switch when a 3-pole circuit
breaker is not available for connecting the SPD to the protected bus.
P35-140 Vol2-219
L.
Each Type 1 SPD shall pass the manufacturing and production line tests required
in UL 1449 3rd Edition.
M.
Manufacturers:
1.
Advanced Protection Technologies:
•
2.
Eaton:
•
3.
3.1
3.2
Surge Current Capability 100 KA or less: “TPS3 11.”
Square D:
•
PART 3
Surge Current Capability 100 KA or less: “CVX100” series.
Siemens:
•
4.
Surge Current Capability 100 KA or less: “XDS” series.
Surge Current Capability 100 KA or less: “IMA” and “EMA” series.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify mounting area is ready for SPDs.
B.
Verify that circuit rough-in is at correct location.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install SPDs where indicated on the Drawings or specified below and according to
the manufacturer's instructions, and the National Electrical Code. Have the
manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the construction site.
B.
Service Entrance Equipment:
1.
Install a Type 1 SPD that is [factory installed and integrated into] [individually
mounted immediately adjacent to] each low-voltage service equipment.
2.
Connect SPD on the load side of the service entrance disconnecting means.
3.
Provide a dedicated 3-pole 60 A circuit breaker in the service equipment as
the SPD interface device. Locate the circuit breaker in the immediate
proximity of the SPD.
*
C.
Connect Type 1 SPDs to protect each ungrounded (phase) and grounded (neutral)
conductor.
P35-140 Vol2-220
D.
Install UL 497C listed coaxial SPD for each for antenna and RF signal line that
enters the structure or exits the structure to serve external detached equipment or
other detached structures. Where such antenna and RF signal circuits are longer
than 100 ft install UL 497C listed coaxial SPD at both ends of the circuit.
E.
Install each SPD so it will be accessible for inspection and maintenance and so the
condition monitoring indicator will be visible without requiring the removal of cover
plates.
F.
Install SPDs in a manner that will not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed
lugs, or sub-feeder circuit breakers in panelboards.
G.
Install each SPD with minimum possible conductor length and a maximum
conductor length of 18 inches.
H.
3.3
1.
Twist conductors tightly together and keep runs as straight as possible with
no sharp bends or kinks.
2.
Rearrange circuit breakers in the protected equipment as required to
minimize conductor length to the SPD.
Provide low-impedance grounding for SPDs.
1.
Use approved means to make connections from the SPD to the point where
the electrical power system grounded conductor is bonded to the grounding
electrode conductor.
2.
If the SPD is more than 20 ft away from the electrical system bonding point,
make one or more supplementary grounding electrode connections at the
surge protective device location. Use the building “main grounding electrode
ground bar”, “main grounding electrode ground bar extensions”, effectively
grounded building structural steel, and grounded water pipes as
supplementary grounding electrodes.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and
finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.
B.
Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by
the manufacturer.
C.
Verify that each SPD is correctly connected and that all condition monitoring
indicators operate properly.
D.
Verify correct grounding of each SPD.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-221
SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
SECTION INCLUDES
1. Interior luminaires and accessories
2. Lamps
3. Ballasts
B.
LANL PERFORMED WORK
1. None
C.
DEFINITIONS:
1. Luminaire: A luminaire is a complete lighting unit including light source(s) and
parts required to distribute the light, position and protect the light source(s), and
connect the light source(s) to the power supply.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with project submittal procedures:
1. Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing luminaires, lamps, and ballasts.
Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements.
Arrange data for luminaires in the order of fixture designation.
2. Performance Curves/Data:
a. Submit certified photometric data for each type of luminaire.
b. Submit supply-air, return-air, heat-removal, and sound performance data for
air handling luminaires.
3. Drawings: Submit shop drawings for non-standard luminaires.
4. Warranty: Submit warranties for luminaires and for electronic ballasts.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the International Building
Code (IBC) for components and installation.
B.
Provide luminaires listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory
(NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environments in which
installed.
C.
Use manufacturers that are experienced in manufacturing luminaires, lamps and
ballasts similar to those indicated for this Project and have a record of successful
in-service performance.
P35-140 Vol2-222
D.
1.4
1.5
Coordinate luminaires, mounting hardware and trim with the ceiling system.
WARRANTY
A.
Electronic Ballasts: Submit a warranty, mutually executed by the ballast
manufacturer and the installer, agreeing to replace electronic ballasts that fail in
materials or workmanship within five years, beginning on the date of LANL
acceptance. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and
remedies LANL may have under the Subcontract Documents.
B.
LED Luminaires: Submit a warranty, mutually executed by the LED luminaire
manufacturer and the installer, agreeing to replace LED luminaires that fail in
materials or workmanship within five years, beginning on the date of LANL
acceptance. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and
remedies LANL may have under the Subcontract Documents.
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
A.
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to the following NECA
National Electrical Installation Standards:
1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial
Lighting Systems (ANSI)
2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting
Systems (ANSI)
PART 2
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.2
2.3
PRODUCTS
Refer to Section 01 2500, Substitution Procedures.
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A.
Furnish interior luminaires that comply with requirements specified below, indicated
on the Drawings, and as required to meet conditions of installation.
B.
Metal parts shall be free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.
C.
Metal components shall be formed and supported to prevent sagging and warping.
D.
Luminaires shall conform to UL 1598 - Luminaires. Provide product with damp
location listing or wet location listing as required by installation location.
LAMPS
A.
Furnish lamps that comply with requirements specified below and the luminaire
schedule on the Drawings.
B.
Conform to the NEMA C78 standard applicable to each type of lamp.
C.
All linear fluorescent lamps, fluorescent compact lamps, and high pressure sodium
lamps shall pass the EPA Toxic Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) test for
mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1,
Procedure for Linear Fluorescent LAML Sample Preparation and TCLP Extraction.
P35-140 Vol2-223
D.
2.4
Manufacturers: GE Lighting, North American Phillips, Sylvania
FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS
A.
For fluorescent luminaires provide NRTL-listed electronic fluorescent ballasts that
have the following characteristics:
1. Conform to UL 935 - Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts and NEMA C82.11 – High
Frequency Electronic Lamp Ballasts (ANSI)
2. Ballast protection: Class P
3. Starting method: programmed rapid-start
4. Power factor: at least 95 percent
5. Ballast factor: at least 0.87
6. Crest factor: 1.7 or less
7. Line current total harmonic distortion (THD): less than 15 percent
8. Minimum operating frequency: 40 kHz
9. Sound rating: Class A
10. Minimum starting temperature: 0 degrees F with T5 and T8 lamps
11. Transient voltage protection: ANSI C62.41 location A2
12. EMI/RFI compliance: FCC 47 CFR Part 18, Non-Consumer
B.
PART 3
3.1
Manufacturers: Advance, GE Lighting, Universal, Sylvania
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install interior lighting system in accordance with the NEC, manufacturer's
installation instructions, approved shop drawings, and the following NECA National
Electrical Installation Standards:
1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial
Lighting Systems (ANSI)
3.2
B.
Have the manufacturer’s installation instructions available at the Project site.
C.
Mounting heights specified or indicated on the Drawings are to the bottom of the
luminaire for ceiling-mounted fixtures and to the center of the luminaire for wallmounted fixtures.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Make electrical connections, clean interiors and exteriors of luminaires, install
lamps, energize and test luminaires, inspect interior lighting system, and deliver
spare parts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the following NECA
National Electrical Installation Standards:
P35-140 Vol2-224
1. NECA/IESNA 500, Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial
Lighting Systems (ANSI)
2. NECA/IESNA 502, Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting
Systems (ANSI)
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-225
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
General
This Section includes the following:
Exterior luminaires with light emitting diodes and drivers.
Poles and accessories.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CCT: Correlated color temperature
B.
CRI: Color-rendering index.
C.
LED: Light emitting diode.
D.
LER: Luminaire efficacy rating
E.
Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast or driver housing if provided.
F.
Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
G.
Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.
1.4
A.
and
SUMMARY
1.
2.
1.3
including
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of
lighting unit designation, include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective
projected lighted area, and verification of indicated parameters.
Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.
Details of installation and construction.
Luminaire materials.
Photometric data based on certified laboratory tests of each luminaire type,
complete with indicated lamps, LED ballasts, and accessories.
P35-140 Vol2-226
a.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Drivers including energy-efficient data.
Drivers and transformers, including energy-efficiency data.
Sources, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.
Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is
suitable for components involved.
Anchor bolts for poles.
Manufactured pole foundations.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by
manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National
Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, require
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.
Substitutions: For products designated “Or approved Equal” in the Exterior Lighting
Device Schedule the contractor may elect to propose alternate lighting fixtures by
providing all items listed in A. Product Data, and B. Shop Drawings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Fixture information must be submitted to the Landscape Architect a minimum of
ten (10) business days prior to the bid date.
Failure to submit before the bid date deadline constitutes a guarantee that the
base specified products will be supplied.
Substitutions received after the bid date will not be evaluated.
Photometric performance and appearance must be identical to original
specification before considerations will be made.
Itemized estimated uninstalled fixture costs are to be provided for the originally
specified items as well as the proposed substitution before considerations will be
made.
D.
Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior
Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include the required source and
associated power/driver/ballast for system operation.
E.
Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles,
certifying that products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4
and that load imposed by luminaire has been included in design.
F.
Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.
G.
Field quality-control test reports.
P35-140 Vol2-227
H.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For [luminaires][ and poles] [luminaire lowering
devices] to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
I.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications:
Provided by
manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer
Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B.
Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches (300 mm) above grade
and vegetation. Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air
circulation.
C.
Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation.
For poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
1.7
A.
WARRANTY
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that
fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within
specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage,
vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty
coverage.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Warranty Period for Luminaires: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion:
5 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Warranty Period for Color Retention:
5 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Warranty Period for Removable LED Sources: Replace sources and drivers that
fail within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion; furnish sources and
drivers that fail within the second 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
P35-140 Vol2-228
5.
1.8
A.
Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail
in finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty
period, but not less than 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lamps: 10% of initial quantity of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10% of initial quantity
of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least of each type.
Drivers: 10% of initial quantity of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
Ballasts: 10% of initial quantity of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
Globes and Guards: 10% of initial quantity of each type and rating installed.
Furnish at least one of each type.
Bollards: Furnish two additional bollards (OQA)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
B.
In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings
that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
1.
2.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.
Alternate manufacturers may be proposed per the substitution requirements in
section 1.4 Section C.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES
A.
Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet
locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated
for luminaires.
C.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
P35-140 Vol2-229
D.
Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
E.
Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage
under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools.
Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from
falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors
shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast
when door opens.
G.
Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H.
Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure
to heat, and UV radiation.
I.
Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block
light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
2.
3.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K.
Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to
seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L.
Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of
pole or support materials.
M.
Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes.
1.
2.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair
paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove
mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPCSP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats
of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
a.
Color: As selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range.
P35-140 Vol2-230
N.
Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal
Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium
satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or
thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
a.
O.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and
ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel,
but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.
1.
Label shall include the following source and power characteristics:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.3
A.
Color: By Contracting Officer as selected.
“USES ONLY” and include specific lamp type.
“Voltage limited” for LED fixtures which have been factory limited.
List removable sources type, wattage, and manufacturer.
CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
LED DRIVERS, TRANSFORMERS, AND POWER SUPPLIES
Description: Electronic solid state type.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Minimum ten-year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature
and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges up to 15,000
Electrolytic capacitors shall operate at least 20 degrees C below the capacitor’s
maximum temperature rating when the driver is under fully-loaded conditions and
under maximum case temperature.
Maximum inrush current of 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers.
Withstand up to a 4,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined
by ANSI C62.41 Category A.
Manufactured in a facility that employ ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10 percent line
voltage input.
Total Harmonic Distortion less than 20 percent and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum
allowable THD requirements.
Drivers shall track evenly across multiple fixtures and all light levels.
Constant current drivers shall provide models shall support from 200mA to
2.1Amps (in 10mA steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists and support LED
arrays up to 40W.
Constant voltage drivers shall provide models to support from 10Volts to 40Volts
(in 0.5V steps) to ensure a compatible driver exists and support LED arrays up to
40W.
P35-140 Vol2-231
13.
14.
2.4
Configuration tool shall be available to optimize light level, efficacy, and thermal
performance for LED fixtures.
Driver shall be capable of operating from a supply voltage of 120 through 277VAC
at 60Hz for 3-wire models.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4.
B.
Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting
requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with
support components.
1.
2.
3.
Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.
Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated.
Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
D.
Handhole: Oval-Shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover
secured by stainless-steel captive screws.
E.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base
flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.5
ALUMINUM POLES
A.
Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429, Alloy 6063-T6
with access handhole in pole wall.
B.
Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch (13-mm) threaded lug, complying with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems,"
listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that
Section, and accessible through handhole.
C.
Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1.
2.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium
satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural
Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or
thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
a.
Color: As selected by Contracting Officer from manufacturer's full range.
P35-140 Vol2-232
2.6
A.
2.7
A.
POLE ACCESSORIES
Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting
bolts and nuts. Finish same as pole.
REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL EXTERIOR LIGHTING DEVICES
Refer to the Exterior Lighting Fixture Schedule and following fixture cut sheets for
individual fixture requirements:
P35-140 Vol2-233
OR APPROVED EQUAL
P35-140 Vol2-234
OR APPROVED EQUAL
P35-140 Vol2-235
P35-140 Vol2-236
P35-140 Vol2-237
OR APPROVED EQUAL
P35-140 Vol2-238
P35-140 Vol2-239
P35-140 Vol2-240
OR APPROVED EQUAL
P35-140 Vol2-241
P35-140 Vol2-242
P35-140 Vol2-243
P35-140 Vol2-244
P35-140 Vol2-245
P35-140 Vol2-246
P35-140 Vol2-247
P35-140 Vol2-248
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A.
Install lamps in each luminaire.
B.
Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.
1.
C.
3.2
Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for
the application and approved by manufacturer.
Rough adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming prior to final aiming
session:
1.
Provide labor for after dark (evening) final adjustment of all lights and controls.
2.
Final aiming requires the area to be free of construction debris and equipment.
3.
Include adjustment of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by
artificial light sources.
POLE INSTALLATION
A.
Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and
their mounting provisions on the pole.
B.
Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface
and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.
Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.
Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.
C.
Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates
furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing
requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D.
Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to
torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding
concrete grout firmly packed to fill space.
Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated.
Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.
Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum
of 6-inch-wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of
adjacent concrete slab. Fill unpaved ring with material per drawings to a level 1 inch
below top of concrete slab.
P35-140 Vol2-249
F.
3.3
Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).
BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A.
Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.
B.
Install on concrete foundation per manufacturers recommendations. Cast conduit into
base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and rubbing
smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4
A.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES
Install on concrete foundation per manufacturers recommendations. Cast conduit into
base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and
finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
CORROSION PREVENTION
A.
Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a
dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B.
Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical
Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping
plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.6
A.
GROUNDING
Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
B.
Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
3.7
A.
Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated.
Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to
grounding system.
Install grounding electrode for each pole.
Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.
Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
P35-140 Vol2-250
B.
Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing
luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source.
1.
3.8
A.
Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 265600
P35-140 Vol2-251
SECTION 32 31 20
ORNAMENTAL STEEL FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes: Ornamental welded steel fencing panels fabricated with
galvanized flat bars and round rods welded into modular, open grille fencing panels,
including steel fence posts and gates.
B.
Related sections:
1.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete walls and footings for
support of fence posts.
ASTM International(ASTM):
1.
ASTM A36 – Carbon Structural Steel.
2.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
3.
ASTM A500 - Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
4.
ASTM D822 - Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related
Coatings.
5.
ASTM D2794 - Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid
Deformation (Impact).
6.
ASTM D3363 - Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal Procedures:
1.
Product data for components and accessories.
2.
Shop drawings showing layout, dimensions, spacing of components and
anchorage and installation details.
3.
Sample: 8 by 10 inches [203 by 254 mm] minimum size sample of fence panel
illustrating design, fabrication workmanship, and selected color coating.
4.
Copy of warranty specified in Paragraph 1.4
P35-140 Vol2-252
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Closeout Procedures:
1.
Factory finish: 20-year warranty against cracking, peeling, and blistering under
normal use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Ametco Manufacturing Corporation, 4326 Hamann Parkway, P.O. Box 1210,
Willoughby, Ohio 44096; 800-362-1360.
Or approved equal
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Steel bar stock: ASTM A36.
B.
Steel tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, and water-reducing and plasticizing additives.
2.3
FENCE SYSTEM
A.
Type: Ornamental steel fencing system consisting of modular open grille fencing
panels fabricated by welding flat steel bars and rods, supported by steel posts and
gates and gate hardware;
B.
Fence panels: Fabricated from galvanized steel rods, flat bars and louvers welded
to form an open grille pattern.
Fence Panel - Shadow 80
1.
Horizontal fixed louver bars: Formed louver shaped bars, 1-31/32 by 1/16 inch
[50 by 2 mm], spaced at 1-13/16 inch [46 mm]. Extend louver flange to allow
80percent direct visual screening.
2.
Cross rods: 5/32 inch [4 mm] diameter rods welded perpendicular to back side
of louver bars and spaced at 5-7/32 inches [133 mm].
3.
Perimeter side support bars: 2 by 1/4 inch [51 by 6 mm] flat bars.
4.
Panel height: as shown on plans.
5.
Panel width: as shown on plans
C. Posts: Galvanized and square steel tubes.
1.
Size: 4 by 4 inches [102 by 102] mm.
2.
Length: as shown on planes
3.
Weld flat steel bar top caps to tubular posts.
P35-140 Vol2-253
2.4
2.5
GATES
A.
Provide gates of type and size indicated on Drawings. Equip gates with
manufacturer's standard hardware as required for complete functional operation.
B.
Type: Hinged swinging double gate.
Construction: Welded frame, as shown on plans, steel tubing with open grille
steel panels to match fencing material.
2.
Nominal size: as shown on plans.
3.
Hardware:
a.
Hinges: Size and type as determined by manufacturer. Provide 2 hinges
for each leaf up to 6 feet [1829 mm] high and 1 additional hinge for each
additional 24 inches [610 mm] in height or fraction thereof.
b.
Latch: 3/4 inch [19 mm] diameter slide bolt to accommodate padlock.
c.
For double gates provide padlockable, 5/8 inch [16 mm] diameter center
cane bolt assembly and strike.
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.6
1.
Fasteners: Stainless steel bolts of type, size, and spacing as recommended by
fence manufacturer for specific condition.
FACTORY FINISH
A.
Steel fence panels and posts shall be hot-dip galvanized to 1.25 ounces per square
foot minimum zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Standard size
components shall receive polyester powder coating.
B.
Polyester powder coating: Electrostatically applied colored polyester powder
coating heat cured to chemically bond finish to metal substrate.
4.
Minimum hardness measured in accordance with ASTM D3363: 2H.
5.
Direct impact resistance tested in accordance with ASTM D2794: Withstand
160 inch-pounds.
6.
Salt spray resistance tested in accordance with ASTM B117: No undercutting,
rusting, or blistering after 500 hours in 5 percent salt spray at 95 degrees F and
95 percent relative humidity and after 1000 hours less than [3/16 inch] [5 mm]
undercutting.
7.
Weatherability tested in accordance with ASTM D822: No film failure and 88
percent gloss retention after 1 year exposure in South Florida with test panels
tilted at 45 degrees.
C. Color: Moss Green
P35-140 Vol2-254
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Prior to fabrication, field verify required dimensions.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fencing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and
approved shop drawings.
B.
Install fence posts plumb and level by embedding post directly in concrete footing.
Temporarily brace fence posts with 2 by 4 wood supports until concreteis set.
C. Do not install bent, bowed, or otherwise damaged panels. Remove damaged
components from site and replace.
D. Secure fence panels with standard stainless steel bolts
E.
Gates:
1.
F.
Install gates and adjust hardware for smooth operation.
Touch-up damaged finish with paint supplied by manufacturer and matching original
coating.
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-255
SECTION 321600 –
RESIN BONDED AGGREGATE PAVING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY:
A.
This Section includes:
1. Cold applied clear resin bound aggregate paving system.
2. Aluminum Edging
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 03 Section 033000 Cast-in-place Concrete
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualifications: Utilize an installer approved and trained by the manufacturer of
the resin bonded aggregate paving system, having experience with other
projects of the scope and scale of the work described in this section.
B.
Certifications: Certification by manufacturer that installer is an approved
applicator of the playground surfacing system.
C.
Submittals:
1. Provide manufacturer’s product information for each specified material.
Information shall include complete product data, material safety
certifications, color charts and warranties.
2. Samples for verification:
a. Bonded Aggregate Paving – (3) 5” x 5” samples for verification color
and aggregate size.
b. Aluminum Edging - (3) 1’-0” long samples of aluminum edging and
associated materials and fasteners
C.
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials
and execution.
1. Mockups: The contractor shall be required to constructed up to (3) 5’-0”
x5’-0” sample panels, for each paver type showing full range of pavers
sizes and colors selected. Build mockups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work, including
same base construction, special features for expansion joints, and
contiguous work as indicated.
a.
Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or,
if not indicated, as directed by M-NCPPC Project Manager.
b.
Notify M-NCPPC Project Manager one week in advance of the
dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
P35-140 Vol2-256
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.4
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and
workmanship.
Obtain M-NCPPC Project Manager's acceptance of mockups
before start of final unit of Work.
Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an
undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed
Work.
When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
Approved mockups may not become part of the completed Work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened,
undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to
harmful environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 40
degrees F (4 degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 85 degrees F
(30 degrees C).
1.5
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Install surfacing system when minimum
ambient temperature is 40 degrees F (1 degree C) and maximum ambient
temperature is 85 degrees F (30 degrees C). Do not install in steady or
heavy rain.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty
provisions.
B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance,
manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized
company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a
limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.
1.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of completion of work.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
Cold applied clear resin bound aggregate system
P35-140 Vol2-257
A.
Manufacturer:
Chameleon Ways, Inc.
PO Box 387
Center Valley, PA 18034
Phone: 877-426-5687
Fax: 610-797-4654
E-mail: [email protected]
Web-site: www.chameleonways.com
Or approved equal
B.
2.2
Material:
Addaset
Lucerne Silver 6mm
Aluminum Edge Restraint
A.
Material: 1” x 2 1/4” (25.4 mm x 57.15 mm) Asphalt Edge
Color: Mill Finish
B.
Manufacturer:
Permaloc Corperation
13505 Barry Street
Holland, MI 49424
Phone: 1.800.356.9660
Fax: 616.399.9770
www.permaloc.com
Or approved equal
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove substances from bituminous concrete substrates that
could impair bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form
oil, and laitance. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust,
debris, and loose particle
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
B.
INSTALLATION OF EDGING: Install alumininum edging as shown on
plans and as per manufacturer’s instructions
MIXING: Pre-weighed ADDASET resin should be thoroughly mixed with a
slow speed pan mixer for a minimum of 45 seconds. The pre weighed
bags of aggregate should be placed in the suitable mechanical mixer and
P35-140 Vol2-258
dry mixed for 5 seconds prior to the addition of the ADDASET resin. The
mixed ADDASET resin should then be immediately added to the premixed aggregate in a suitable mechanical mixer. Mix for 1 minute then
discharge into a suitable wheelbarrow and move immediately to the point
of application.
C.
MIXING EQUIPMENT: Mixing equipment shall be a mortar mixer of
ample size to place pre-measured aggregates and resin. Mixer shall
have ample power to thoroughly blend aggregates and resin into
homogonous mixture within 1 minute.
D.
Color: ADDASET resin is a clear/straw colored liquid.
E.
SHELF LIFE OF RESIN: If material is stored at 50°F (10°C) the shelf life
is approximately 3 months. If material is stored in warm conditions the
shelf life could be as little as 3 days.
F.
PLACEMENT: The mixture should be spread evenly across the prepared
surface at the required depth using a lute. The surface should then be
hand toweled using sufficient downward pressure to compact and provide
for a smooth finish.
G.
REQUIRED DEPTH: (3mm) grade ADDASET--------⅝” (16mm) depth
H.
SET TIME:
I.
APPLICATION TEMPERATURE: Recommended temperature of
application should be between 40°F and 85°F
(5°C and 30°C)
50°F
68°F
86°F
(10°C)---Pedestrians 5 hours---Vehicles 12 hours
(20°C)---Pedestrians 4 hours---Vehicles 10 hours
(30°C)---Pedestrians 3 hours---Vehicles 6-8 hours
END OF SECTION 321600
P35-140 Vol2-259
SECTION 33 7119
ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS
PART 1
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Underground ducts for medium-voltage power utility systems.
B.
Conduits for branch circuits.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
1.4
1.
Catalog Data: Submit catalog data describing pre-cast manhole(s), manhole
frame(s) and lid(s), ladders, and cable racks. Include data substantiating
that materials comply with specified requirements.
2.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record survey locations of
ductbanks, new and existing manholes, and places where ductbanks cross
other underground systems.
A.
Comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and IEEE C2 – National
Electrical Safety Code (NESC) for components and installation.
B.
Furnish products that are listed and labeled by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) for the application, installation condition, and the environment
in which installed.
RECEIVING, STORING AND PROTECTING
PART 2
Receive, store, and protect, and handle products according to NECA 1 –
Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction and
NECA/NEMA 605 – Recommended Practice for Installing Underground
Nonmetallic Utility Duct.
PRODUCTS
PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
2.2
Submit the following:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.1
GENERAL
Alternate products may be accepted; follow Section 01 2500 – Substitution
Procedures.
RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Conduit: PVC per UL651 – Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and NEMA
TC 2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit, ANSI C80.3.
B.
Fittings: Solvent-welded socket fittings meeting UL514C – Non-Metallic Fittings
for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, and NEMA TC 3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid
PVC Conduit and Tubing.
P35-140 Vol2-260
2.3
2.4
DUCT SPACERS
A.
Duct spacers must provide 3-inch separations between ducts and minimum 3
inch concrete coverage on bottom sides and top.
B.
Manufacturers: Underground Devices "Wunpeece”.
UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A.
Furnish detectable underground warning tape for underground duct banks.
B.
Use aluminum-backed, 0.005 inch thick, underground warning tape with the
following background colors:
C.
1.
Electric: Red
2.
Telephone/Communications: Orange
Lettering shall be black and indicate the type service buried below.
1. Electric: "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW."
2. Telephone/Communications: "CAUTION BURIED COMMUNICATION LINE
BELOW."
D.
E.
2.5
2.6
2.7
Use tape width appropriate for the burial depth:
1.
3 inch wide tape for up to 18 inches depth.
2.
6-inch wide tape for up to 24 inches depth.
Manufacturer: 3M, Seton, Presco.
RACEWAY MEASURING/PULLING TAPE
A.
Raceway measuring/pulling tape shall have permanently printed measurements
in one-foot increments and minimum 1200 lb average breaking strength.
B.
Manufacturer: Greenlee “39243”
DUCT PLUGS
A.
Soft, expansible gasket material compressed with non-metallic plates and bolts
to produce a positive seal against water and gas in unused ducts.
B.
Manufacturer: Condux, Jackmoon USA, Inc.
DUCT SEALANT
A.
Expandable foam duct sealant kits to prevent water and gas from entering
manholes, vaults, or structures.
B.
Manufacturer: 3M “Scotchcast 4416 Duct Sealing Kit”
P35-140 Vol2-261
PART 3
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Install underground ductbank systems according to the NEC, the NESC,
NECA/NEMA 605 – Recommended Practice for installing Underground
Nonmetallic Utility Duct, and the requirements in this Section.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A.
3.3
EXECUTION
Make excavation for manholes and underground ductbanks to depth required
and to provide solid bearing.
1.
Set excavation so top of power ductbank concrete encasement will be not
less than 24 inches below finished grade or paving.
2.
Set excavation so top of telephone ductbank concrete encasement will be
not less than 24 inches below finished grade or paving.
3.
Set excavation so top of secure communications ductbank concrete
encasement will not be less than 36 inches below finished grade or paving.
B.
Grade trenches for underground ductbanks to a minimum of 4 inches per 100 ft.
toward manholes.
C.
Keep excavation dry during installation of work.
D.
Make trenches of sufficient width to receive work to be installed and provide
specified concrete coverage on sides.
E.
Backfill excavations for ductbanks and manholes in 6 inch layers; use soil
excavated; remove roots, rocks and sharp objects. Furnish coarse sand as
required for additional backfill material.
F.
Moisture condition backfill soil and compact in accordance with ASTM D 1557 to
95% of maximum density under paved areas and 90% of maximum density
under unpaved areas.
G.
Overfill excavations to allow for settlement.
UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK INSTALLATION
A.
Install the number and size of ducts as indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Use the following duct materials:
1.
Use Schedule 40 rigid non-metallic conduit, for low voltage lighting, power
or control wiring.
2.
Use plastic-coated galvanized rigid steel conduit, tape-wrapped galvanized
intermediate metal conduit, or tape-wrapped rigid galvanized steel conduit
for elbow and riser where ducts turn up to the surface.
C.
Grade ducts to drain to manholes; do not trap ducts.
D.
Where ducts turn up into the surface, use RGS, IMC or PVC coated rigid steel
elbows with minimum 36 inches radius; terminate in a coupling 4 inches above
P35-140 Vol2-262
the surface or equipment pad. Install zinc-plated malleable iron pipe plug in each
unused duct stub-up.
3.4
3.5
E.
Support ducts with duct spacers placed at intervals not exceeding 5 ft.
F.
Ground metallic conduit exposed to contact according to the requirements of
NFPA 70. Use exothermic welded connections for concealed grounding
connections.
G.
After ducts have been successfully inspected and tested:
1.
Backfill the trench as described in the EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
paragraph above, and
2.
Place underground warning tape in backfill 12 inches below the surface.
H.
Install measuring and pulling tape in each duct. Leave not less than 12 inches of
slack at each end of the tape. Secure each end of tape.
I.
Stub-Up Connections:
1.
Use rigid steel conduit or IMC for outdoor stub-up connections. Non-metallic
conduit may be used for indoor stub-up connections that are not subject to
physical damage.
2.
Extend conduits through concrete pad or floor for connection to freestanding
equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and
set flush with the finished floor or equipment pad.
3.
Where equipment connections are not made under this Subcontract, install
threaded insert plugs set flush with the floor.
DUCT PLUGGING AND SEALING
A.
Install duct plugs in both ends of all unused ducts that cross any natural gas line.
B.
Install duct sealant in both ends of all ducts containing cables that cross any
natural gas line.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings and
finishes are without damage or deterioration at final inspection.
B.
Inspection Points – Provide not less than 2 working days advance notice.
1.
Underground ducts: After ducts have been installed and before trench
backfilling commences. Inspections may be scheduled for one or more
segments. Inspection may include but is not limited to:
a. Correct duct material, quantity, and size,
b. Proper depth and grading of ducts,
c. Correct duct stub-up locations,
END OF SECTION
P35-140 Vol2-263
SECTION 334713 – POND AND RESERVOIR LINERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
A.
1.2
This specification covers the technical requirements for the furnishing and installation of
the geosynthetic clay liner described herein. All materials used shall meet the
requirements of this specification, and all work shall be performed in accordance with the
procedures provided herein and the contract drawings.
DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this specification guideline, the following terms are defined below:
1.3
A.
Geosynthetic Clay Liner (GCL) A manufactured hydraulic barrier consisting of clay
bonded to a layer or layers of geosynthetics.
B.
Geomembrane An essentially impermeable geosynthetic composed of one or more
geosynthetic sheets.
C.
Geotextile Any permeable geosynthetic comprised solely of textiles.
D.
Minimum Average Roll Value For geosynthetics, the value calculated as the typical value
minus two (2) standard deviations from documented quality control test results for a
defined population from one specific test method associated with one specific property.
E.
Overlap Where two adjacent GCL panels contact, the distance measuring perpendicular
from the overlying edge of one panel to the underlying edge of the other.
SUBMITALS
A.
With the bid, the Contractor shall furnish the following information:
1. Conceptual description of the proposed plan for placement of the GCL panels
over the area of installation.
2. GCL manufacturer's MQC Plan for documenting compliance to Sections 2.1 and
2.2 of these specifications.
3. GCL manufacturer’s historical data for multi-axial tension testing of the laminated
GCL per Section 2.1E.
4. A copy of GCL manufacturer's ISO quality Certificate of Registration.
B. At the Engineer's or Owner’s request the Contractor shall furnish:
1. A representative sample of the GCLs.
P35-140 Vol2-264
C.
D.
1.5
1.6
2. A project reference list for the GCL(s) consisting of the principal details of at least
ten projects.
Upon shipment, the Contractor shall furnish the GCL manufacturer's Quality
Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC) certifications to verify that the materials
supplied for the project are in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
As installation proceeds, the Contractor shall submit certificates of subgrade acceptance,
signed by the Contractor and CQA Inspector (see Sections 1.6 and 3.3) for each area
that is covered by the GCL.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
GCL Manufacturer must have produced at least 30 million square metres of GCL within
the past three years, including at least 3 million square metres with 65
N/10cm
peel
strength.
B.
The GCL Installer must either have installed at least 100,000 square metres of GCL,
or must provide to the Engineer satisfactory evidence, through similar experience in
the installation of other types of geosynthetics, that the GCL will be installed in a
competent, professional manner.
CONSTURCTION QUALITY ASSURANCE(CQA)
A.
The Owner and Engineer shall provide a third-party inspector for CQA of the GCL
installation. The inspector shall be an individual or company who is independent from the
manufacturer and installer, who shall be responsible for monitoring and documenting
activities related to the CQA of the GCL, throughout installation. The inspector shall have
provided CQA services for the installation of the proposed or similar GCL for at least 5
completed projects totaling not less than 100,000 square metres.
B.
Testing of the GCL, as necessary to support the CQA effort, shall be performed by a
third party laboratory retained by the Contractor and independent from the GCL
manufacturer and installer. The laboratory shall have provided GCL CQA testing of the
proposed or similar GCL for at least 5 completed projects totaling not less than 100,000
square metres.
C.
CQA shall be provided in accordance with the GCL CQA Manual provided by the
engineer.
2.0 PRODUCTS
A.
The GCL shall consist of a layer of granular sodium bentonite clay needlepunched
between two geotextiles and laminated to a thin flexible membrane liner (Bentomat CL).
The GCL shall comply with all of the criteria listed in this Section.
B.
Bentonite shall be a high-swelling sodium bentonite, with a minimum swell index of 24
mL/2g and a maximum fluid loss of 18 mL.
C.
Bentonite shall have a granular consistency (15 percent max. passing a No. 200 sieve
[75
m ]), to e ns ur
during handling and installation.
P35-140 Vol2-265
D.
2.1
2.2
Prior to using an alternate GCL, the Contractor must furnish independent test results
demonstrating that the proposed alternate material meets all requirements of this
specification. Contractor must also provide evidence of successful use of the proposed
alternate material on past similar projects. This evidence can include past direct shear
results against similar materials under similar site conditions, and/or past
permeability/compatibility test results with a similar leachate or waste stream. The
Contractor also must obtain prior approval of the alternative GCL by the Project Engineer.
MATERIALS
A.
Acceptable GCL product is Bentomat CL, as manufactured by CETCO Limited or an
engineer-approved equal.
B.
The GCL and its components shall have the properties shown in the Bentomat CL
Certified Properties table.
C.
The moisture content of the bentonite in the finished GCL shall be between 20 and 40
percent, to ensure uniform bentonite distribution, consistent needlepunch density, and
adequate electrical conductivity to maximize leak location survey sensitivity.
D.
GCL shall be needlepunch-reinforced, with a minimum peel strength of 65 N/10cm. To
maximize large-displacement shear strength, GCL reinforcement shall be achieved solely
through needlepunching, without any supplemental heat treatment.
PRODUCT QUALITY DOCUMENTATION
The GCL manufacturer shall provide the Contractor or other designated party with manufacturing
QA/QC certifications for each shipment of GCL. The certifications shall be signed by a
responsible party employed by the GCL manufacturer and shall include:
2.3
A.
Certificates of analysis for the bentonite clay used in GCL production demonstrating
compliance with the swell index and fluid loss values shown in the Bentomat CL Certified
Properties table.
B.
Manufacturer’s test data for finished GCL product(s) demonstrating compliance with the
values shown in the Bentomat CL Certified Properties table.
C.
GCL lot and roll numbers supplied for the project (with corresponding shipping
information).
PRODUCT LABELING
A.
2.4
Prior to shipment, the GCL manufacturer shall label each roll, identifying:
1.
Product identification information (Manufacturer’s name and address, brand
product code).
2.
Lot number and roll number.
3.
PACKAGING
Roll length, width and weight.
P35-140 Vol2-266
2.5
A.
The GCL shall be wound around a rigid core whose diameter is sufficient to facilitate
handling. The core is not necessarily intended to support the roll for lifting but should be
sufficiently strong to prevent collapse during transit.
B.
All rolls shall be labeled and bagged in packaging that is resistant to photo degradation
by ultraviolet (UV) light.
ACCESSORY BENTONITE
A.
The granular bentonite sealing clay used for overlap seaming, penetration sealing and
repairs shall be made from the same natural sodium bentonite as used in the GCL and
shall be as recommended by the GCL manufacturer. Seaming of GCLs shall be
conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications for each particular GCL.
Please refer to the installation guidelines for Bentomat GCLs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SHIPPING AND HANDLING
A.
The manufacturer assumes responsibility for initial loading the GCL. Shipping will be the
responsibility of the party paying the freight. Unloading, on-site handling and storage of
the GCL are the responsibility of the Contractor, Installer or other designated party.
B.
A visual inspection of each roll should be made during unloading to identify if any
packaging has been damaged. Rolls with damaged packaging should be marked and set
aside for further inspection. The packaging should be repaired prior to being placed in
storage.
C.
The party responsible for unloading the GCL should contact the Manufacturer prior to
shipment to ascertain the appropriateness of the proposed unloading methods and
equipment.
P35-140 Vol2-267
3.2
3.3
3.4
STORAGE
A.
Storage of the GCL rolls shall be the responsibility of the installer. A dedicated storage
area shall be selected at the job site that is away from high traffic areas and is level, dry
and well drained.
B.
Rolls should be stored in a manner that prevents sliding or rolling from the stacks and
may be accomplished by the use of chock blocks. Rolls should be stacked at a height no
higher than that at which the lifting apparatus can be safely handled (typically no higher
than four).
C.
All stored GCL materials and the accessory bentonite must be covered with a plastic
sheet or tarpaulin until their installation.
D.
The integrity and legibility of the labels shall be preserved during storage.
EARTHWORK
A.
Any earthen surface upon which the GCL is installed shall be prepared and compacted in
accordance with the project specifications and drawings.
B.
If the GCL is placed over an earthen subgrade, the surface must be compacted to at
least 90 percent modified Proctor density or to the extent required by the project
specifications. Engineer’s approval of the subgrade must be obtained prior to installation.
The finished surface must be firm and unyielding, without abrupt elevation changes,
voids, cracks, ice or standing water.
C.
The subgrade surface must be free of vegetation, sharp-edged rocks, stones, sticks,
construction debris and other foreign material that could contact the GCL. The subgrade
should be rolled with a smooth-drum compactor to remove any wheel ruts, footprints or
other abrupt grade changes. Furthermore, all protrusions extending more than 12mm
from the subgrade surface shall either be removed, crushed or pushed into the surface
with a smooth-drum compactor. The GCL may be installed on a frozen subgrade, but the
subgrade soil in the unfrozen state should meet the above requirements.
D.
On a continuing basis, the project CQA inspector shall certify acceptance of the subgrade
before GCL placement.
F.
It shall be the installer’s responsibility thereafter to indicate to the Engineer any change
in the condition of the subgrade that could cause the subgrade to be out of compliance
with any of the requirements listed in this Section.
F.
At the top of sloped areas of the job site, an anchor trench for the GCL shall be
excavated or an equivalent runout shall be utilized in accordance with the project plans
and specifications and as approved by the CQA Inspector. When utilizing an anchor
trench design, the trench shall be excavated and approved by the CQA Inspector prior to
GCL placement. No loose soil shall be allowed at the bottom of the trench and no sharp
corners or protrusions shall exist anywhere within the trench.
GCL PLACEMENT
A.
The areas to be lined with GCL shall be agreed upon by the Installer and the Engineer
prior to installation.
P35-140 Vol2-268
3.5
B.
GCL rolls should be delivered to the working area of the site in their original packaging.
Immediately prior to deployment, the packaging should be carefully removed without
damaging the GCL. The orientation of the GCL (i.e., which side faces up) should be in
accordance with the Engineer’s recommendations.
C.
Equipment, which could damage the GCL, shall not be allowed to travel directly on it. If
the installation equipment causes rutting of the subgrade, the subgrade must be restored
to its originally accepted condition before placement continues.
D.
Care must be taken to minimize the extent to which the GCL is dragged across the
subgrade in order to avoid damage to the bottom surface of the GCL. A temporary
geosynthetic subgrade covering commonly known as a slip sheet or rub sheet may be
used to reduce friction damage during placement.
E.
The GCL panels shall be placed parallel to the direction of the slope.
F.
All GCL panels should lie flat on the underlying surface, with no wrinkles or fold,
especially at the exposed edges of the panels.
ANCHORAGE
A.
3.6
3.7
As directed by the project drawings and specifications, the end of the GCL roll shall be
placed in an anchor trench at the top of the slope or an equivalent runout design shall be
utilized. When utilizing an anchor trench design, the front edge of the trench should be
rounded so as to eliminate any sharp corners. Loose soil should be removed from the
floor of the trench. The GCL should cover the entire trench floor but does not extend up
the rear trench wall.
SEAMING
A.
The GCL seams are constructed by overlapping their adjacent edges. Care should be
taken to ensure that the overlap zone is not contaminated with loose soil or other debris.
Bentonite-enhanced seams are required for installation of membrane-laminated GCLs.
B.
The minimum dimension of the longitudinal overlap for Bentomat CL should be 150 mm.
End-of-roll overlapped seams should be similarly constructed, but the minimum overlap
should measure 300 mm.
C.
Seams at the ends of the panels should be constructed such that they are shingled in the
direction of the grade to prevent the potential for runoff flow to enter the overlap zone.
D.
Bentonite-enhanced seams are constructed between the overlapping adjacent panels
described above. The underlying edge of the longitudinal overlap is exposed and then a
continuous bead of granular sodium bentonite is applied within the zone defined by the
edge of the underlying panel and the 150 mm line. A similar bead of granular sodium
bentonite is applied at the end-of-roll overlap. The granular bentonite shall be applied at a
minimum application rate of 0.4 kg/m.
DETAIL WORK
A.
The GCL shall be sealed around penetrations and embedded structures embedded in
accordance with the design drawings and the GCL Manufacturer.
P35-140 Vol2-269
B.
3.8
DAMAGE REPAIR
A.
3.9
Cutting the GCL should be performed using a sharp utility knife. Frequent blade
changes are recommended to avoid damage to the geotextile components of the GCL
during the cutting process.
If the GCL is damaged (torn, punctured, perforated, etc.) during installation, it may be
possible to repair it by cutting a patch to fit over the damaged area. The patch shall be
obtained from a new GCL roll and shall be cut to size such that a minimum overlap of 300
mm is achieved around all of the damaged area. Granular bentonite or bentonite mastic
should be applied around the damaged area prior to placement of the patch. It may be
desirable to use an adhesive to affix the patch in place so that it is not displaced during
cover placement.
COVER PLACEMENT
A.
Cover soils shall be free of large stones or other foreign matter that could damage the
GCL. Cover soils should be approved the project Engineer with respect to particle size,
uniformity and chemical compatibility. Cover soils with high concentrations of calcium
(e.g., limestone, dolomite) are not acceptable.
B.
Soil cover shall be placed over the GCL using construction equipment that minimizes
stresses on the GCL. A minimum thickness of 300 mm of cover should be maintained
between the equipment tires/tracks and the GCL at all times during the covering process.
This thickness recommendation does not apply to frequently trafficked areas or
roadways, for which a minimum thickness of 600 mm is required.
C.
Soil cover should be placed in a manner that prevents the soil from entering the GCL
overlap zones. Cover soil shall be pushed up slopes, not down slopes, to minimize
tensile forces on the GCL.
C.
Although direct vehicular contact with the GCL is to be avoided, lightweight, low ground
pressure vehicles (such as 4-wheel all-terrain vehicles) may be used to facilitate the
installation of any geosynthetic material placed over the GCL. The GCL supplier or CQA
engineer should be contacted with specific recommendations on the appropriate
procedures in this situation.
END OF SECTION 334713
Contingency 1801 Upgrade of Site Water Service if Directed by WSSC
NEW 1” WATER LINE FROM NEW
METER TO EXISTING WATER
MAIN. REPAIR PAVEMENT AS
REQUIRED BY MCDOT.
INSTALL NEW 3/4” WATER METER
SETTING FOR A 1” SERVICE, PER
WSSC STANDARD DETAIL NO. 5.6.
KEMP MILL URBAN PARK: CONTINGENCY ITEM 1801
UPGRADE OF SITE WATER SERVICE, IF DIRECTED BY WSSC.
NOTES:
1. CONTINGENCY WILL BE EXERCISED IF WSSC REQUIRES EXISTING WATER
SERVICE TO BE REPLACED AS A CONDITION OF THEIR PERMIT APPROVAL.
2. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PREPARING A MAINTENANCE
OF TRAFFIC PLAN AND OBTAINING APPROVAL FROM DPS.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WSSC PERMITTING AND
ASSOCIATED FEES.
4. ALL WORK TO BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT WSSC,
DPS AND MCDOT STANDARDS.
NEW 3/4” WATER LINE PER BASE
BID.
P35-140 Vol2-270
Final Forest Conservation Plan Number PP2011001 Approval
P35-140 Vol2-271
Final Forest Conservation Plan is
provided in Volume 3 on
Pages Vol3-6 through Vol3-12
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-272
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Kemp Mill Urban Park Development
1200 Arcola Avenue
Wheaton, MD
19955 Highland Vista Drive, Suite 170, Ashburn, Virginia 20147
703-726-8030 • Fax 703-726-8032 • www.geoconcepts-eng.com
145
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-273
19955 Highland Vista Dr., Suite 170
Ashburn, Virginia 20147
(703)726-8030
Fax (703) 726-8032
www.geoconcepts-eng.com
November 15, 2010
Mr. Dave Norden
Lewis Scully Gionet
1919 Gallows Road, Suite 110
Vienna, VA 22182
Subject:
Geotechnical Engineering Report, Kemp Mill Urban Park
Development, 1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, MD (Our
29016)
Dear Mr. Norden:
GeoConcepts Engineering, Inc. (GeoConcepts) is pleased to present this geotechnical engineering
report for the above referenced project. These services have been performed in accordance with our
agreement dated March 18, 2009.
1.0 Scope of Services
This geotechnical engineering report presents the results of the field investigation, soil laboratory
testing, and engineering analysis of the geotechnical data.
This report specifically addresses the
following:
•
An evaluation of subsurface conditions within the area of the proposed site development.
•
Foundation recommendations for support of the proposed site structures.
•
An assessment of subgrade conditions for support of flexible and rigid pavements, including an
estimated design California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value based on soil laboratory classification
test results.
•
Earthwork recommendations for construction of loadbearing fills, including an assessment of
on-site soils to be excavated for re-use as fill.
•
Recommendations regarding the feasibility of using stormwater management by infiltration,
including estimated infiltration rates based on field tests and published correlations with soil
classifications.
Services not specifically identified in the contract for this project are not included in the scope of
services.
2.0 Site Description and Proposed Construction
The Kemp Mill Urban Park is a 2.7-acre park located at 1200 Arcola Avenue, northwest of the
intersection of Arcola Avenue and Lamberton Drive, in Wheaton, Maryland.
A site vicinity map is
presented as Figure 1 at the end of this report. The site is currently a developed park including a manmade pond, playground area, a gazebo, and an asphalt basketball court.
146
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-274
Based on the information provided to us, we understand that the Park Development Division
(PDD) of the Montgomery County Department of Parks of the Maryland-National Capital Parks and
Planning Commission is planning to renovate and improve the existing Kemp Mill Urban Park.
The
anticipated design components include multiple site structures with foundations (pergola, gazebo, and 10
foot high pole lights), new water feature comprised of small pools, new relocated asphalt basketball
court, and pervious and impervious concrete walkways.
3.0 Subsurface Conditions
Subsurface conditions were investigated by drilling six test borings in the proposed site
development area.
Test boring logs and a boring location plan are presented in Appendix A of this
report.
3.1
Stratification
The subsurface materials encountered have been stratified for purposes of our discussions
herein. These stratum designations do not imply that the materials encountered are continuous across
the site. Stratum designations have been established to characterize similar subsurface conditions based
on material gradations and parent geology. The subsurface materials encountered in the test borings
completed at the site have been assigned to the following strata:
Stratum A
(Existing Fill)
generally medium stiff or firm, sandy silt, sandy lean
clay, sandy fat clay, and silty sand FILL, micaceous,
moist, brown and reddish-brown
Stratum B1
(Northwest Branch Formation)
generally medium stiff or firm, sandy silt (ML), sandy
lean clay (CL), and silty sand (SM), micaceous, moist,
brown and reddish-brown
Stratum B2
(Northwest Branch Formation)
very compact, DISINTEGRATED ROCK, moist, tan
The two letter designations included in the strata descriptions presented above and on the test
boring logs represent the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) group symbol and group name for the
samples based on laboratory testing per ASTM D-2487 and visual classifications per ASTM D-2488. It
should be noted that visual classifications per ASTM D-2488 may not match classifications determined by
laboratory testing per ASTM D-2487.
November 15, 2010
29016
147
Page 2
Kemp
3.2
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-275
Geology
The Kemp Mill Urban Park site lies within the Piedmont Physiographic Province of Maryland. The
Piedmont is bordered to the east by the Coastal Plain Physiographic Province and to the west by the Blue
Ridge Physiographic Province and contains several fault bordered basins.
Bedrock in the Piedmont
typically consists of highly weathered metamorphic and igneous bedrock.
Surface topography in the
Piedmont is the result of millions of years of erosion.
The existing fill soils of Stratum A are believed to be related to previous site grading.
The
underlying natural soils are residual materials derived from the physical and chemical weathering of the
underlying bedrock. Stratum B1 materials consist of the silt and sand soils, and Stratum B2 consists of
disintegrated rock.
The bedrock beneath the Kemp Mill Urban Park site consists of a schist rock
belonging to the Northwest Branch Formation from the Cambrian Geologic Period.
3.3
Groundwater
Groundwater level observations were made in the field during drilling and up to one day after the
completion of the test borings.
Longer-term groundwater level readings were obtained in temporary
water observation standpipes installed in test borings B-1, B-2, B-3, and B-4. A summary of the water
level readings rounded off to the nearest 0.5 feet elevation is presented in the table below.
Test Boring No.
Depth to Groundwater
(feet)
Approximate Groundwater
Elevation (feet)
B-1
Dry
-
B-2
Dry
-
B-3
11.0
380
B-4
Dry
-
The groundwater observations presented herein are considered to be an indication of the
groundwater levels at the dates and times indicated.
presented herein should be used with caution.
Accordingly, the groundwater information
Also, fluctuations in groundwater levels should be
expected with seasons of the year, construction activity, changes to surface grades, precipitation, or
other similar factors.
3.4
Soil Laboratory Test Results
Selected soil samples obtained from the field investigation were tested for grain size distribution
with hydrometer, Atterberg limits, and natural moisture contents.
A summary of soil laboratory test
results is presented as Appendix B. The results of natural moisture content tests are presented on the
test boring logs in Appendix A.
November 15, 2010
29016
148
Page 3
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-276
Samples tested from Stratum A classified as sandy LEAN CLAY (CL) and sandy FAT CLAY (CH) in
accordance with the USCS, with about 51 to 63 percent fines passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 sieve.
Liquid limits and plasticity indices ranged from 25 to 51 and 9 to 24, respectively.
Natural moisture
contents ranged from 12.2 to 27.7 percent.
Samples tested from Stratum B1 classified as silty SAND (SM) in accordance with the USCS, with
about 23 to 35 percent fines passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 sieve. Liquid limits and plasticity indices
ranged from non-plastic (NP) to 49 and NP to 11, respectively. Natural moisture contents ranged from
15.9 to 28.9 percent.
4.0 Engineering Analysis
Recommendations regarding foundations, pavements, earthwork, and stormwater management
by infiltration are presented herein.
4.1
Spread Footings
Based on the expected site development at the Kemp Mill Urban Park, firm natural soils or new
compacted fill should be encountered at normal spread footing depths. Spread footings founded in these
materials are considered suitable for support of the proposed park structures, and may be designed with
a net allowable soil bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. It should be feasible to increase the allowable bearing
pressure by one-third when considering temporary wind or seismic loads in the total loads.
The existing fill will not be suitable for direct support of spread footings.
Accordingly, we
recommend undercutting the existing fill to a depth of 2 feet below the design foundation subgrades or
to natural soils, whichever is less, and replace with new compacted fill. After undercutting the existing fill
and prior to placement of any new compacted fill, the undercut subgrade should be observed during
proofrolling by the geotechnical engineer to confirm that the new subgrade is suitable to receive new
compacted fill. The footings can then be constructed at normal design depths on the new compacted fill.
Fill material and compaction requirements are presented in Section 4.3 of this report.
Exterior footing subgrades should be located at least 2.5 feet below final exterior grades for frost
considerations. Individual column footings and continuous wall footings should be at least 30 inches and
18 inches wide, respectively, for local or punching shear considerations.
A maximum slope of one
horizontal to one vertical (1H:1V) should be maintained between the bottom edges of adjacent footings.
Footing subgrades should be observed and approved prior to placement of concrete, to ascertain
that footings are placed on suitable bearing soils as recommended herein. Footings should be excavated
and concrete placed the same day in order to avoid disturbance from water or weather. Disturbance of
footing subgrades by exposure to water seepage or weather conditions should be avoided. Any existing
fill, disturbed, frozen, or soft subgrade soils should be removed prior to placing footing concrete. It may
be desirable to place a 3 to 4-inch thick “mud mat” of lean concrete immediately on the approved footing
subgrade to avoid softening of the exposed subgrade.
November 15, 2010
29016
149
Forms may be used if necessary, but less
Page 4
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-277
subgrade disturbance is anticipated if excavations are made to the required dimensions and concrete
placed against the soil.
If footings are formed, the forms should be removed and the excavation
backfilled as soon as possible. Water should not be allowed to pond along the outside of footings for
long periods of time.
4.2
Pavements
Pavement subgrades are expected to consist of firm existing fill, natural soils, or new compacted
fill. These materials are generally considered suitable for support of the planned basketball or walkway
areas.
However, where pavement subgrades consist of existing fill, we recommend budgeting for
undercutting the existing fill to a depth of at least 2 feet and backfilling with new compacted fill. The
decision to undercut the existing fill should be based on a thorough proofroll of the pavement subgrades
under the observation of the geotechnical engineer.
Based on the soil laboratory test results for the materials expected at pavement subgrades, a
preliminary design CBR value of 5 is recommended for pavement design purposes. If fill placed at the
site is generated from off-site borrow areas, the actual CBR value for the pavement subgrades may be
significantly different from the preliminary value presented herein.
Therefore, CBR tests should be
performed on the in-place subgrade after rough grading and installation of utilities within roadways.
Final pavement sections should be based on CBR tests taken on subgrade soils at the time of
construction.
4.3
Earthwork
Fill may be required for site grading. Unsuitable existing fill, soft or loose natural soils, organic
material, and rubble should be stripped to approved subgrades as determined by the geotechnical
engineer. Topsoil depths presented on the boring logs should not be considered as stripping depths, as
topsoil depths may vary widely across the site, particularly in wooded or previously cultivated areas.
Stripping depths will probably extend to greater depths than the topsoil depths indicated herein due to
the presence of minor amounts of organics, roots, and other surficial materials that will require removal
as a part of the stripping operations. In addition, seasonal soil moisture variations can affect stripping
depths. In general, less stripping may occur during summer months when drier weather conditions can
be expected. It is noted from the test borings that the upper 1 to 1.5 feet of soils are relatively soft. All
subgrades should be proofrolled with a minimum 20 ton, loaded dump truck or suitable rubber tire
construction equipment approved by the geotechnical engineer, prior to the placement of new fill.
For building areas, the new fill should extend at least 10 feet outside building lines.
pavement areas, the new fill should extend at least 5 feet outside pavement edges.
For
These
recommendations are illustrated by Figure 2 at the end of this report.
Fill material should be placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness, with fill materials
compacted by hand operated tampers or light compaction equipment placed in maximum 4-inch thick
November 15, 2010
29016
150
Page 5
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-278
loose lifts. Fill should be compacted at +/- 2% of the optimum moisture content to at least 95 percent of
the maximum dry density per ASTM D-698.
The upper 6 inches of pavement subgrades should be
compacted to at least 100 percent of the maximum dry density per the same standard.
Materials used for compacted fill for support of footings, floor slabs, and pavements should
consist of soils classifying CL, ML, SC, SM, SP, SW, GC, GM, GP, or GW per ASTM D-2487, with a
maximum dry density greater than 105 pcf. Materials used for backfill against walls below grade should
consist of soils classifying ML, SM, SP, SW, GM, GP, or GW, with a liquid limit and plasticity index less
than 40 and 15, respectively.
It is expected that the majority of soils excavated at the site will be
suitable for re-use as fill based on classification, except for the fat clay soils of Stratum A that are
susceptible to softening and excessive shrink/swell. Also, some of the Stratum A existing fill may not be
suitable for re-use as new compacted fill due to deleterious man-made materials in the fill. In addition,
drying of excavated soils by spreading and aerating may be necessary to obtain proper compaction. This
may not be practical during the wet period of the year. Accordingly, earthwork operations should be
planned for early Spring through late Fall, when drier weather conditions can be expected. Individual
borrow areas, both from on-site and off-site sources, should be sampled and tested to verify classification
of materials prior to their use as fill.
Fill materials should not be placed on frozen or frost-heaved soils, and/or soils that have been
recently subjected to precipitation.
All frozen or frost-heaved soils should be removed prior to
continuation of fill operations. Borrow fill materials should not contain frozen materials at the time of
placement.
Compaction equipment that is compatible with the soil type used for fill should be selected.
Theoretically, any equipment type can be used as long as the required density is achieved; however,
sheepsfoot roller equipment are best suited for fine-grained soils and vibratory smooth drum rollers are
best suited for granular soils. Ideally, a smooth drum roller should be used for sealing the surface soils
at the end of the day or prior to upcoming rain events. In addition, compaction equipment used adjacent
to walls below grade should be selected so as to not impose undesirable surcharge on walls. All areas
receiving fill should be graded to facilitate positive drainage of any water associated with precipitation
and surface run-off.
After completion of compacted fill operations in building or pavement areas, construction of
building elements or asphalt should begin immediately, or the finished subgrade should be protected
from exposure to inclement weather conditions.
Exposure to precipitation and freeze/thaw cycles will
cause the finished subgrade to soften and become excessively disturbed. If development plans require
that finished subgrades remain exposed to weather conditions after completion of fill operations,
additional fill should be placed above finished grades to protect the newly placed fill. Alternatively, a
budget should be established for reworking of the upper 1 to 2 feet of previously placed compacted fill.
November 15, 2010
29016
151
Page 6
Kemp
4.4
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-279
Infiltration Analysis
Four offset test borings (B-1, B-2, B-3, and B-4) were drilled to perform in-situ infiltration tests
for evaluation of stormwater management by infiltration. Two methods were used to estimate infiltration
capabilities on the subject site: in-situ infiltration testing and published correlations with soil
classifications. Details regarding the in-situ infiltration and classification test techniques, the estimated
infiltration rates from the individual methods, and the recommended design infiltration rate for the site
soils are presented herein.
4.4.1
Infiltration Test Results
In-situ infiltration tests are performed in the field to observe the rate at which water will
permeate the soil under saturated conditions.
Four test borings were drilled in the area of planned
infiltration. Test borings were initially drilled to depths of 15 feet.
Offset infiltration test holes were then
drilled at about 5 feet horizontal offset distance from the original test borings, and to depths of 5 feet.
Five-inch diameter PVC casing was set to the bottom of the test holes. The purpose of the casing is to
prevent caving of test hole sidewalls. After setting the PVC casing, the boreholes were filled with water
to saturate the bottom subsoils. The following day, the test holes were refilled with water and the water
level in each test hole was recorded every hour for a 4-hour period. Using this procedure, the average
change in the water level over the 4-hour period is considered the infiltration rate. Based on the results
of the in-situ infiltration tests, estimated infiltration rates have been assigned for the site soils, as
presented in the table below.
Test Boring No.
Approximate Test Depth (feet)
Estimated Infiltration Rate
(inches/hour)
B-1
5.0
0.30
B-2
5.0
0.30
B-3
5.0
0.15
B-4
5.0
0.0
4.4.2
Classification Test Results
The classification test method is performed with grain-size sieve analyses including hydrometer
testing on samples obtained from corresponding proposed infiltration depths, to determine the USDA soil
texture classifications.
Published correlations between USDA classifications and infiltration rates were
used to provide estimated hydraulic conductivity values.
Since hydraulic conductivity and infiltration
values are essentially equal at no head conditions, using the hydraulic conductivity values to estimate the
infiltration rates provides a conservative estimate of infiltration for use in design. Estimated infiltration
rates using the USDA soil texture classifications are presented below.
November 15, 2010
29016
152
Page 7
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-280
Test Boring
No.
Approximate Test
Depth (feet)
USDA Soil Texture
Classification
Estimated
Infiltration Rate
(inches/hour)
B-1
5.0
Sandy Clay Loam
0.17
B-2
5.0
Sandy Clay Loam
0.17
B-3
5.0
Sandy Clay Loam
0.17
B-4
5.0
Sandy Loam
1.02
4.4.3
Recommended Design Infiltration Rate
Based on the results of the in-situ infiltration tests and soil laboratory classification tests, we
recommend that a design infiltration rate of 0.25 inches/hour be used for design of infiltration structures.
It should be noted that the recommended design infiltration rate presented herein is intended for use in
design.
However, during construction, observations of the subgrade conditions should be made to
confirm that the subgrade soils are consistent with the soils analyzed in this report.
5.0 General Limitations
Recommendations contained in this report are based upon the data obtained from the relatively
limited number of test borings. This report does not reflect conditions that may occur between the points
investigated, or between sampling intervals in test borings. The nature and extent of variations between
test borings and sampling intervals may not become evident until the course of construction. Therefore,
it is essential that on-site observations of subgrade conditions be performed during the construction
period to determine if re-evaluation of the recommendations in this report must be made. It is critical to
the successful completion of this project that GeoConcepts be retained during construction to observe the
implementation of the recommendations provided herein.
This report has been prepared to aid in the evaluation of the site and to assist your office and the
design professionals in the design of this project. It is intended for use with regard to the specific project
as described herein. Changes in proposed construction should be brought to our attention so that we
may determine any effect on the recommendations presented herein.
An allowance should be established for additional costs that may be required for foundation and
earthwork construction as recommended in this report.
Additional costs may be incurred for various
reasons including wet fill materials, soft subgrade conditions, unexpected groundwater problems, rock
excavation, etc.
This report should be made available to bidders prior to submitting their proposals to supply
them with facts relative to the subsurface conditions revealed by our investigation and the results of
analyses and studies that have been performed for this project. In addition, this report should be given
to the successful contractor and subcontractors for their information only.
November 15, 2010
29016
153
Page 8
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-281
We recommend the project specifications contain the following statement: “A geotechnical
engineering report has been prepared for this project by GeoConcepts Engineering, Inc. This report is for
informational purposes only and should not be considered part of the contract documents. The opinions
expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent their interpretation of the
subsoil conditions, tests and results of analyses that they performed. Should the data contained in this
report not be adequate for the contractor’s purposes, the contractor may make their own investigations,
tests and analyses prior to bidding.”
This report was prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering
practices. No warranties, expressed or implied, are made as to the professional services included in this
report.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of service for this project. Please contact the undersigned if
you require clarification of any aspect of this report.
Sincerely,
GEOCONCEPTS ENGINEERING, INC.
Gervas K. Wambura, PE
Senior Engineer
Paul E. Burkart, PE
Principal
Figure 1: Site Vicinity Map
Figure 2: Compacted Structural Fill Diagram
Appendix A: Subsurface Investigation Report
Appendix B: Soil Laboratory Test Report
JB/GKW/PEB/clm
N:\PROJECTS\Active 09 Projects\29016\Final\GER, 11-15-10.doc
November 15, 2010
29016
Page 9
154
Facility Plan Report
155
P35-140 Vol2-282
Kemp
Mill Urban Park


 


156
P35-140 Vol2-283
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-284
Appendix A
Contract No. 29016
Subsurface Investigation Report
Subsurface Investigation Procedures (1 page)
Identification of Soil (1 page)
Test Boring Notes (1 page)
Test Boring Logs (6 pages)
Boring Location Plan, Figure 3 (1 page)
Appendix A
Contract No. 29016
Subsurface Investigation Procedures
1.
Test Borings – Hollow Stem Augers
The borings are advanced by turning an auger with a center opening of 2-¼ inches. A plug
device blocks off the center opening while augers are advanced. Cuttings are brought to the
surface by the auger flights. Sampling is performed through the center opening in the hollow
stem auger, by standard methods, after removal of the plug. Usually, no water is introduced into
the boring using this procedure.
2.
Standard Penetration Tests
3.
Temporary Ground Water Observation Standpipes
4.
Test Boring Stakeout
Standard penetration tests are performed by driving a 2 inch O.D., 1-⅜ inch I.D. sampling spoon
with a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches, according to ASTM D-1586. After an initial 6 inches
penetration to assure the sampling spoon is in undisturbed material, the number of blows
required to drive the sampler an additional 12 inches is generally taken as the N value. In the
event 30 or more blows are required to drive the sampling spoon the initial 6 inch interval, the
sampling spoon is driven to a total penetration resistance of 100 blows or 18 inches, whichever
occurs first. The sampling operation is terminated after a total of 100 hammer blows and the
depth of penetration is recorded.
Temporary ground water observation standpipes were installed in test borings B-1, B-2, B-3, and
B-4 to observe groundwater levels. The standpipes were installed by inserting a 1-1/4 inch
diameter plastic pipe through the 2-1/4 inch center opening of the auger. Groundwater level
observations were made as shown on the test boring logs. The standpipes were removed from
the borings after completion of the final water level readings.
The test boring stakeout was provided by GeoConcepts personnel using available site plans.
Ground surface elevations were estimated from topographic information contained on the site
plan provided to us and should be considered approximate. If the risk related to using
approximate boring locations and elevations is unacceptable, we recommend an as-drilled survey
of boring locations and elevations be completed by a licensed surveyor.
157
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-285
19955 Highland Vista Dr., Suite 170
Ashburn, Virginia 20147
(703) 726-8030
Fax (703) 726-8032
www.geoconcepts-eng.com
IDENTIFICATION OF SOIL
I.
DEFINITION OF SOIL GROUP NAMES
Coarse-Grained Soils
More than 50% retained
on No. 200 sieve
ASTM D-2487
Gravels More than 50% of coarse fraction
retained on No. 4 sieve
Sands - 50% or more of coarse
fraction passes No. 4 sieve
Fine-Grained Soils
50% or more passes
the No. 200 sieve
Silts and Clays Liquid Limit less than
50
Silts and Clays Liquid Limit 50 or more
Highly Organic Soils
II.
III.
Symbol
Group Name
Clean Gravels
Less than 5% fines
GW
WELL GRADED GRAVEL
GP
POORLY GRADED GRAVEL
Gravels with Fines
More than 12% fines
GM
silty GRAVEL
GC
clayey GRAVEL
Clean Sands
Less than 5% fines
SW
WELL GRADED SAND
SP
POORLY GRADED SAND
Sands with fines
More than 12% fines
SM
silty SAND
SC
clayey SAND
Inorganic
CL
LEAN CLAY
ML
SILT
Organic
OL
Inorganic
CH
MH
OH
ORGANIC CLAY
ORGANIC SILT
FAT CLAY
ELASTIC SILT
ORGANIC CLAY
ORGANIC SILT
PEAT
Organic
Primarily organic matter, dark in color, and organic odor
DEFINITION OF MINOR COMPONENT PROPORTIONS
Minor Component
Adjective Form
Gravelly, Sandy
With
Sand, Gravel
Silt, Clay
PT
Approximate Percentage of Fraction by Weight
30% or more coarse grained
15% to 29% coarse grained
5% to 12% fine grained
GLOSSARY OF MISCELLANEOUS TERMS
SYMBOLS BOULDERS & COBBLES DISINTEGRATED ROCK ROCK DECOMPOSED ROCK ROCK FRAGMENTS QUARTZ CEMENTED SAND MICA ORGANIC MATERIALS (Excluding Peat) FILL PROBABLE FILL LAYERS COLOR MOISTURE CONDITIONS -
Unified Soil Classification Symbols are shown above as group symbols. Use “A” Line Chart
for laboratory identification. Dual symbols are used for borderline classification.
Boulders are considered pieces of rock larger than 12 inches, while cobbles range from 3 to
12 inches.
Residual rock material with a standard penetration test (SPT) resistance between 60 blows
per foot and refusal.
Rock material with a standard penetration test (SPT) resistance of 100 blows for 2 inches or
50 blows for 0 inches, or less penetration
Residual rock material exhibiting rock-like properties that can be excavated by backhoe
equipment. Similar to Disintegrated Rock, but cannot be classified as such because SPT NValues were not obtained.
Angular pieces of rock, distinguished from rounded transported gravel, which have
separated from original vein or strata and are present in a soil matrix.
A hard silicate mineral often found in residual soils. Only used when describing residual
soils.
Usually localized rock-like deposits within a soil stratum composed of sand grains cemented
by calcium carbonate, iron oxide, or other minerals. Commonly encountered in Coastal
Plain sediments, primarily in the Potomac Group sands (Kps).
A plate-like phyllosilicate mineral found in many rocks, and in residual or transported soil
derived therefrom.
Topsoil - Surface soils that support plant life and contain organic matter.
Lignite - Hard, brittle decomposed organic matter with low fixed carbon content (a low
grade of coal).
Man made deposit containing soil, rock, and other foreign matter.
Soils which contain no visually detected foreign matter but which are suspect with regard to
origin.
½ to 12 inch seam of minor soil component.
Two most predominant colors present should be described.
Wet, moist, or dry to indicate visual appearance of specimen.
N:\Forms\DPS\Soil ID, 6-08.doc
158
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-286
Appendix A
Contract No. 29016
Test Boring Notes
1.
Classification of soil is by visual inspection and is in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification
System.
2.
Estimated groundwater levels are indicated on the logs. These are only estimates from available
data and may vary with precipitation, porosity of soil, site topography, etc.
3.
Sampling data presents standard penetrations for 6-inch intervals or as indicated with graphic
representations adjacent to the sampling data.
4.
The logs and related information depict subsurface conditions at the specific locations and at the
particular time when drilled. Soil conditions at other locations may differ from conditions
occurring at the test locations. Also, the passage of time may result in a change in the
subsurface conditions at the test locations.
5.
The stratification lines represent the approximate boundary between soil types as determined in
the sampling operation. Some variation may be expected vertically between samples taken. The
soil profile, groundwater level observations and penetration resistances presented on the logs
have been made with reasonable care and accuracy and must be considered only an approximate
representation of subsurface conditions to be encountered at the particular location.
6.
Disintegrated rock is defined as residual earth material with a penetration resistance between 60
blows per foot and refusal. Spoon refusal at the surface of rock, boulders, or obstructions is
defined as a penetration resistance of 50 blows for 0 inches penetration. Auger refusal is taken
as the depth at which further penetration of the auger is not possible without risking significant
damage to the drilling equipment.
159
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-287
19955 Highland Vista Dr., #170 (703) 726-8030
Ashburn, VA 20147
(703) 726-8032 fax
PROJECT:
LOGGED BY:
Kemp Mill Urban Park
J. Brackett/J. Gruber
LOCATION:
B-1
DRILLING CONTRACTOR:
Connelly and Associates, Inc.
1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, Maryland
OWNER/CLIENT:
Lewis Scully Gionet
DATE COMPLETED:
394.0
RECOVERY
(in)
SPT
BLOW
COUNTS
MC (%)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
10/21/10
SAMPLE
TYPE
PP
(tsf)
2.25" I.D. HSA
Topsoil = 6 inches
sandy lean clay FILL, micaceous, moist, brown
395.5
10/21/10
DRILLING METHOD:
396.0 ±
STRATUM
ELEV. DEPTH
(ft)
(ft)
D. Weller
GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION (ft):
29016
SHEET 1 OF 1
DATE STARTED:
DRILLER:
PROJECT NUMBER:
24.5
2+1+2+2
20
9.9
5+6+7+6
24
6+7+7+5
24
A
387.5
B2
10
DISINTEGRATED ROCK, moist, tan
6.1
20+50/6.5 11
Auger Refusal at 10.0 ft
15
11/15/10
20
BOREHOLE/TEST PIT LOGS.GPJ
STANDARD
PENETRATION
TEST RESISTANCE
(BLOWS/FOOT)
20
40
60
80
silty sand FILL, micaceous, moist, brown
5
386.0
BORING NUMBER:
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
ENCOUNTERED:
UPON COMPLETION:
REMARKS:
SAMPLE TYPES:
None
Dry
Split Spoon
CAVED:
9.5
ft
ELEV.
386.5
Temporary standpipe installed.
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT APPROXIMATE BOUNDARIES. THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
160
>>
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-288
19955 Highland Vista Dr., #170 (703) 726-8030
Ashburn, VA 20147
(703) 726-8032 fax
PROJECT:
LOGGED BY:
Kemp Mill Urban Park
BORING NUMBER:
J. Brackett/J. Gruber
LOCATION:
B-2
DRILLING CONTRACTOR:
Connelly and Associates, Inc.
1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, Maryland
OWNER/CLIENT:
Lewis Scully Gionet
10/21/10
DRILLING METHOD:
394.0 ±
DATE COMPLETED:
Topsoil = 2 inches
sandy lean clay FILL, moist, brown
393.8
2+3+3+3
RECOVERY
(in)
10/21/10
SPT
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
MC (%)
2.25" I.D. HSA
PP
(tsf)
STRATUM
29016
ELEV. DEPTH
(ft)
(ft)
D. Weller
GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION (ft):
SAMPLE
TYPE
PROJECT NUMBER:
SHEET 1 OF 1
DATE STARTED:
DRILLER:
24
A
12.2
390.0
silty SAND (SM), micaceous, moist, brown
10+9+5+7 24
5
10
379.0
5+9+10+10 24
B1
reddish-brown below 8.5 ft.
20.2
14+11+16 18
14+11+16 18
15
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft
BOREHOLE/TEST PIT LOGS.GPJ
11/15/10
20
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
ENCOUNTERED:
UPON COMPLETION:
REMARKS:
SAMPLE TYPES:
None
Dry
Split Spoon
CAVED:
12.0
ft
ELEV.
382.0
Temporary standpipe installed.
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT APPROXIMATE BOUNDARIES. THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
161
STANDARD
PENETRATION
TEST RESISTANCE
(BLOWS/FOOT)
20
40
60
80
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-289
19955 Highland Vista Dr., #170 (703) 726-8030
Ashburn, VA 20147
(703) 726-8032 fax
PROJECT:
LOGGED BY:
Kemp Mill Urban Park
BORING NUMBER:
J. Brackett/J. Gruber
LOCATION:
B-3
DRILLING CONTRACTOR:
1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, Maryland
Connelly and Associates, Inc.
OWNER/CLIENT:
Lewis Scully Gionet
10/21/10
DRILLING METHOD:
391.0 ±
DATE COMPLETED:
Topsoil = 4 inches
sandy lean clay FILL, micaceous, moist, brown
390.7
22.7
387.0
5
A
382.5
RECOVERY
(in)
10/21/10
SPT
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
MC (%)
2.25" I.D. HSA
PP
(tsf)
STRATUM
29016
ELEV. DEPTH
(ft)
(ft)
D. Weller
GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION (ft):
SAMPLE
TYPE
PROJECT NUMBER:
SHEET 1 OF 1
DATE STARTED:
DRILLER:
2+2+3+3
20
5+5+7+7
24
silty sand FILL, micaceous, moist, brown
11+12+12+9 24
sandy SILT (ML), micaceous, moist, brown-red
22.0
3+3+4
18
5+6+9
18
10
B1
376.0
15
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft
BOREHOLE/TEST PIT LOGS.GPJ
11/15/10
20
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
ENCOUNTERED:
SAMPLE TYPES:
None
UPON COMPLETION:
Dry
10/22/2010
10.9
REMARKS:
Split Spoon
ft
ELEV.
380.2
Temporary standpipe installed.
Offset 15.0 ft due to underground utilities.
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT APPROXIMATE BOUNDARIES. THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
162
STANDARD
PENETRATION
TEST RESISTANCE
(BLOWS/FOOT)
20
40
60
80
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-290
19955 Highland Vista Dr., #170 (703) 726-8030
Ashburn, VA 20147
(703) 726-8032 fax
PROJECT:
LOGGED BY:
Kemp Mill Urban Park
BORING NUMBER:
J. Brackett/J. Gruber
LOCATION:
B-4
DRILLING CONTRACTOR:
Connelly and Associates, Inc.
1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, Maryland
OWNER/CLIENT:
Lewis Scully Gionet
10/21/10
DRILLING METHOD:
391.0 ±
DATE COMPLETED:
Topsoil = 6 inches
sandy fat clay FILL, micaceous, moist, brown
390.5
RECOVERY
(in)
10/21/10
SPT
BLOW
COUNTS
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
MC (%)
2.25" I.D. HSA
PP
(tsf)
STRATUM
29016
ELEV. DEPTH
(ft)
(ft)
D. Weller
GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION (ft):
SAMPLE
TYPE
PROJECT NUMBER:
SHEET 1 OF 1
DATE STARTED:
DRILLER:
2+2+3+2
18
2+3+3+3
24
4+5+5+4
24
15.9
3+3+4
18
28.9
2+1+2
18
A
27.7
387.0
silty SAND (SM), micaceous, moist, brown-red
5
10
376.0
B1
15
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft
BOREHOLE/TEST PIT LOGS.GPJ
11/15/10
20
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
ENCOUNTERED:
UPON COMPLETION:
REMARKS:
SAMPLE TYPES:
None
Split Spoon
Dry
Temporary standpipe installed.
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT APPROXIMATE BOUNDARIES. THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
163
STANDARD
PENETRATION
TEST RESISTANCE
(BLOWS/FOOT)
20
40
60
80
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-291
19955 Highland Vista Dr., #170 (703) 726-8030
Ashburn, VA 20147
(703) 726-8032 fax
PROJECT:
LOGGED BY:
Kemp Mill Urban Park
BORING NUMBER:
J. Brackett/J. Gruber
LOCATION:
Connelly and Associates, Inc.
1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, Maryland
OWNER/CLIENT:
Lewis Scully Gionet
10/21/10
DRILLING METHOD:
392.0 ±
DATE COMPLETED:
Topsoil = 2 inches
sandy silt FILL, moist, light brown
391.8
1+4+7+8
A
5
10
377.0
RECOVERY
(in)
SPT
BLOW
COUNTS
MC (%)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
10/21/10
SAMPLE
TYPE
2.25" I.D. HSA
PP
(tsf)
STRATUM
ELEV. DEPTH
(ft)
(ft)
D. Weller
GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION (ft):
29016
SHEET 1 OF 1
DATE STARTED:
DRILLER:
PROJECT NUMBER:
387.0
B-5
DRILLING CONTRACTOR:
20
7+8+9+14 24
sandy SILT (ML), micaceous, moist, brown-red
15.0
6+5+7
18
3+4+7
18
2+3+4
18
B1
20.2
15
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft
BOREHOLE/TEST PIT LOGS.GPJ
11/15/10
20
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
ENCOUNTERED:
UPON COMPLETION:
REMARKS:
SAMPLE TYPES:
None
Dry
Split Spoon
CAVED:
15.0
ft
ELEV.
377.0
Backfilled upon completion for safety concerns.
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT APPROXIMATE BOUNDARIES. THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
164
STANDARD
PENETRATION
TEST RESISTANCE
(BLOWS/FOOT)
20
40
60
80
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-292
19955 Highland Vista Dr., #170 (703) 726-8030
Ashburn, VA 20147
(703) 726-8032 fax
PROJECT:
LOGGED BY:
Kemp Mill Urban Park
BORING NUMBER:
J. Brackett/J. Gruber
LOCATION:
Connelly and Associates, Inc.
1200 Arcola Avenue, Wheaton, Maryland
OWNER/CLIENT:
Lewis Scully Gionet
10/21/10
DRILLING METHOD:
394.0 ±
DATE COMPLETED:
Topsoil = 6 inches
sandy silt FILL, micaceous, moist, brown-red
393.5
A
5
19.2
sandy SILT (ML), micaceous, moist, brown-red
16.0
10
RECOVERY
(in)
0+2+2+1
24
2+2+2+4
10
4+4+4
12
4+4+7
18
6+5+14
18
B1
381.0
379.0
SPT
BLOW
COUNTS
MC (%)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
10/21/10
SAMPLE
TYPE
2.25" I.D. HSA
PP
(tsf)
STRATUM
ELEV. DEPTH
(ft)
(ft)
D. Weller
GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION (ft):
29016
SHEET 1 OF 1
DATE STARTED:
DRILLER:
PROJECT NUMBER:
389.0
B-6
DRILLING CONTRACTOR:
silty SAND (SM), micaceous, moist, red
15
Bottom of Boring at 15.0 ft
BOREHOLE/TEST PIT LOGS.GPJ
11/15/10
20
GROUND WATER LEVELS:
ENCOUNTERED:
UPON COMPLETION:
REMARKS:
SAMPLE TYPES:
None
Dry
Split Spoon
CAVED:
12.0
ft
ELEV.
382.0
Backfilled upon completion for safety concerns.
THE STRATIFICATION LINES REPRESENT APPROXIMATE BOUNDARIES. THE TRANSITION MAY BE GRADUAL.
165
STANDARD
PENETRATION
TEST RESISTANCE
(BLOWS/FOOT)
20
40
60
80
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
166
P35-140 Vol2-293
Facility Plan Report
P35-140 Vol2-294
Appendix B
Contract No. 29016
Soil Laboratory Test Report
Summary of Soil Laboratory Test Results (1 page)
Textural Analyses (1 page)
Summary of Soil Laboratory Test Results
Project: Kemp Mill Urban Park Development
Boring
Depth Sample Stratum
(ft.)
Type
Contract No.: 29016
Description of Soil Specimen
Sieve
Atterberg
Results
Limits
Natural
Percent
Moisture
Percent
LL PL PI Content
Retained
Passing
# 4 Sieve # 200 Sieve
(%)
B-2
2.0-4.0
Jar
A
sandy LEAN CLAY (CL)
2.3
51.1
25
16
9
12.2
B-2
8.5-10.0
Jar
B1
silty SAND (SM)
0.6
23.2
NP
NP
NP
20.2
B-4
2.0-4.0
Jar
A
sandy FAT CLAY (CH)
2.6
62.9
51
27
24
27.7
B-4
8.5-10.0
Jar
B1
silty SAND (SM)
0.0
24.3
NP
NP
NP
15.9
B-4
13.5-15.0
Jar
B1
silty SAND (SM)
2.2
34.5
49
38
11
28.9
Notes:
1. Soil tests are in accordance with applicable ASTM standards.
2. Soil classification symbols are in accordance with Unified Soil Classification System.
3. Visual identification of samples is in accordance with ASTM D-2488.
4. Key to abbreviations: LL= Liquid Limit; PL= Plastic Limit; PI= Plasticity Index; NP= Nonplastic; N/T = Not Tested
N:\PROJECTS\Active 09 Projects\29016\Final\Summary of soil lab test results.xls
167
Remarks
Kemp
Mill Urban Park
P35-140 Vol2-295
­Š
ˆ€‰„††ˆ
­€‚‚€ƒ€­„€€„­
„ƒ€
……„­† „ƒ

  ‡


‘
‹ŒŽ
’€„“€ˆ€ƒƒ
”• “Œ


…–
–
–
ŽŽ†Œ

–
–
–
ŽŽ†Œ

…–
–
–
ŽŽ†Œ

–
–
–
Ž†Œ
Ž
‹Ž—†€
†‹
„”–
168
P35-140 Vol2-296
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350347 - Yeshiva HS
P35-140 Vol2-297
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350347 - Yeshiva HS
P35-140 Vol2-298
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350347 - Yeshiva HS
P35-140 Vol2-299
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350347 - Yeshiva HS
P35-140 Vol2-300
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
P35-140 Vol2-301
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
P35-140 Vol2-302
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
P35-140 Vol2-303
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
P35-140 Vol2-304
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
P35-140 Vol2-305
Grant of Entry Permission Agreement 350360 - Della Ratta Inc
P35-140 Vol2-306